WO1999067425A9 - Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes - Google Patents

Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes

Info

Publication number
WO1999067425A9
WO1999067425A9 PCT/US1999/014191 US9914191W WO9967425A9 WO 1999067425 A9 WO1999067425 A9 WO 1999067425A9 US 9914191 W US9914191 W US 9914191W WO 9967425 A9 WO9967425 A9 WO 9967425A9
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
preferred
electrode
nucleic acid
capture
detection
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1999/014191
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO1999067425A3 (en
WO1999067425A2 (en
Inventor
Jon Faiz Kayyem
Gary Blackburn
Stephen D O'connor
Original Assignee
Clinical Micro Sensors Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Clinical Micro Sensors Inc filed Critical Clinical Micro Sensors Inc
Priority to AU47099/99A priority Critical patent/AU772382B2/en
Priority to CA002330182A priority patent/CA2330182A1/en
Priority to EP99930592A priority patent/EP1090145A2/en
Priority to JP2000556065A priority patent/JP2002518690A/en
Publication of WO1999067425A2 publication Critical patent/WO1999067425A2/en
Publication of WO1999067425A3 publication Critical patent/WO1999067425A3/en
Publication of WO1999067425A9 publication Critical patent/WO1999067425A9/en
Priority to AU2004201066A priority patent/AU2004201066A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B82NANOTECHNOLOGY
    • B82YSPECIFIC USES OR APPLICATIONS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MEASUREMENT OR ANALYSIS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MANUFACTURE OR TREATMENT OF NANOSTRUCTURES
    • B82Y15/00Nanotechnology for interacting, sensing or actuating, e.g. quantum dots as markers in protein assays or molecular motors
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6813Hybridisation assays
    • C12Q1/6816Hybridisation assays characterised by the detection means
    • C12Q1/6825Nucleic acid detection involving sensors
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B82NANOTECHNOLOGY
    • B82YSPECIFIC USES OR APPLICATIONS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MEASUREMENT OR ANALYSIS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MANUFACTURE OR TREATMENT OF NANOSTRUCTURES
    • B82Y30/00Nanotechnology for materials or surface science, e.g. nanocomposites

Definitions

  • the invention relates to compositions and methods useful in the acceleration of binding of target analytes to capture ligands on surfaces Detection proceeds through the use of an electron transfer moiety (ETM) that is associated with the target analyte, either directly or indirectly, to allow electronic detection of the ETM
  • ETM electron transfer moiety
  • biosensors At least two types of biosensors are known enzyme-based or metabolic biosensors and binding or bioaffinity sensors See for example U S Patent No 4,713,347, 5,192,507, 4,920,047, 3,873,267, and references disclosed therein While some of these known sensors use alternating current (AC) techniques, these techniques are generally limited to the detection of differences in bulk (or dielectric) impedance
  • AC alternating current
  • electrophoresis in microfluidic methods to facilitate the binding of biological molecules to their binding partners for subsequent detection is known, see for example U S Patent Nos 5,605,662 and 5,632,957, and references disclosed therein
  • the present invention provides methods of detecting a target analyte in a sample
  • the methods comprise concentrating the target analyte in a detection chamber comprising a detection electrode comprising a covalently attached capture ligand
  • the target analyte is bound to the capture ligand to form an assay complex comprising at least one electron transfer moiety (ETM)
  • ETM electron transfer moiety
  • the concentration step comprises placing the sample in an electric field between at least a first electrode and at least a second electrode sufficient to cause electrophoretic transport of the sample to the detection electrode
  • the concentration step comprises including at least one volume exclusion agent in the detection chamber
  • the concentration step comprises comprises precipitating the target analyte
  • the concentration step comprises including at least two reagents that form two separable solution phases, such that the target analyte concentrates in one of the phases
  • the concentration step comprises binding the target analyte to a shuttle particle
  • the invention provides methods of detecting target analytes comprising flowing the sample past a detection electrode comprising a covalently attached capture ligand under conditions that result in the formation of an assay complex
  • the assay complex further comprises at least one electron transfer moiety (ETM), and the presence of the ETM is detected using said detection electrode
  • the methods are for the detection of target nucleic acids and include the use of hybridization accelerators
  • the assay complex is formed in the presence of a hybridization accelerator, that may be a nucleic acid binding protein or a polyvalent ion
  • the invention provides methods of detecting a target analyte in a sample comprising adding the sample to a detection electrode comprising a covalently attached capture ligand under conditions that result in the formation of an assay complex
  • the conditions include the presence of mixing particles
  • the invention provides substrates comprising a plurality of gold electrodes
  • Each gold electrode comprises a self-assembled monolayer, a capture ligand, and an interconnect such that each electrode is independently addressable
  • Preferred substrates include printed circuit board materials such as fiberglass
  • the invention provides methods of making a substrate comprising a plurality of gold electrodes
  • the methods comprise coating an adhesion metal onto a fiberglass substrate, and coating gold onto the adhesion metal A pattern is then formed using lithography, and the pattern comprises the plurality of electrodes and associated interconnects
  • the methods optionally include adding a self-assembled monolayer (SAM) to each electrode
  • the invention provides methods of making a substrate comprising a plurality of gold electrodes
  • the methods comprise coating an adhesion metal onto a substrate, and coating gold onto the adhesion metal A pattern is then formed using lithography, and the pattern comprises the plurality of electrodes and associated interconnects
  • the methods further include adding a self- assembled monolayer (SAM) to each electrode
  • Figures 1A, 1 B, 1C, 1 D 1 E and 1 F depict several representative configurations of the use of two sets of electrodes, an electrophoresis set and a detection set
  • a substrate 30 has a first electrophoresis electrode 10 with detection electrodes 20 either on top or embedded in but electrically isolated from the electrophoresis electrode
  • the counter electrode for the electrophoresis and detection electrodes are not shown
  • Figure 1C represents a side view of Figure 1 A, with the addition of the counter electrophoresis electrode 50 and optionally the counter detection electrode 60 A permeation layer 25 is also shown
  • these counter electrodes may be the same electrode, if they are used sequentially
  • Figures 1 D, 1 E and 1 F depicts the use of individual electrophoresis electrodes
  • Figure 1 E is a side view of 1 D
  • Figure 1 F shows the configuration for sequentially moving a sample from one detection electrode to another, as is more fully described below
  • Figure 2 depicts the use of multidimensional arrays of electrophoresis electrodes for both spatial targeting of the sample as well as “mixing” to increase binding kinetics
  • Figure 2A shows electrophoresis electrodes 10 and detection electrodes 20 Electrophoresis voltage applied as between electrophoretic electrodes 10 and 15 and, at the same time, electrophoretic electrodes 12 and 17, can drive the target analyte to detector electrode 20
  • Figures 3A, 3B and 3C depict three preferred embodiments for attaching a target sequence to the electrode
  • Figure 3A depicts a target sequence 120 hybridized to a capture probe 100 linked via a attachment linker 106, which as outlined herein may be either a conductive oligomer or an insulator
  • the electrode 105 comprises a monolayer of passivation agent 107, which can comprise conductive o gomers (herein depicted as 108) and/or insulators (herein depicted as 109)
  • n is an integer of at least 1 , although as will be appreciated by those in the art, the system may not utilize a capture probe at all (i e n is zero), although this is generally not preferred
  • the upper limit of n will depend on the length of the target sequence and the required sensitivity
  • Figure 3B depicts the use of a single capture extender probe 110 with a first portion 111 that will hybridize to a first portion of the target sequence 120 and a second portion that will hybridize to the capture
  • Figures 4A, 4B, 4C and 4D depict several possible mechan ⁇ sm-1 systems
  • Figures 4A, 4B and 4C depict several possible nucleic acid systems
  • a detection probe 140 (which also serves as a capture probe) is attached to electrode 105 via a conductive o gomer 108
  • the electrode 105 further comprises a monolayer of passivation agents 107
  • the target sequence 120 hybridizes to the detection probe 140, and an ETM 135 is attached (either covalently to one or other of the target sequence or the detection probe or noncovalently, i e as a hybridization indicator)
  • a Figure 3A attachment to the electrode is used, with a capture probe 100 attached to the electrode 105 using an attachment linker 106, which can be either an insulator or a conductive ohgomer
  • the target sequence 120 is hybridized to the capture probe, and a label probe 145, comprising a first portion 141 that hybridizes to a portion of the target sequence 105 and a recruitment
  • FIG. 3C utilizes a Figure 3B attachment to the electrode
  • Figure 4D depicts a non-nucleic target analyte 165 bound to a capture binding ligand 160, attached to the electrode 105 via an attachment linker 106
  • a solution binding ligand 170 also binds to the target analyte and comprises a recruitment linker 171 comprising nucleic acid that will hybridize to the detection probe 140 with at least one ETM 135 present
  • Figures 5A, 5B, 5C, 5D, 5E, 4F and 4G depict some of the nucleic acid mechan ⁇ sm-2 embodiments of the invention All of the monolayers depicted herein show the presence of both conductive oligomers
  • any one of these structures may be repeated for a particular target sequence, that is, for long target sequences, there may be multiple assay complexes formed
  • any of the electrode- attachment embodiments of Figure 3 may be used in any of these systems
  • Figures 5A, 5B and 5D have the target sequence 120 containing the ETMs 135, as discussed herein these may be added enzymatically, for example during a PCR reaction using nucleotides modified with ETMs, resulting in essentially random incorporation throughout the target sequence, or added to the terminus of the target sequence
  • Figure 5C depicts the use of two different capture probes 100 and 100', that hybridize to different portions of the target sequence 120 As will be appreciated by those in the art, the 5'-3' orientation of the two capture probes in this embodiment is different
  • Figure 5C depicts the use of label probes 145 that hybridize directly to the target sequence 120
  • Figure 5C shows the use of a label probe 145, comprising a first portion 141 that hybridizes to a portion of the target sequence 120, a second portion 142 comprising ETMs 135
  • Figures 5E, 5F and 5G depict systems utilizing label probes 145 that do not hybridize directly to the target, but rather to amplifier probes that are directly (Figure 5E) or indirectly (Figures 5F and 5G) hybridized to the target sequence
  • Figure 5E utilizes an amplifier probe 150 has a first portion 151 that hybridizes to the target sequence 120 and at least one second portion 152, i e the amplifier sequence, that hybridizes to the first portion 141 of the label probe
  • Figure 5F is similar, except that a first label extender probe 160 is used, comprising a first portion 161 that hybridizes to the target sequence 120 and a second portion 162 that hybridizes to a first portion 151 of amplifier probe 150
  • a second portion 152 of the amplifier probe 150 hybridizes to a first portion 141 of the label probe 140, which also comprises a recruitment linker 142 comprising ETMs 135
  • Figure 5G adds a second label extender probe 170, with a first portion 171 that hybridizes to a
  • Figure 5H depicts a system that utilizes multiple label probes
  • the first portion 141 of the label probe 140 can hybridize to all or part of the recruitment linker 142
  • Figures 6A - 6H depict some of the possible non-nucleic acid mechan ⁇ sm-2 embodiments
  • Figure 6A utilizes a capture binding ligand 200 linked to the electrode 105 by an attachment linker 106
  • Target analyte 205 binds to the capture binding ligand 200 and to a solution binding ligand 210 with a recruitment linker 220 comprising ETMs 135
  • Figure 6B depicts a similar case, except that the capture binding ligand 200 is attached to the surface using a second binding partner interaction, for example a nucleic acid, a portion 201 of the capture binding ligand will bind or hybridize to a capture probe 100 on the surface
  • Figure 6C also utilizes a second binding interaction, for example a nucleic acid interaction, to amplify the signal
  • the solution binding ligand 210 comprises a first portion 220 that will bind or hybridize to a first pontion 231 of a label probe 230
  • the label probe 230 also comprises
  • Figures 7A, 7B, 7C, 7D and 7E depict different possible configurations of label probes and attachments of ETMs
  • F dend ⁇ mer structure, attached via a base, nbose or phosphate (or other backbone analogs)
  • G attachment via a "branching" structure, through base, nbose or phosphate (or other backbone analogs)
  • H attachment of metallocene (or other ETM) polymers
  • I attachment via a dendnmer structure
  • J attachment using standard linkers
  • FIG 8 depicts a schematic of an alternate method of adding large numbers of ETMs simultaneously to a nucleic acid using a "branch" point phosphoramidite, as is known in the art
  • each end point can contain any number of ETMs
  • Figure 9 depicts a schematic of the synthesis of simultaneous incorporation of multiple ETMs into a nucleic acid, using a "branch" point nucleoside
  • Figure 10 depicts the synthesis of a "branch" point (in this case an adenosine), to allow the addition of ETM polymers
  • Figure 11 depicts the use of an activated carboxylate for the addition of a nucleic acid functionalized with a primary amine to a pre-formed SAM
  • Figure 12 depicts a representative hairpin structure 500 is a target binding sequence, 510 is a loop sequence, 520 is a self-complementary region, 530 is substantially complementary to a detection probe, and 530 is the "sticky end", that is, a portion that does not hybridize to any other portion of the probe, that contains the ETMs Figures 13A, 13B, 13C and 13D depict some embodiments of the invention
  • the present invention is directed to methods and compositions useful in the detection of biological target analyte species such as nucleic acids and proteins based on electrochemical detection on an electrode
  • biological target analyte species such as nucleic acids and proteins based on electrochemical detection on an electrode
  • one of the significant hurdles of biosensors, particularly biosensors for the detection of nucleic acids is the rate of binding (i e hybridization in the case of nucleic acids) of the solution-based target to the surface-bound capture ligand
  • This can be affected in a number of ways, including (1 ) concentrating the target analyte near the surface, effectively resulting in a larger amount of the target analyte binding to the capture ligand, (2) configuring the system to allow for good flow or "mixing", again allowing a larger amount of the target analyte to bind to the capture ligand, or, (3) in the case of nucleic acids, using hybridization accelerators, that actually increase the rate of hybrid
  • the present invention describes a number of techniques that can be used to accelerate the rate of assay complex formation or increase the number of assay complexes in a given period of time, wherein the target analyte becomes associated with a capture ligand on the electrode surface
  • These techniques include, but are not limited to, electrophoretic transport, the use of volume exclusion agents, the use of nucleic acid binding proteins (in the case of nucleic acid target analytes), the use of polyvalent ions, precipitation agents, partitioning, adjusting the phase compatabihty, structuring flow parameters, the use of microparticles (including both magnetic and non-magnetic particles) as either "shuttles" or “mixers”, the use of temperature gradients, the use of filters, and combinations thereof
  • the present invention provides methods of detecting a target analyte in sample solutions
  • the sample solution may comprise any number of things, including, but not limited to, bodily fluids (including, but not limited to, blood, urine, serum, lymph, saliva, anal and vaginal secretions, perspiration and semen, of virtually any organism, with mammalian samples being preferred and human samples being particularly preferred), environmental samples (including, but not limited to, air, agricultural, water and soil samples), biological warfare agent samples, research samples (i e in the case of nucleic acids, the sample may be the products of an amplification reaction including both target and signal amplification as is generally described in PCT/US99/01705, such as PCR amplification reaction), purified samples, such as purified genomic DNA, RNA, proteins, etc , raw samples (bacteria, virus, genomic DNA, etc , As will be appreciated by those in the art, virtually any experimental manipulation may have been done on the sample
  • target analytes or grammatical equivalents herein is meant any molecule or compound to be detected
  • target analytes preferably bind to binding ligands, as is more fully described below
  • a large number of analytes may be detected using the present methods, basically, any target analyte for which a binding ligand, described below, may be made may be detected using the methods of the invention
  • the target analyte When electrophoresis is used, as is more fully outlined below, the target analyte is preferably charged, i e it carries a net charge under the experimental conditions, such that it is able to be transported electrophoretically in an electric field
  • non-charged target analytes may be utilized if a charged binding partner or binding ligand is associated with the target analyte
  • soluble binding ligands can be used to bind to the target analytes that additionally contain ETMs and/or charged species, in some embodiments, the ETM may be charged, and thus facilitate both electrophoresis and detection
  • Suitable analytes include organic and inorganic molecules, including biomolecules
  • the analyte may be an environmental pollutant (including pesticides, insecticides, toxins, etc ), a chemical (including solvents, organic materials, etc ), therapeutic molecules (including therapeutic and abused drugs, antibiotics, etc ), biomolecules (including hormones, cytokines, proteins, pids, carbohydrates, cellular membrane antigens and receptors (neural, hormonal, nutrient, and cell surface receptors) or their ligands, etc), whole cells (including procaryotic (such as pathogenic bacteria) and eucaryotic cells, including mammalian tumor cells), viruses (including retroviruses, herpesviruses, adenoviruses, lentiviruses, etc ), and spores, etc
  • Particularly preferred analytes are environmental pollutants, nucleic acids, proteins (including enzymes, antibodies, antigens, growth factors, cytokines, etc), therapeutic and abused drugs, cells
  • nucleic acid or “ohgonucleotide” or grammatical equivalents herein means at least two nucleotides covalently linked together
  • a nucleic acid of the present invention will generally contain phosphodiester bonds, although in some cases, as outlined below, nucleic acid analogs are included that may have alternate backbones, comprising, for example, phosphoramide (Beaucage et al , Tetrahedron 49(10) 1925 (1993) and references therein, Letsinger, J Org Chem 35 3800 (1970), Sblul et al , Eur J Biochem 81 579 (1977), Letsinger et al , Nucl Acids Res 14 3487 (1986), Sawai et al, Chem Lett 805 (1984), Letsinger et al , J Am Chem Soc 110 4470 (1988), and Pauwels et al , Chemica Scr ⁇ pta 26 141 91986)), phosphorothioate (Mag phospho
  • nucleic acids include those with positive backbones (Denpcy et al , Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 92 6097 (1995), non-ionic backbones (U S Patent Nos 5,386,023, 5,637,684, 5,602,240, 5,216,141 and 4,469,863, Kiedrowshi et al , Angew Chem Intl Ed English 30 423 (1991 ), Letsinger et al . J Am Chem Soc 110 4470 (1988), Letsinger et al , Nucleoside & Nucleotide 13 1597 (1994), Chapters 2 and 3, ASC Symposium Series 580, "Carbohydrate Modifications in Antisense Research",
  • PNA peptide nucleic acids
  • PNA backbones are substantially non-ionic under neutral conditions, in contrast to the highly charged phosphodiester backbone of naturally occurring nucleic acids.
  • Tm melting temperature
  • RNA typically exhibit a 2-4°C drop in Tm for an internal mismatch
  • the drop is closer to 7-9°C This allows for better detection of mismatches
  • hybridization of the bases attached to these backbones is relatively insensitive to salt concentration
  • the nucleic acids may be single stranded or double stranded, as specified, or contain portions of both double stranded or single stranded sequence
  • the nucleic acid may be DNA, both genomic and cDNA, RNA or a hybrid, where the nucleic acid contains any combination of deoxynbo- and ⁇ bo- nucleotides, and any combination of bases, including uracil, adenme, thymme, cytosine, guanme, inosme, xanthme hypoxanthme, isocytosme, isoguanine, etc
  • a preferred embodiment utilizes isocytosme and isoguanine in nucleic acids designed to be complementary to other probes, rather than target sequences, as this reduces non-specific hybridization, as is generally described in U S Patent No 5,681 ,702
  • the term "nucleoside” includes nucleotides as well as nucleoside and nucleotide analogs, and modified nu
  • the methods include concentrating the target analyte in the vicinity of a detection electrode
  • concentration means that the effective diffusion distance a target analyte must travel to bind to the surface is reduced
  • concentration at or near the detection electrode is higher than the concentration in the starting sample This may be measured in a variety of ways, including directly, or indirectly as a function of binding acceleration That is, in a preferred embodiment, concentration increases of at least two fold are preferred, with at least 5 fold being particularly preferred, and at least 10 fold increases being especially preferred As will be appreciated by those in the art, the increase in concentration will depend on the starting sample size as well,
  • the concentrating is done using electrophoresis
  • the system is described as follows A first electrode and a second electrode are used to generate an electric field to effect transport, generally electrophoretic transport, of the target analyte species increases its concentration at a detection electrode, which has a covalently attached capture binding ligand that will bind (either directly or indirectly ) the target analyte
  • the kinetics of target analyte binding to its capture ligand are significantly increased, by both increasing the concentration of the target analyte in the medium surrounding the capture ligand and reducing the distance a given target analyte molecule must difuse to find a binding ligand
  • the detection electrode may or may not be the same as the first electrode That is, in one embodiment, the electrodes used to generate the electric fields that result in transport of the analytes to the surface are different from the electrodes used for detection, i e there are two sets of electrodes, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, the two sets may share electrodes, for example the counter electrode In an additional embodiment, the electrodes used for electrophoretic transport and for detection are the same, i e there is only one set of electrodes In some embodiments, the electrophoretic electrode which attracts the target analyte comprises a permeation layer that serves to limit access of the target analytes to the electrode surface and thus protects the analytes from electrochemical degradation
  • the sequential or simultaneous use of a plurality of electrophoresis electrodes allows multidimensional electrophoresis, i e the solution may be targeted, ' mixed" or “stirred” in the vicinity of the detection electrode, to further increase the kinetics of binding
  • the assay complex comprises an ETM, which is then detected using the detection electrode
  • electrophoretic steps may be used, for example, the components of the system may be added sequentially, with an electrophoresis step after each addition to transport the reagents down to the detection electrode Similarly, electrophoresis may be used to effect "washing" steps, wherein excess reagents (non-bound target molecules or non-bound extra binding ligand components, etc ) Or other components of the sample (e g noncomphmentary nucleic acids) are driven away from the detection electrode Thus any combination of electrophoresis steps may be used In addition, the time of the electrophoretic steps may be altered
  • compositions of the invention can rely on either two sets of electrodes, wherein one set is used for electrophoresis and the second set is used for detection, or one set of electrodes that functions to effect both electrophoresis and detection, as is generally described below
  • Electrode herein is meant a composition, which, when connected to an electronic device, is able to sense a current or a potential and convert it to a signal Alternatively an electrode can be defined as a composition which can apply a potential to and/or pass electrons to or from species in the solution
  • an electrode is an ETM as described below
  • Preferred electodes include, but are not limited to, certain metals and their oxides, including gold, platinum, palladium, silicon, aluminum, metal oxide electrodes including platinum oxide, titanium oxide, tin oxide, indium tin oxide, palladium oxide, silicon oxide, aluminum oxide, molybdenum oxide (Mo 2 0 6 ), tungsten oxide (W0 3 ) and ruthenium oxides, and carbon (including glassy carbon electrodes, graphite and carbon paste) Preferred electrodes include gold, silicon, platinum, carbon and
  • the electrodes described herein are depicted as a flat surface, which is only one of the possible conformations of the electrode and is for schematic purposes only
  • the conformation of the electrode will vary with the detection method used
  • flat planar electrodes may be preferred for optical detection methods, or when arrays of nucleic acids are made, thus requiring addressable locations for both synthesis and detection
  • the electrode may be in the form of a tube, with the SAMs comprising conductive ohgomers and nucleic acids bound to the inner surface
  • Electrode coils or mesh may be preferred in some embodiments as well This allows a maximum of surface area containing the nucleic acids to be exposed to a small volume of sample
  • the detection electrode may be configured to maximize the contact the entire sample has with the electrode, or to allow mixing, etc
  • one (or both) of the electrophoretic electrodes comprises a permeation layer, as is generally described in U S Patent Nos 5,632,957 and 5,605,662, both of which are expressly incorporated by reference in their entirety This is particularly useful when the system is run at high voltages, i e where water hydrolysis occurs
  • the permeation layer serves as an intermediate diffusion layer, and generally has a pore limit property which inhibits or impedes the target analytes, reactants, etc from physical contact with the electrode surface and thus protects against adverse electrochemical effects
  • the permeation layer may be formed of a variety of materials, including, but not limited to, carbon chain polymers, carbon-silicon chain polymers, carbon-phosphorus chain polymers, carbon-nitrogen chain polymers, silicon chain polymers, polymer alloys, layered polymer composites, interpenetrating polymer materials, ceramics, controlled porosity glasss, materials formed as sol-gels, materials formed as aero-gels, agarose, acrylamides, materials formed as hydro-
  • first and second electrophoresis electrodes are essentially interchangeable and not meant to confer any spatial or conformational distinctions, although in general, as used herein, the first electrode is generally the electrode spatially closest to the detection electrode (when two sets of electrodes are used), or alternatively, the first electrode is generally depicted as the detection electrode (when only one set of electrodes is used) As will be appreciated by those in the art, any number of possible electrophoresis electrode configurations can be used, as is generally depicted in Figures 1 and 2 In general, there are two types of configurations bulk electrophoresis and targeted electrophoresis
  • a bulk electrophoresis configuration is used That is, one set of electrophoresis electrodes are used, as is generally shown in Figures 1A, 1 B and 1C
  • the first electrophoresis electrode (10 in Figure 1) is generally larger than the detection electrodes and is arranged spatially such that the detection probes are within the electric field generated by the electrophoresis electrodes Upon the application of a DC voltage between the electrodes, an electric field is generated such that electrophoretic transport of the charged target analytes to the vicinity of the detection probes is effected While this does not necessarily directly place the target analytes on the detection probes, the decrease in effective diffusion distance and increase in the effective concentration at the detection surface significantly increases the kinetics of target analyte binding to the capture binding ligand on the surface of the detection probe, as diffusion needs to take place in essentially two dimensions, rather than three
  • a targeted electrophoresis configuration is used, as is generally depicted in Figures 1 D, 1 E and 1 F
  • each detection electrode has an associated electrophoresis electrode
  • target analytes may be moved from one detection electrode to another
  • the system may be run as follows, using the Figure 1 F system
  • an electric field is generated between anode 50 and electrophoresis electrode 10, which is acting as the cathode, to bring the anionic target
  • the electrophoresis at each pad can be run simultaneously, with an electric field generated between (assuming a negatively charged target analyte population) anode 50 and cathodes 10, 11, 12 and 13 This is faster, but results in (assuming four pads) only one quarter of the target analyte being "presented" to each detection electrode This may or may not be desirable in different embodiments, for example, when speed rather than sensitivity is important
  • a related but different type of targeted electrophoresis is done
  • a plurality of sets of electrophoresis electrodes are positioned in a three dimensional way, to allow movement of the target analytes to different locations
  • the use of a three-dimensional array of electrophoresis electrodes allows localization of the sample solution to particular locations, i e individual detection electrodes or sets of detection electrodes
  • electrophoretic voltage applied between electrophoretic electrodes 10 and 15 and, at the same time, electrophoretic electrodes 12 and 17 can drive the target analyte to detector electrode 20
  • a plurality of electrophoresis electrodes are used, not for specific targeting to a particular location, but rather to increase binding kinetics through "mixing" or
  • an initial electrophoretic step may be done between electrophoretic electrode 18 and a non-depicted second electrophoretic electrode, to drive the target analytes to the detection probe surface, i e "bulk electrophoresis" as defined above.
  • voltages either DC or AC voltages, including pulses of each, can be applied between the additional sets of electrophoresis electrodes, to transport the target analyte to increase both availability and binding kinetics of the target analytes to the capture binding ligands immobilized on the detection electrodes
  • the strength of the applied electric field is determined by a number of factors, including, but not limited to, the desired time of electrophoresis, the size of the sample (i e the distance the target analyte must travel), the composition of the solution (i e the presence or absence of electroactive charge carriers and their redox potentials), the composition of the components (i e the stability of certain components of the invention to electrochemical potential), the presence or absence of electroactive charge carriers in solution, the size of the chamber, the charge of the target analyte, the size and location of the electrodes, the electrode material, etc
  • DC voltages are applied for the initial electrophoresis, with DC or AC pulses or fields applied for mixing, if applicable
  • the strength of the applied field will depend in part on the other components of the system For example, when only one set of electrodes is used and thiol linkages are used to attach the components of the system to the detection electrodes (i e the attachment of passivation agents and conductive ohgomers to the detection electrode, as is more fully outlined below), the applied electrophoretic voltage is below the oxidation potential of the thiol compounds, i e generally less than 1 V Alternatively, higher voltages can be used when thiol linkages are not used Similarly, thiol linkages are acceptable at higher field strengths when two sets of electrodes are used, i e the detection electrodes containing sensitive chemistry are not exposed to high voltages
  • electrophoretic voltages range from 1 mV to about 2 V, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, the required voltage will depend on the desired time of running, the net charge on the analytes the presence or absence of buffers, the position of the electrodes, etc As is known in the art, the electrophoretic velocity is ⁇ (d ⁇ /dx), wherein ⁇ is the ionic mobility
  • the electrophoretic voltages range from about 50 mV to about 900 mV, with from about 100 mV to about 800 mV being preferred, and from about 250 mV to about 700 mV being especially preferred
  • the electrophoretic voltages range from about 100 mV to about 2V or higher with from about 500 mV to about 1 5 V being preferred, and from about 1 V to about 1 5 V being especially preferred
  • these voltages can be positive or negative, depending on the charge of the analyte
  • the redox potential of the electroactive species is higher than that of the ETM used for detection For example, if a electroactive charge carrier with a redox potential of 300 mV is used and the ETM has a redox potential of 100 mV, electrophoresis can be done at 300 mV with subsequent detection being done at 100 mV, without a need to remove the electroactive species
  • electroactive charge carriers can be used, including, but not limited to, compounds of iron, including aqueous FeCI, Fe(CN) 6 4 /3 , and ferrocene and its derivatives, complexes of ruthenium, including Ru(NH 3 ) 5 pyr and Ru(NH 3 ) 5 H 2 0, complexes of cobalt including Co(NH 3 ) 6 3+ , Co(bpy) 3 3+ and Co(t ⁇ s)bpy 3+ ), complexes of osmium including Os(bpy) 3 2+ and Os(t ⁇ s)bpy and derivatives, complexes of rhenium, including Rh(NH 3 ) 4 CI 2 , and iodine l 3 -
  • some oxidation-reduction reactions produce solids (i e there are not a reversible couple) Generally, these species are not preferred, although in some instances they may be used when
  • electroactive charge carriers may be used in any system, particularly array- based systems, that utilize electrophoresis
  • electroactive charge carriers may be used in electrophoretic array systems such as described in U S Patent Nos 5,532,129, 5,605,662,
  • the sample is placed in the electric field to effect electrophoretic transport to one or more detection electrodes
  • the composition of the detection electrode is as described above for the electrophoresis electrodes, with gold, silicon, carbon, platinum and metal oxide electrodes being particularly preferred
  • the detection electrodes are formed on a substrate
  • the discussion herein is generally directed to the formation of gold electrodes, but as will be appreciated by those in the art, other electrodes can be used as well
  • the substrate can comprise a wide variety of materials, as will be appreciated by those in the art, with printed circuit board (PCB) materials being particularly preferred
  • PCB printed circuit board
  • the suitable substrates include, but are not limited to, fiberglass, teflon, ceramics, glass, silicon, mica, plastic (including acrylics, polystyrene and copolymers of styrene and other materials, polypropylene, polyethylene, polybutylene, polycarbonate, polyurethanes, TeflonTM, and derivatives thereof, etc ), GETEK (a blend of polypropylene oxide and fiberglass), etc
  • Circuit board materials are those that comprise an insulating substrate that is coated with a conducting layer and processed using lithography techniques, particularly photolithography techniques, to form the patterns of electrodes and interconnects (sometimes referred to in the art as interconnections or leads)
  • the insulating substrate is generally, but not always, a polymer
  • one or a plurality of layers may be used, to make either "two dimensional" (e g all electrodes and interconnections in a plane) or "three dimensional” (wherein the electrodes are on one surface and the interconnects may go through the board to the other side) boards
  • Three dimensional systems frequently rely on the use of drilling or etching, followed by electroplating with a metal such as copper, such that the "through board” interconnections are made
  • Circuit board materials are often provided with a foil already attached to the substrate, such as a copper foil, with additional copper added as needed (for example for interconnections), for example by electroplating The copper surface may then need to be rough
  • glass may not be preferred as a substrate
  • the present invention provides biochips (sometimes referred to herein "chips") that comprise substrates comprising a plurality of electrodes, preferably gold electrodes
  • the number of electrodes is as outlined for arrays
  • Each electrode preferably comprises a self-assembled monolayer as outlined herein
  • one of the monolayer- forming species comprises a capture hgand as outlined herein
  • each electrode has an interconnection, that is attached to the electrode at one end and is ultimately attached to a device that can control the electrode That is, each electrode is independently addressable
  • the substrates can be part of a larger device comprising a detection chamber that exposes a given volume of sample to the detection electrode Generally, the detection chamber ranges from about 1 nL to 1 ml, with about 10 ⁇ L to 500 ⁇ L being preferred As will be appreciated by those in the art, depending on the experimental conditions and assay, smaller or larger volumes may be used
  • the detection chamber and electrode are part of a cartridge that can be placed into a device comprising electronic components (an AC/DC voltage source, an ammeter, a processor, a read-out display, temperature controller, light source, etc )
  • electronic components an AC/DC voltage source, an ammeter, a processor, a read-out display, temperature controller, light source, etc
  • the interconnections from each electrode are positioned such that upon insertion of the cartridge into the device, connections between the electrodes and the electronic components are established
  • Detection electrodes on circuit board material are generally prepared in a wide variety of ways
  • high purity gold is used, and it may be deposited on a surface via vacuum deposition processes (sputtering and evaporation) or solution deposition (electroplating or electroless processes)
  • the substrate must initially comprise a conductive material, fiberglass circuit boards are frequently provided with copper foil Frequently, depending on the substrate, an adhesion layer between the substrate and the gold in order to insure good mechanical stability is used
  • preferred embodiments utilize a deposition layer of an adhesion metal such as chromium, titanium, titanium/tungsten, tantalum, nickel or palladium, which can be deposited as above for the gold
  • grain refining additives frequently referred to in the trade as bnghteners, can optionally be added to alter surface deposition properties
  • Preferred bnghteners are mixtures of organic and inorganic species,
  • the adhesion layer is from about 100 A thick to about 25 microns (1000 microinches)
  • the adhesion layer is from about 100 A thick to about 25 microns (1000 microinches)
  • the electrode metal must be coated at a thickness that prevents "bleed-through", if the adhesion metal is not electrochemically active, the electrode metal may be thinner Generally, the electrode metal (preferably gold) is deposited at thicknesses ranging from about 500 A to about 5 microns (200 microinches), with from about 30 microinches to about 50 microinches being preferred In general, the gold is deposited to make electrodes ranging in size from about 5 microns to about 5 mm in diameter, with about 100 to 250 microns being preferred The detection electrodes thus formed are then preferably cleaned and SAMs added, as is discussed below
  • the present invention provides methods of making a substrate comprising a plurality of gold electrodes
  • the methods first comprise coating an adhesion metal, such as nickel or palladium (optionally with bnghtener), onto the substrate Electroplating is preferred
  • the electrode metal preferably gold, is then coated (again, with electroplating preferred) onto the adhesion metal
  • the patterns of the device comprising the electrodes and their associated interconnections are made using lithographic techniques, particularly photolithographic techniques as are known in the art, and wet chemical etching Frequently, a non-conductive chemically resistive insulating material such as solder mask or plastic is laid down using these photolithographic techniques, leaving only the electrodes and a connection point to the leads exposed, the leads themselves are generally coated
  • drop deposition techniques are used to add the required chemistry, i e the monolayer forming species, one of which is preferably a capture ligand comprising species
  • Drop deposition techniques are well known for making "spot" arrays This is done to add a different composition to each electrode, i e to make an array comprising different capture ligands
  • the SAM species may be identical for each electrode, and this may be accomplished using a drop deposition technique or the immersion of the entire substrate or a surface of the substrate into the solution
  • a preferred embodiment utilizes a porous detection electrode positioned between the first and the second electrophoresis electrodes, such that the target must "go through" the detection electrode, and thus maximizes the contact of the target analyte and the detection electrode
  • a porous detection electrode positioned between the first and the second electrophoresis electrodes, such that the target must "go through" the detection electrode, and thus maximizes the contact of the target analyte and the detection electrode
  • polycarbonate microporous membranes are gold sputter coated for electron microscope analysis
  • gold coated polyanihne can be used
  • gold electrodes with very uniform pore sizes, ranging from 0 01 to 20 urn can be made
  • silicon wafers with 10 urn pores have been developed for use as a genosensor that enhance capture of the target sequence by 700 fold
  • electrophoretic steps may be used, for example, the components of the system may be added sequentially, with an electrophoresis step after each addition to transport the reagents down to the detection electrode Similarly, electrophoresis may be used to effect "washing" steps, wherein excess reagents (non-bound target molecules or non-bound extra binding ligand components, etc ) are driven away from the detection electrode.
  • electrophoresis steps may be used to effect "washing" steps, wherein excess reagents (non-bound target molecules or non-bound extra binding ligand components, etc ) are driven away from the detection electrode
  • any combination of electrophoresis steps may be used
  • the time of the electrophoretic steps may be altered
  • electrophoresis steps can be combined with other techniques to concentrate analytes at the detection electrode surface
  • the system can be configured to allow flow of the sample past the detection electrode in one direction, coupled with electrophoretic flow in the opposite direction, thus effectively concentrating the target analyte while allowing other sample components (particularly uncharged components or components with a charge opposite to the analyte) to be "washed" away
  • the strength of the electrophoretic field is adjusted based on the size and charge of the target, such that the target remains relatively immobilized at the detection electrode
  • concentration of the target analyte is accomplished using at least one volume exclusion agent in the assay reagent mix
  • a volume exclusion agent which can absorb solvent and small molecules such as ions, but excludes larger molecules such as target analytes, concentrates the target analyte to smaller apparent volumes, and thus decreasing the effective diffusional volume that the target analyte experiences, thus increasing the likelihood of the target finding a capture ligand
  • the volume exclusion agents may not necessarily concentrate the sample close to the detection electrode, rather, they decrease the effective diffusional volume that the target analyte experiences or resides within
  • the methods of the invention include adding at least one volume exclusion agent to the array mixture
  • this can be done at virtually any step of the assay, including premixture of the exclusion agent with the sample, prior to the addition of additional reagents (such as label probes, etc ), the addition of the exclusion agent with one or more other assay reagents, or after the addition of the assay reagents
  • the detection chamber may be precoated with a volume exclusion agent (for example agarose, sephadex, sepharose, polyacrylamide, etc ) that will swell in the presence of the sample
  • a membrane impermeable to the target analyte may be used to separate the volume exclusion agent from the detection electrode can be used
  • other components of the system may be coated with swellable volume exclusion agents, such as the magnetic particles described herein
  • adding the agent with the other assay reagents is preferable Once added, there is generally an incubation step as
  • volume exclusion agents include, but are not limited to, dextran, dextran sulfate, chonchritm sulfate, polyethylene glycol, polysulfonate, hepa ⁇ n sulfate, hespan, high molecular weight nucleic acid, etc See for example Amasino, Anal Chem 152 304 (1986), Wetmur, Biopolymers 14 2517 (1975), Renz et al , Nucl Acid Res 12 3435 (1984), Wahl et al , PNAS USA 75 3683 (1979), and Gingeras et al , Nucl Acid Res 15 5373 (1987), all of which are expressly incorporated by reference
  • mixtures of these agents may also be done
  • volume exclusion is a concentration step, but also that the exclusion agent may be considered a hybridization accelerator, as outlined below
  • Suitable nucleic acid precipitating agents include, but are not limited to, salts which contain at least one of the stronger salting out cation or anion groups (including the alkali metal salts and ammonium salts of S0 4 , P0 4 , Li and COOH), organic compounds that are miscible with the reaction solution and which have precipitating or salting out properties, including but not limited to, detergent (see Pontius et al , PNAS USA 88 8237 (1991 ), hereby incorporated by reference), dihydroxybenezene, Sarkosyl (N- laurosarconsine sodium salt), sodium dodecyl sulfate, sodium dnsobutyl sulfosuccinate and sodium tetradecyl sulfate Suitable concentrations of each agent are described in the incorporated references
  • detergents need not actually precipitate the nucleic acid but rather are added as hybridization accelerators
  • additional reagents may be added, including, but not limited to, EGTA, EDTA, SDS, SK, PK, EtOH, urea, guanid e HCI, glycogen and dilute amphyl
  • nucleic acid precipitating agent can be done at virtually any step of the assay, including premixture of the agent with the sample, prior to the addition of additional reagents
  • the concentrating is done by including at least two reagents that form two separable solution phases, such that the target analyte concentrates in one of the phases or at the interface
  • the target analyte concentrates in one of the phases or at the interface
  • concentration can occur at the interface between the two phases See for example Albertsson et al , Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 103 1-12 (1965), Kohne et al , Biochem 16(24) 5329 (1977), Muller, Partitioning of Nucleic Acids, Ch 7 in Partitioning in Aqueous Two-Phase Systems.
  • ligands can be included in the partitioning mixtures to effect partitioning
  • the phenol emulsion reassociation technique is done, as described in Kohne et al , supra
  • phenol and water or other aqueous solutions
  • aqueous solutions are added in the right proportions and shaken or mixed, an emulsion forms
  • the emulsion breaks and two phases form
  • the addition of single stranded nucleic acid and salt to the aqueous phase results in the extremely fast formation of hybrids
  • the rate of nucleic acid hybridization depends on (a) the presence of the emulsion, (b) the type and concentration of ions, (c) an appropriate temperature of incubation, (d) the proper pH, (e) the rate and manner of agitating the emulsion, (f) the amount of phenol present, (g) the fragment size of the nucleic acid, (h) the complexity of the nucleic acid, and (I) the concentration of the nucleic acid
  • both volume exclusion and partitioning may be done simultaneously
  • dextran (3-8%) and PEG (3 5 to 6%) can be mixed and form separate phases Shifts in the ratios of cations or anions can transfer high molecular weight nucleic acids from one phase to another and induce duplex formation
  • the concentration step is done using shuttle particles
  • this technique may be described as follows
  • Shuttle particles that will either settle by gravity onto the detection electrode (for example when the detection electrode is at the "bottom” of the chamber), float (for example when the detection electrode is at the "top” of the chamber) or can be induced to associate with the detection electrode (for example through the use of magnetic particles) are used
  • These shuttle particles comprise binding ligands that will associate with the target analyte(s) in the assay solution, generally but not always non-specifically, and then shuttle the target analytes to the detection electrode, where they can be released to bind to the capture binding ligand (either directly or indirectly, as outlined below)
  • the shuttle binding ligands preferably interact less strongly with the target analytes than the components of the assay complex, i e the capture binding ligand That is, the interaction with the shuttle particle must be weak enough to allow release of the target analytes for binding to the detection electrode
  • the target analyte is a nucleic acid and the shuttle particles may be configured in a number of ways
  • the shuttle particles comprise generally short (i e 4 to 10, although depending on the temperature used, they may be longer) nucleic acid probes that can bind the target analytes These may be either specific, i e contain short sequences specific to the target analyte(s) of interest, or non-specific, le random probes that will shuttle all the nucleic acid in the sample to the surface
  • the attachment of nucleic acids to particles is known, see for example U S S N 60/105,875 and CHAD MIRKIN STUFF
  • ligands with varying binding affinities can be used, for example, a weakly binding antibody to a protein target may be attached to the bead, and a stronger affinity antibody may serve as the capture ligand on the surface
  • solution changes may be used to drive the transfer from the bead to the surface
  • the particles may be modified (for example by de ⁇ vativization with amme moieties (such as lysine moieties) or carboxy groups) to contain a charge for the electrostatic interaction of the target and the particle
  • the shuttle particles may contain nucleic acid binding components, that bind to either single stranded or double stranded nucleic acids
  • nucleic acid binding components that bind to either single stranded or double stranded nucleic acids
  • particles comprising tercalators are known, see U S Patent 5,582,984, hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety
  • particles comprising single-stranded or double- stranded binding proteins can be made
  • the target analytes may be released using known techniques, including heat, pH changes, salt changes, etc It should be noted that these particles may have use in sample preparation, as the particles can bind up all the target analyte, allowing the remaining sample to be washed away or removed, or the particles comprising the target analyte to be removed from the sample
  • the surface of the electrode, or of the substrate as described herein may be altered to increase binding and/or reduce the effective diffusional space for the target analyte. That is, reducing the diffusional space from three dimensions (the detection chamber) to two dimensions (the detection surface) will significantly increase the kinetics of binding. This reduction can be accomplished in several ways.
  • the terminal groups of the SAM may be modified to comprise electrostatic groups of opposite charge from the target analyte. Thus, the time that a particular target molecule associates with the surface is increased, and diffusion preferably occurs in two dimensions rather than three.
  • cation-terminated passivation agents may be used, such as HS-CH 2 -NR 3 +
  • the entire substrate of the detection chamber i.e. the areas around the individual electrodes
  • oligonucleotide probes that will either specifically bind target sequences or are relatively short non-specific sequences, can be used on the surface.
  • particles may also be used as “mixing particles”, that serve to stir the solution near the detection electrode and thus increase hybridization
  • the binding acceleration is done by configuring the system to maximize the amount of target analyte that can bind to the detection electrode in a given time period This may be done for example by flowing or exposing a large volume of sample containing the target analyte past the detection electrode such that the target analytes have a high probability of associating with the detection electrode
  • the methods include flowing the sample containing the target analyte(s) past a detection electrode to form assay complexes
  • concentration of the target analyte occurs as a result of a large volume of sample being contacted with the detection electrode per unit time, and also decreases the binding times as compared to a stagnant sample
  • the device comprising the detection electrode can be configured to have the sample flow past or through the detection electrode
  • a preferred embodiment utilizes a porous electrode such as a gold electrode, as outlined above, positioned in a sample flow channel See for example W095/11755, incorporated by reference
  • the sample may additionally be recirculated as necessary Rotating disc electrodes are also preferred
  • the detection electrode and surrounding area is configured to result in mixing of the sample, which can serve to disturb this diffusion layer and allow greater access to the surface
  • the detection electrode is placed in a narrow sample channel
  • the detection electrode is a band or zone around the perimeter of the channel
  • the detection electrode is configured with respect to the chamber such that the flow of the sample past the electrode causes mixing or sample turbulence
  • the detection electrode is "sunken” or “recessed” with respect to the chamber, such that the flow of the sample past the electrode causes mixing, see Figure 13
  • This effect may be enhanced by including raised surfaces, sometimes referred to herein as “weirs", on the edges of the electrode (including sunken electrodes) that cause mixing
  • a preferred embodiment utilizes particles as "mixing balls"
  • particle or “microparticle” or “nanoparticle” or “bead” or “microsphere” herein is meant microparticulate matter
  • the particles can comprise a wide variety of materials depending on their use, including, but not limited to, cross-linked starch, dextrans, cellulose, proteins, organic polymers including styrene polymers including polystyrene and methylstyrene as well as other styrene co-polymers, plastics, glass, ceramics, acrylic polymers, magnetically responsive materials, colloids, tho ⁇ a sol, carbon graphite, titanium dioxide, nylon, latex, and teflon may all be used "Microsphere Detection Guide” from Bangs Laboratories,
  • the mixing particle need not comprise microparticulate matter, for example, for gravity mixing (i e for mixing based on agitation of the device), any component with a density different from the sample can be used, air bubbles can be used for example as mixing particles
  • the mixing particles may be chosen to have a large dielectric constant such that the particles can be moved by the application of an electromagnetic field gradient as could be produced using focused light or a diverging radio frequency (rf) field
  • the particles could also, in some instances, comprising diamagnetic materials, Such particles would not be affected substantially by the application of a linear magnetic field but could be moved by the application of a non-linear magnetic field as might be applied using a non-linear magnet or using a large linear magnet combined with small ferro-magnetic or paramagnetic inclusions in the chamber
  • the size of the particles will depend on their composition
  • the particles need not be spherical, irregular particles may be used
  • the particles may be porous, thus increasing the surface area of the particle available for attachment of moieties
  • the size of the particles will vary with their composition, for example, magnetic particles are generally bigger than colloid particles
  • the particles have diameters ranging from 1- 5 nm (colloids) to 200 ⁇ m (magnetic particles)
  • the particles can be added at any point during the assay, including before, during or after the addition of the sample
  • the particles help stir the sample to effect more target binding This may be accomplished in a number of ways
  • particles can be added to the detection chamber and the entire chamber or device agitated
  • magnetic microparticles such as are known in the art may be used
  • the first particle is a magnetic particle or a particle that can be induced to display magnetic properties
  • magnetic herein is meant that the particle is attracted in a magnetic field, including ferromagnetic, paramagnetic, and diamagnetic
  • the particles are preferably from about 0 001 to about 200 ⁇ m in diameter, with from about 0 05 to about 200 ⁇ m preferred, from about 0 1 to about 100 ⁇ m being particularly preferred, and from about 0 5 to about 10 ⁇ m being especially preferred
  • the direction and/or strength of the magnetic field may be varied, for example using electromagnets positioned around the detection chamber to move the beads in a variety of directions
  • electromagnets positioned around the detection chamber to move the beads in a variety of directions
  • the use of magnetic shuttle particles as both shuttle and mixing particles can be accomplished by multiple magnetic fields, one that brings the particles down to the detection electrode, and one that agitates the beads on the surface of the detection electrode
  • non-magnetic particles may be added to augment the flow-type mixing outlined above
  • microparticles will vary as outlined herein Microparticles of 4 5 urn have been observed to rest in solution on a solid support, relatively unaffected by diffusion, where as in the same sample 1 0 urn particles remain suspended away from the solid surface and appear to follow the constraints of diffusion Thus, the larger particles may move freely within the diffusion layer when combined with flow, to convert laminar flow to turbulent flow
  • the particles may be chemically altered, for example with volume exclusion agents or hybridization accelerators as outlined herein to combine the acceleration effects
  • the shuttle particles outlined above may also serve a dual function as mixing particles
  • compositions comprising detection electrodes and mixing particles, and methods of detecting target analytes using the compositions
  • one of the rate-limiting steps for target capture on a surface is believed to be the diffusion of molecules across the boundary layer near the solid phase This boundary layer does not appear to mix well even during flow of the sample This boundary layer and its statistical depth is a function of the properties of the solvent, the solid and the solute
  • altering these parameters may serve to "shrink" the boundary layer the target analyte must pass to reach the surface
  • adjusting the organic content of the solute may make the analyte more accessable to the surface
  • Other parameters that can effect this are viscosity, surface charge, target secondary and tertiary structure, and temperature
  • binding acceleration is done by using a hybridization accelerator
  • the binding of the target analyte to the detection electrode is done in the presence of a hybridization accelerator
  • hybridization accelerators that actually increase the rate of nucleic acid hybridization, including, but not limited to, nucleic acid binding proteins, salts, polyvalent ions and detergents
  • the hybridization accelerator is a nucleic acid binding protein
  • certain binding proteins increase the rate of hybridization of single stranded nucleic acids, see Pontius et al , PNAS USA 87 8403 (1990) and U S Patent 5,015,569, both of which are incorporated by reference
  • hnRNP A1 hnRNP
  • recA a single stranded nucleic acid binding proteins and major and minor groove binding proteins may also be used Suitable conditions are known or elucidated from the prior art
  • the hybridization accelerator is a salt
  • concentrations of salt up to roughly 2 M can increase the rate of hybridization
  • Suitable salts include, but are not limited to, sodium chloride, cesium chloride, sodium phosphate, sodium perchlorate, litium chloride, potassium chloride, sodium bromide, sodium sulfate and ammonium chloride
  • the hybridization accelerator is a polyvalent ion Ions of higher valence such as Mg++ can improve the affinity of nucleic acid strands via electrostatic interactions and thus accelerate hybridization
  • these polyvalent ions can potentially affect packaging on the surface, that is, as the density of nucleic acid on the surface increases, a negative charge accumulates that may inhibit subsequent binding of more nucleic acid
  • the inclusion of a polyvalent ion that can serve as a "salt bridge" may serve to increase hybridization Mn++ can have a similar effect
  • the transition phase may be a period of enhanced accessibility for incoming probes
  • the hybridization accelerator is a detergent, see Pontius et al , PNAS USA 88 8237 (1991 ), hereby incorporated by reference
  • certain detergents can increase the rate of hybridization by as much as 10 4 fold
  • Suitable detergents include, but are not limited to, cationic detergents including, but not limited to, dodecyltrimethylammonium bromide (DTAB) and cetylt ⁇ methylammonium bromide (CTAB), and other variants of the quaternary amme tetramethylammonium bromide (TMAB)
  • the detection systems of the present invention are based on the incorporation of an electron transfer moiety (ETM) into an assay complex as the result of target analyte binding
  • ETM electron transfer moiety
  • the ETM can be detected, not necessarily via electron transfer through nucleic acid, but rather can be directly detected using conductive ohgomers, that is, the electrons from the ETMs need not travel through the stacked ⁇ orbitals in order to generate a signal
  • the presence of ETMs on the surface of a SAM, that comprises conductive ohgomers can be directly detected
  • This basic idea is termed "mechan ⁇ sm-2" herein
  • a soluble binding ligand comprising an ETM is brought to the surface, and detection of the ETM can proceed
  • the role of the SAM comprising the conductive ohgomers is to shield the electrode from solution components and reducing the amount of non-specific binding to the electrodes
  • the role of the binding ligand is to provide specificity for a recruitment of ETMs to the surface, where they can be detected using conductive ohgomers with electronically exposed termini
  • This general idea is shown in Figures 4, 5 and 6
  • an assay complex is formed that contains an ETM, which is then detected using the detection electrode
  • array herein is meant a plurality of capture ligands in an array format, the size of the array will depend on the composition and end use of the array Arrays containing from about 2 different capture ligands to many thousands can be made Generally, the array will comprise from two to as many as 100,000 or more, depending on the size of the electrodes, as well as the end use of the array Preferred ranges are from about 2 to about 10,000, with from about 5 to about 1000 being preferred, and from about 10 to about 100 being particularly preferred.
  • the compositions of the invention may not be in array format, that is, for some embodiments, compositions comprising a single capture ligand may be made as well
  • multiple substrates may be used, either of different or identical compositions
  • large arrays may comprise a plurality of capture ligands in an array format
  • the detection electrode comprises a self-assembled monolayer (SAM)
  • SAM self-assembled monolayer
  • monolayer or “self- assembled monolayer” or “SAM” herein is meant a relatively ordered assembly of molecules spontaneously chemisorbed on a surface, in which the molecules have a preferred orientation relative to each other (e g are oriented approximately parallel to each other) and a preferred orientation relative to the surface (e g roughly perpendicular to it)
  • Each of the molecules includes a functional group that adheres to the surface, and a portion that interacts with neighboring molecules in the monolayer to form the relatively ordered array
  • a "mixed" monolayer comprises a heterogeneous monolayer, that is, where at least two different molecules make up the monolayer
  • the SAM may comprise conductive ohgomers alone, or a mixture of conductive ohgomers and insulators As outlined herein, the efficiency of target analyte binding (for example, oligonucleotide hybridization) may increase when the an
  • the monolayer comprises conductive ohgomers
  • conductive ohgomer herein is meant a substantially conducting ohgomer, preferably linear, some embodiments of which are referred to in the literature as “molecular wires”
  • substantially conducting herein is meant that the ohgomer is capable of transfenng electrons at 100 Hz
  • the conductive ohgomer has substantially overlapping ⁇ -orbitals, i e conjugated ⁇ -orbitals, as between the monome ⁇ c units of the conductive ohgomer, although the conductive ohgomer may also contain one or more sigma ( ⁇ ) bonds
  • a conductive ohgomer may be defined functionally by its ability to inject or receive electrons into or from an associated ETM Furthermore, the conductive ohgomer is more conductive than the insulators as defined herein Additionally, the conductive ohgomers of the invention are to be distinguished from electroactive polymers, that themselves may donate or accept electrons
  • the conductive ohgomers have a conductivity, S, of from between about 10 "6 to about 10 4 ⁇ 1 cm ⁇ with from about 10 5 to about 10 3 ⁇ cm 1 being preferred, with these S values being calculated for molecules ranging from about 20A to about 200A
  • insulators have a conductivity S of about 10 7 ⁇ 1 cm 1 or lower, with less than about 10 8 ⁇ 1 cm 1 being preferred See generally Gardner et al , Sensors and Actuators A 51 (1995) 57-66, incorporated herein by reference
  • Desired characteristics of a conductive ohgomer include high conductivity, sufficient solubility in organic solvents and/or water for synthesis and use of the compositions of the invention, and preferably chemical resistance to reactions that occur i) during binding ligand synthesis (i e nucleic acid synthesis, such that nucleosides containing the conductive ohgomers may be added to a nucleic acid synthesizer during the synthesis of the compositions of
  • ohgomers of the invention comprise at least two monomeric subunits, as described herein As is described more fully below, ohgomers include homo- and hetero-ohgomers, and include polymers
  • the conductive ohgomer has the structure depicted in Structure 1
  • the conductive ohgomer of Structure 1 may be attached to ETMs, such as electrodes, transition metal complexes, organic ETMs, and metallocenes, and to binding ligands such as nucleic acids, or to several of these Unless otherwise noted, the conductive ohgomers depicted herein will be attached at the left side to an electrode, that is, as depicted in Structure 1 , the left “Y” is connected to the electrode as described herein If the conductive ohgomer is to be attached to a binding ligand, the right "Y", if present, is attached to the binding ligand such as a nucleic acid, either directly or through the use of a linker, as is described herein
  • Y is an aromatic group
  • n is an integer from 1 to 50
  • g is either 1 or zero
  • e is an integer from zero to 10
  • m is zero or 1
  • D is preferably carbonyl, or a heteroatom moiety, wherein the heteroatom is selected from oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen silicon or phosphorus
  • suitable heteroatom moieties include, but are not limited to, -NH and - NR
  • the Y aromatic groups of the conductive ohgomer may be different, i e the conductive ohgomer may be a heteroohgomer That is, a conductive ohgomer may comprise a ohgomer of a single type of Y groups, or of multiple types of Y groups
  • the aromatic group may be substituted with a substitution group, generally depicted herein as R R groups may be added as necessary to affect the packing of the conductive ohgomers, i e R groups may be used to alter the association of the ohgomers in the monolayer R groups may also be added to 1) alter the solubility of the ohgomer or of compositions containing the ohgomers, 2) alter the conjugation or electrochemical potential of the system, and 3) alter the charge or characteristics at the surface of the monolayer
  • R groups are preferred to increase solubility when solution synthesis is done
  • the R groups, and their positions are chosen to minimally effect the packing of the conductive ohgomers on a surface, particularly within a monolayer, as described below
  • the attachment of methyl groups to the portion of the conductive ohgomer within the monolayer to increase solubility is preferred, with attachment of longer alkoxy groups, for example, C3 to C10, is preferably done above the monolayer surface
  • R groups include, but are not limited to, hydrogen, alkyl, alcohol, aromatic, ammo, amido, nitro, ethers, esters, aldehydes, sulfonyl, silicon moieties, halogens, sulfur containing moieties, phosphorus containing moieties, and ethylene glycols
  • R is hydrogen when the position is unsubstituted It should be noted that some positions may allow two substitution groups, R and R', in which case the R and R' groups may be either the same or different
  • alkyl group or grammatical equivalents herein is meant a straight or branched chain alkyl group, with straight chain alkyl groups being preferred If branched, it may be branched at one or more positions, and unless specified, at any position
  • the alkyl group may range from about 1 to about 30 carbon atoms (C1 -C30), with a preferred embodiment utilizing from about 1 to about 20 carbon atoms (C1 -C20), with about C1 through about C12 to about C15 being preferred, and C1 to C5 being particularly preferred, although in some embodiments the alkyl group may be much larger
  • cycloalkyl groups such as C5 and C6 rings, and heterocychc rings with nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus
  • Alkyl also includes heteroalkyl, with heteroatoms of sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen, and sihcone being preferred
  • Alkyl includes substituted alkyl groups
  • substituted alkyl group herein is meant an alkyl groups
  • nitro group herein is meant an -N0 2 group
  • sulfur containing moieties herein is meant compounds containing sulfur atoms, including but not limited to, thia-, thio- and sulfo- compounds, thiols (-SH and -SR), and sulfides (-RSR-)
  • phosphorus containing moieties herein is meant compounds containing phosphorus, including, but not limited to, phosphines and phosphates
  • silicon containing moieties herein is meant compounds containing silicon
  • ether herein is meant an -O-R group
  • Preferred ethers include alkoxy groups, with -0-(CH 2 ) 2 CH 3 and -0-(CH 2 ) 4 CH 3 being preferred
  • esters herein is meant a -COOR group
  • halogen herein is meant bromine, iodine, chlorine, or fluorine
  • Preferred substituted alkyls are partially or fully halogenated alkyls such as CF 3 , etc
  • aldehyde herein is meant -RCHO groups
  • alcohol herein is meant -OH groups, and alkyl alcohols -ROH
  • amino herein is meant -RCONH- or RCONR- groups
  • ethylene glycol or "(poly)ethylene glycol” herein is meant a -(0-CH 2 -CH 2 ) n - group, although each carbon atom of the ethylene group may also be singly or doubly substituted, i e -(0-CR 2 -CR 2 ) n -, with R as described above
  • Ethylene glycol derivatives with other heteroatoms in place of oxygen i e -(N-
  • substitution groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, alkoxy groups such as -0-(CH 2 ) 2 CH 3 and -0-(CH 2 ) 4 CH 3 and ethylene glycol and derivatives thereof
  • Preferred aromatic groups include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, naphthalene, anthracene, phenanthrohne, pyrole, pyridme, thiophene, porphyrms, and substituted derivatives of each of these, included fused ring derivatives
  • B-D is a bond linking two atoms or chemical moieties
  • B-D is a conjugated bond, containing overlapping or conjugated ⁇ -orbitals
  • e is preferably 1 and the D moiety may be carbonyl or a heteroatom moiety as defined above
  • the terminal B-D bond may be an amide bond
  • the rest of the B-D bonds may be acetylene bonds
  • amide bonds when amide bonds are present, as few amide bonds as possible are preferable, but in some embodiments all the B-D bonds are amide bonds
  • one type of B-D bond may be present in the conductive ohgomer within a monolayer as described below, and another type above the monolayer level, for example to give greater flexibility for nucleic acid hybridization when the nucleic acid is attached via a conductive ohgomer
  • n is an integer from 1 to 50, although longer ohgomers may also be used (see for example Schumm et al , Angew Chem Int Ed Engl 1994 33(13) 1360) Without being bound by theory it appears that for efficient hybridization of nucleic acids on a surface, the hybridization should occur at a distance from the surface, i e the kinetics of hybridization increase as a function of the distance from the surface, particularly for long ohgonucleotides of 200 to 300 basepairs Accordingly when a nucleic acid is attached via a conductive ohgomer, as is more fully described below, the length of the conductive ohgomer is such that the closest nucleotide of the nucleic acid is positioned from about 6A to about 10 ⁇ A (although distances of up to 500A may be used) from the electrode surface, with from about 15A to about 60A being preferred and from about 25A to about 6 ⁇ A also being preferred Accordingly, n will depend
  • m is either 0 or 1 That is, when m is 0, the conductive ohgomer may terminate in the B-D bond or D moiety, i e the D atom is attached to the nucleic acid either directly or via a linker
  • the conductive ohgomer may terminate in the B-D bond or D moiety, i e the D atom is attached to the nucleic acid either directly or via a linker
  • the conductive ohgomer may terminate in the B-D bond or D moiety, i e the D atom is attached to the nucleic acid either directly or via a linker
  • the D atom may be the nitrogen atom of the ammo-modified nbose
  • the conductive ohgomer may terminate in Y, an aromatic group, i e the aromatic group is attached to the nucleic acid or linker
  • conductive ohgomers falling within the Structure 1 and Structure 8 formulas, as well as other conductive ohgomers, as are generally known in the art, including for example, compounds comprising fused aromatic rings or Teflon®-hke ohgomers, such as -(CF 2 ) n -, -(CHF) n - and
  • Structure 2 is Structure 1 when g is 1 Preferred embodiments of Structure 2 include e is zero, Y is pyrole or substituted pyrole, e is zero, Y is thiophene or substituted thiophene, e is zero, Y is furan or substituted furan, e is zero, Y is phenyl or substituted phenyl, e is zero, Y is pyridme or substituted pyridme, e is 1 , B-D is acetylene and Y is phenyl or substituted phenyl (see Structure 4 below)
  • a preferred embodiment of Structure 2 is also when e is one, depicted as Structure 3 below Structure 3
  • Preferred embodiments of Structure 3 are Y is phenyl or substituted phenyl and B-D is azo, Y is phenyl or substituted phenyl and B-D is acetylene, Y is phenyl or substituted phenyl and B-D is alkene,
  • Y is pyridme or substituted pyridme and B-D is acetylene
  • Y is thiophene or substituted thiophene and B-D is acetylene
  • Y is furan or substituted furan and B-D is acetylene
  • Y is thiophene or furan (or substituted thiophene or furan) and B-D are alternating alkene and acetylene bonds
  • Structure 3 ohgomers may be substituted with any of the other structures depicted herein, i e Structure 1 or 8 ohgomer, or other conducting ohgomer, and the use of such Structure 3 depiction is not meant to limit the scope of the invention
  • Particularly preferred embodiments of Structure 4 include n is two, m is one, and R is hydrogen, n is three, m is zero, and R is hydrogen, and the use of R groups to increase solubility
  • the conductive ohgomers are pseudopeptide ohgomers
  • the amide bond in Structure 5 is depicted with the carbonyl to the left, i e - CONH-, the reverse may also be used, i e -NHCO-
  • Particularly preferred embodiments of Structure 5 include n is two, m is one, and R is hydrogen, n is three, m is zero, and R is hydrogen (in this embodiment, the terminal nitrogen (the D atom) may be the nitrogen of the ammo-modified nbose), and the use of R groups to increase solubility
  • Preferred embodiments of Structure 6 include the first n is two, second n is one, m is zero, and all R groups are hydrogen, or the use of R groups to increase solubility
  • Preferred embodiments of Structure 7 include the first n is three, the second n is from 1-3, with m being either 0 or 1 , and the use of R groups to increase solubility
  • the conductive ohgomer has the structure depicted in Structure 8
  • C are carbon atoms
  • n is an integer from 1 to 50
  • m is 0 or 1
  • J is a heteroatom selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen, silicon, phosphorus, sulfur, carbonyl or sulfoxide
  • the G bond of each subunit may be the same or different than the G bonds of other subunits, that is, alternating ohgomers of alkene and acetylene bonds could be used, etc However, when G is an alkane bond, the number of alkane
  • the m of Structure 8 is zero In a particularly preferred embodiment, m is zero and G is an alkene bond, as is depicted in Structure 9
  • alkene ohgomer of structure 9, and others depicted herein are generally depicted in the preferred trans configuration, although ohgomers of cis or mixtures of trans and cis may also be used As above, R groups may be added to alter the packing of the compositions on an electrode, the hydrophihcity or hydrophobicity of the ohgomer, and the flexibility, i e the rotational, torsional or longitudinal flexibility of the ohgomer n is as defined above
  • R is hydrogen, although R may be also alkyl groups and polyethylene glycols or derivatives
  • the conductive ohgomer may be a mixture of different types of ohgomers, for example of structures 1 and 8
  • the conductive ohgomers may or may not have terminal groups Thus, in a preferred embodiment, there is no additional terminal group, and the conductive ohgomer terminates with one of the groups depicted in Structures 1 to 9, for example, a B-D bond such as an acetylene bond Alternatively, in a preferred embodiment, a terminal group is added, sometimes depicted herein as "Q" A terminal group may be used for several reasons, for example, to contribute to the electronic availability of the conductive ohgomer for detection of ETMs, or to alter the surface of the SAM for other reasons, for example to prevent non-specific binding
  • the target analyte is a nucleic acid
  • Preferred terminal groups include -NH 2 , -OH, -COOH, and alkyl groups such as
  • the monolayer may comprise different conductive ohgomer species, although preferably the different species are chosen such that a reasonably uniform SAM can be formed
  • the monolayer may comprise different conductive ohgomer species, although preferably the different species are chosen such that a reasonably uniform SAM can be formed
  • capture binding ligands such as nucleic acids are covalently attached to the electrode using conductive ohgomers
  • preferred embodiments utilize conductive ohgomers that terminate below the surface of the rest of the monolayer, i e below the insulator layer, if used, or below some fraction of the other conductive ohgomers
  • the use of different conductive ohgomers may be done to facilitate monolayer formation or to make monolayers with altered properties
  • the monolayer may further comprise insulator moieties
  • insulator herein is meant a substantially nonconducting ohgomer, preferably linear
  • substantially nonconducting herein is meant that the insulator will not transfer electrons at 100 Hz The rate of electron transfer through the insulator is preferrably slower than the rate through the conductive ohgomers described herein
  • the insulators have a conductivity, S, of about 10 7 ⁇ 1 cm 1 or lower, with less than about 10 "8 ⁇ 1 cm being preferred See generally Gardner et al , supra
  • insulators are alkyl or heteroalkyl ohgomers or moieties with sigma bonds, although any particular insulator molecule may contain aromatic groups or one or more conjugated bonds
  • heteroalkyl herein is meant an alkyl group that has at least one heteroatom, i e nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon or boron included in the chain
  • the insulator may be quite similar to a conductive ohgomer with the addition of one or more heteroatoms or bonds that serve to inhibit or slow, preferably substantially, electron transfer
  • Suitable insulators include, but are not limited to, -(CH 2 ) n -, -(CRH) n -, and - (CR 2 ) n -, ethylene glycol or derivatives using other heteroatoms in place of oxygen, i e nitrogen or sulfur (sulfur derivatives are not preferred when the electrode is gold)
  • the insulators may be substituted with R groups as defined herein to alter the packing of the moieties or conductive ohgomers on an electrode, the hydrophihcity or hydrophobicity of the insulator, and the flexibility i e the rotational, torsional or longitudinal flexibility of the insulator
  • R groups as defined herein to alter the packing of the moieties or conductive ohgomers on an electrode, the hydrophihcity or hydrophobicity of the insulator, and the flexibility i e the rotational, torsional or longitudinal flexibility of the insulator
  • branched alkyl groups may be used
  • the insulators may contain terminal groups, as outlined above, particularly to influence the surface of the monolayer
  • the length of the species making up the monolayer will vary as needed As outlined above, it appears that binding of target analytes (for example, hybridization of nucleic acids) is more efficient at a distance from the surface
  • the species to which capture binding ligands are attached (as outlined below, these can be either insulators or conductive ohgomers) may be basically the same length as the monolayer forming species or longer than them, resulting in the capture binding ligands being more accessible to the solvent for hybridization
  • the conductive ohgomers to which the capture binding ligands are attached may be shorter than the monolayer
  • the actual combinations and ratios of the different species making up the monolayer can vary widely, and will depend on whether mechan ⁇ sm-1 or -2 is used and, in the case of electrophoresis, whether a one electrode system or two electrode system is used, as is more fully outlined below Generally, three component systems are preferred for mechan ⁇ sm-2 systems, with the first species comprising a capture binding hgand containing species (termed a capture probe when the target analyte is a nucleic acid), attached to the electrode via either an insulator or a conductive ohgomer The second species are conductive ohgomers, and the third species are insulators In this embodiment, the first species can comprise from about 90% to about
  • the second species can comprise from about 1 % to about 90%o, with from about 20% to about 90% being preferred, and from about 40% to about 60% being especially preferred
  • the third species can comprise from about 1 % to about 90%, with from about 20% to about 40% being preferred, and from about 15% to about 30% being especially preferred
  • preferred ratios of first second third species in SAM formation solvents are 2 2 1 for short targets, 1 3 1 for longer targets, with total thiol concentration (when used to attach these species, as is more fully outlined below) in the 500 ⁇ M to 1 mM range, and 833 ⁇ M being preferred
  • the two components are the first and second species
  • the first species can comprise from about 1 % to about 90%, with from about 1% to about 40% being preferred, and from about 10% to about 40% being especially preferred
  • the second species can comprise from about 1 % to about 90%, with from about 10% to about 60% being preferred, and from about 20% to about 40% being especially preferred
  • the two components are the first and the third species
  • the first species can comprise from about 1 % to about 90%, with from about 1 % to about 40% being preferred, and from about 10% to about 40% being especially preferred
  • the second species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 10% to about 60% being preferred, and from about 20% to about 40% being especially preferred
  • the deposition of the SAM is done using aqueous solvents
  • aqueous solvents As is generally described in Steel et al , Anal Chem 70 4670 (1998), Herne et al , J Am Chem Soc 119 8916 (1997), and Fmklea, Electrochemistry of Organized Monolayers of Thiols and Related Molecules on Electrodes, from A J Bard, Electroanalvtical Chemistry A Series of Advances, Vol 20, Dekker N Y
  • the deposition of the SAM-formmg species can be done out of aqueous solutions, frequently comprising salt
  • the composition and integrity of the monolayer may depend on whether a one electrode or two electrode system is used Thus, for example, if a one electrode system is used for both electrophoresis and detection, the configuration of the system will allow the electroactive charge carriers, if used, access to the electrode As will be appreciated by those in the art, if the chemistry of attachment of the conductive ohgomer is stable at the high voltages used to hydrolyze water, no electroactive charge carriers need be used This may be done in one of several ways
  • the monolayer comprises a significant component of electronically exposed conductive ohgomers, a monolayer such as this effective raises the surface of the electrode, allowing the electroactive charge carriers indirect access to the electrode Alternatively, a poor monolayer may be used, i e a monolayer that contains "pinholes" or "imperfections", such that there is direct solvent access to the electrode Alternatively, the configuration of the electrode may be such that less than the entire surface of the electrode is covered
  • the attachment linkers with covalently attached nucleosides or nucleic acids as depicted herein are covalently attached to an electrode
  • one end or terminus of the attachment linker is attached to the nucleoside or nucleic acid, and the other is attached to an electrode
  • the attachment linker may be attached at two sites to the electrode, as is generally depicted in Structures 11-13 Generally, some type of linker is used, as depicted below as "A" in Structure 10, where "X" is the conductive ohgo
  • A is a linker or atom
  • A is a linker or atom
  • A may be a sulfur moiety when a gold electrode is used
  • A when metal oxide electrodes are used, A may be a silicon (silane) moiety attached to the oxygen of the oxide (see for example Chen et al , Langmuir 10 3332-3337 (1994), Lenhard et al , J Electroanal Chem 78 195-201 (1977), both of which are expressly incorporated by reference)
  • A When carbon based electrodes are used, A may be an ammo moiety (preferably a primary amme, see for example Demhammer et al , Langmuir 10 1306-1313 (1994))
  • preferred A moieties include, but are not limited to, silane moieties, sulfur moieties (including alkyl sulfur moieties), and ammo moieties
  • epoxide type linkages with redox polymers such as are known in the art are not used
  • the insulators and conductive ohgomers may be attached to the electrode with more than one "A" moiety, the "A" moieties may be the same or different
  • the electrode is a gold electrode
  • "A" is a sulfur atom or moiety
  • multiple sulfur atoms may be used to attach the conductive ohgomer to the electrode, such as is generally depicted below in Structures 11 , 12 and 13
  • the A moiety is just a sulfur atom, but substituted sulfur moieties may also be used
  • the conductive ohgomers and insulators may also comprise a "Q" terminal group
  • the electrode is a gold electrode, and attachment is via a sulfur linkage as is well known in the art, i e the A moiety is a sulfur atom or moiety Although the exact characteristics of the gold-sulfur attachment are not known, this linkage is considered covalent for the purposes of this invention
  • a representative structure is depicted in Structure 14, using the Structure 3 conductive ohgomer, although as for all the structures depicted herein, any of the conductive ohgomers, or combinations of conductive ohgomers, may be used Similarly, any of the conductive ohgomers or insulators may also comprise terminal groups as described herein Structure 14 depicts the "A" linker as composing just a sulfur atom, although additional atoms may be present (i e linkers from the sulfur to the conductive oiigomer or substitution groups) In addition, Structure 14 shows the sulfur atom attached to the Y aromatic group, but as will be appreciated by those in the art, it may be attached to the B-D group (i e linker
  • thiol linkages are preferred In systems using electrophoresis, thiol linkages are preferred when either two sets of electrodes are used (i e the detection electrodes composiog the SAMs are not used at high electrophoretic voltages (i e greater than 800 or 900 mV), that can cause oxidation of the thiol linkage and thus loss of the SAM), or, if one set of electrodes is used, lower electrophoretic voltages are used as is generally described below
  • the electrode is a carbon electrode, i e a glassy carbon electrode, and attachment is via a nitrogen of an amme group
  • a representative structure is depicted in Structure 15 Again, additional atoms may be present, i e Z type linkers and/or terminal groups Structure 15
  • the oxygen atom is from the oxide of the metal oxide electrode.
  • the Si atom may also contain other atoms, i.e. be a silicon moiety containing substitution groups.
  • Other attachments for SAMs to other electrodes are known in the art; see for example Napier et al., Langmuir, 1997, for attachment to indium tin oxide electrodes, and also the chemisorption of phosphates to an indium tin oxide electrode (talk by H. Holden Thorpe, CHI conference, May 4-5, 1998).
  • the SAMs of the invention can be made in a variety of ways, including deposition out of organic solutions and deposition out of aqueous solutions.
  • the methods outlined herein use a gold electrode as the example, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, other metals and methods may be used as well.
  • ITO indium-tin-oxide
  • a gold surface is first cleaned.
  • a variety of cleaoing procedures may be employed, including, but not limited to, chemical cleaning or etchants (including Piranha solution
  • hydrogen peroxide/sulfuric acid or aqua regia (hydrochloric acid/oitric acid), electrochemical methods, flame treatment, plasma treatment or combinations thereof.
  • the gold substrate is exposed to the SAM species.
  • the SAM species are phosphonate-containing species.
  • This can also be done in a variety of ways, including, but not limited to, solution deposition, gas phase deposition, microcontact printing, spray deposition, deposition using neat components, etc.
  • a preferred embodiment utilizes a deposition solution comprising a mixture of various SAM species in solution, generally thiol-containing species.
  • Mixed monolayers that contain target analytes, particularly DNA, are usually prepared using a two step procedure.
  • the thiolated DNA is deposited during the first deposition step (generally in the presence of at least one other monolayer-forming species) and the mixed monolayer formation is completed during the second step in which a second thiol solution minus DNA is added
  • the second step frequently involves mild heating to promote monolayer reorganization
  • the deposition solution is an organic deposition solution
  • a clean gold surface is placed into a clean vial
  • a binding ligand deposition solution in organic solvent is prepared in which the total thiol concentration is between micromolar to saturation, preferred ranges include from about 1 ⁇ M to 10 mM, with from about 400 uM to about 1 0 mM being especially preferred
  • the deposition solution contains thiol modified DNA (i e nucleic acid attached to an attachment linker) and thiol diluent molecules (either conductive ohgomers or insulators, with the latter being preferred)
  • the ratio of DNA to diluent (if present) is usually between 1000 1 to 1 1000, with from about 10 1 to about 1 10 being preferred and 1 1 being especially preferred
  • the preferred solvents are tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitole, dimethylforamide (DMF), ethanol, or mixtures thereof, generally any solvent of sufficient polarity to dissolve the capture
  • an aqueous deposition solution is used as above, a clean gold surface is placed into a clean vial
  • a DNA deposition solution in water is prepared in which the total thiol concentration is between about 1 uM and 10 mM, with from about 1 ⁇ M to about 200 uM being preferred
  • the aqueous solution frequently has salt present (up to saturation, with approximately 1M being preferred), however pure water can be used
  • the deposition solution contains thiol modified DNA and often a thiol diluent molecule
  • the ratio of DNA to diluent is usually between 1000 1 to 1 1000, with from about 10 1 to about 1 10 being preferred and 1 1 being especially preferred.
  • DNA deposition solution is added to the vial in such a volume so as to completely cover the electrode surface
  • the gold substrate is allowed to incubate at ambient temperature or slightly above ambient temperature for 1-30 minutes with 5 minutes usually being sufficient
  • the deposition solution is removed and a solution of diluent molecule only (10 uM -1 0 mM) in either water or organic solvent is added
  • the gold substrate is allowed to incubate at room temperature or above room temperature until a complete monolayer is formed (10 m ⁇ nutes-24 hours)
  • the gold sample is removed from the solution, rinsed in clean solvent and used
  • a circuit board is used as the substrate for the gold electrodes
  • Formation of the SAMs on the gold surface is generally done by first cleaning the boards, for example in a 10% sulfuoc acid solution for 30 seconds, detergent solutions, aqua regia, plasma, etc , as outlined herein Following the sulfuoc acid treatment, the boards are washed, for example via immersion in two
  • the detection electrode further comprises a capture binding ligand, preferably covalently attached
  • binding ligand or “binding species” herein is meant a compound that is used to probe for the presence of the target analyte, that will bind to the target analyte
  • binding ligand or “binding species” herein is meant a compound that is used to probe for the presence of the target analyte, that will bind to the target analyte
  • binding ligand or “binding species” herein is meant a compound that is used to probe for the presence of the target analyte, that will bind to the target analyte
  • there are at least two binding ligands used per target analyte molecule a “capture” or “anchor” binding ligand (also referred to herein as a “capture probe”, particularly in reference to a nucleic acid binding ligand) that is attached to the detection electrode as described herein, and a soluble binding ligand, that
  • the capture binding ligand allows the attachment of a target analyte to the detection electrode, for the purposes of detection
  • attachment of the target analyte to the capture binding ligand may be direct (i e the target analyte binds to the capture binding ligand) or indirect (one or more capture extender ligands may be used)
  • the binding is specific, and the binding ligand is part of a binding pair
  • specifically bind herein is meant that the ligand binds the analyte, with specificity sufficient to differentiate between the analyte and other components or contaminants of the test sample
  • the systems may use different binding ligands, for example an array of different ligands, and detection of any particular analyte is via its "signature" of binding to a panel of binding ligands similar to the manner in which "electronic noses" work
  • the binding should be sufficient to allow the analyte to remain bound under the conditions of the assay, including wash steps to remove non-specific binding in some embodiments, for example in the detection of certain biomolecules, the binding constants of the analyte to the binding ligand will be at least about 10 "4 to 10 6 M 1 , with at least
  • the composition of the binding ligand will depend on the composition of the target analyte Binding ligands to a wide variety of analytes are known or can be readily found using known techniques
  • the binding ligand is generally a substantially complementary nucleic acid
  • nucleic acid "aptomers" can be developed for binding to virtually any target analyte
  • the analyte may be a nucleic acid binding protein and the capture binding ligand is either a single-stranded or double-stranded nucleic acid
  • the binding ligand may be a nucleic acid binding protein when the analyte is a
  • the method of attachment of the capture binding ligands to the attachment linker will generally be done as is known in the art, and will depend on both the composition of the attachment linker and the capture binding ligand
  • the capture binding ligands are attached to the attachment linker through the use of functional groups on each that can then be used for attachment
  • Preferred functional groups for attachment are ammo groups, carboxy groups, oxo groups and thiol groups
  • Z Linkers
  • Z linkers are well known in the art, for example, homo-or hetero-bifunctional linkers as are well known (see 1994 Pierce Chemical Company catalog, technical section on cross-linkers, pages 155-200, incorporated herein by reference)
  • Preferred Z linkers include, but are not limited to, alkyl groups (including substituted alkyl groups and alkyl groups containing heteroatom moieties), with short alkyl groups, esters
  • capture binding ligands comprising proteins, lectms, nucleic acids, small organic molecules, carbohydrates, etc can be added
  • a preferred embodiment utilizes protemaceous capture binding ligands
  • any number of techniques may be used to attach a protemaceous capture binding ligand to an attachment linker
  • a wide variety of techniques are known to add moieties to proteins
  • a preferred embodiment utilizes nucleic acids as the capture binding ligand While most of the following discussion focuses on nucleic acids, as will be appreciated by those in the art, many of the techniques outlined below apply in a similar manner to non-nucleic acid systems as well
  • the capture probe nucleic acid is covalently attached to the electrode, via an “attachment linker", that can be either a conductive ohgomer (required for mechan ⁇ sm-1 systems) or an insulator
  • an “attachment linker” can be either a conductive ohgomer (required for mechan ⁇ sm-1 systems) or an insulator
  • covalently attached herein is meant that two moieties are attached by at least one bond, including sigma bonds, pi bonds and coordination bonds
  • nucleic acid or other binding ligand
  • the other end is attached to the electrode
  • any of structures depicted herein may further comprise a nucleic acid effectively as a terminal group
  • the present invention provides compositions comprising nucleic acids covalently attached to electrodes as is generally depicted below in Structure 17
  • F is a linkage that allows the covalent attachment of the electrode and the conductive ohgomer or insulator, including bonds, atoms or linkers such as is described herein, for example as "A", defined below
  • F 2 is a linkage that allows the covalent attachment of the conductive ohgomer or insulator to the nucleic acid, and may be a bond, an atom or a linkage as is herein described
  • F 2 may be part of the conductive ohgomer, part of the insulator, part of the nucleic acid, or exogeneous to both, for example, as defined herein for "Z"
  • the capture probe nucleic acid is covalently attached to the electrode via a conductive ohgomer
  • the covalent attachment of the nucleic acid and the conductive ohgomer may be accomplished in several ways In a preferred embodiment, the attachment is via attachment to the base of the nucleoside, via attachment to the backbone of the nucleic acid (either the nbose, the phosphate, or to an analogous group of a nucleic acid analog backbone), or via a transition metal ligand, as described below
  • the techniques outlined below are generally described for oaturally occuong nucleic acids, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, similar techniques may be used with nucleic acid analogs, and in some cases with other binding ligands
  • the conductive ohgomer is attached to the base of a nucleoside of the nucleic acid This may be done in several ways, depending on the ohgomer, as is described below In one embodiment, the ohgomer is attached to a terminal nucleoside, i e either the 3' or 5' nucleoside of the nucleic acid Alternatively, the conductive ohgomer is attached to an internal nucleoside
  • the point of attachment to the base will vary with the base Generally, attachment at any position is possible In some embodiments, for example when the probe containing the ETMs may be used for hybridization (i e mechan ⁇ sm-1 systems) , it is preferred to attach at positions not involved in hydrogen bonding to the complementary base Thus, for example, generally attachment is to the 5 or 6 position of py ⁇ midines such as undine, cytosine and thymme For puones such as adenme and guanme, the linkage is preferably via the 8 position Attachment to non-standard bases is preferably done at the comparable positions
  • the attachment is direct, that is, there are no intervening atoms between the conductive ohgomer and the base
  • conductive ohgomers with terminal acetylene bonds are attached directly to the base Structure 18 is an example of this linkage, using a Structure 3 conductive ohgomer and undine as the base, although other bases and conductive ohgomers can be used as will be appreciated by those in the art
  • the pentose structures depicted herein may have hydrogen, hydroxy, phosphates or other groups such as am o groups attached
  • the pentose and nucleoside structures depicted herein are depicted non-conventionally, as mirror images of the normal rendering
  • the pentose and nucleoside structures may also contain additional groups, such as protecting groups, at any position, for example as needed during synthesis
  • the base may contain additional modifications as needed, i e the carbonyl or amme groups may be altered or protected
  • the attachment is any number of different Z linkers, including amide and amme linkages, as is generally depicted in Structure 19 using undine as the base and a Structure 3 ohgomer
  • Z is a linker
  • Z is a short linker of about 1 to about 10 atoms, with from 1 to 5 atoms being preferred, that may or may not contain alkene, alkynyl, amme, amide, azo, imine, etc , bonds
  • Linkers are known in the art, for example, homo-or hetero-bifunctional linkers as are well known (see 1994 Pierce Chemical Company catalog, technical section on cross-linkers, pages 155-200, incorporated herein by reference)
  • Preferred Z linkers include, but are not limited to, alkyl groups (including substituted alkyl groups and alkyl groups containing heteroatom moieties), with short alkyl groups, esters, amide, amme, epoxy groups and ethylene glycol and derivatives being preferred, with propyl, acetylene, and C 2 alkene being especially preferred Z may also be a sulfone group, forming sulfonamide linkages as discussed below
  • the attachment of the nucleic acid and the conductive ohgomer is done via attachment to the backbone of the nucleic acid This may be done in a number of ways, including attachment to a nbose of the ⁇ bose-phosphate backbone, or to the phosphate of the backbone, or other groups of analogous backbones
  • the site of attachment in this embodiment may be to a 3' or 5' terminal nucleotide, or to an internal nucleotide, as is more fully described below
  • the conductive ohgomer is attached to the nbose of the obose-phosphate backbone This may be done in several ways.
  • nucleosides that are modified at either the 2' or 3' position of the nbose with ammo groups, sulfur groups, sihcone groups, phosphorus groups, or oxo groups can be made (Imazawa et al , J Org Chem , 44 2039 (1979), Hobbs et al , J Org Chem 42(4) 714 (1977), Verheyden et al , J Orrg Chem 36(2) 250 (1971), McGee et al , J Org Chem 61 781-785 (1996), Mikhailopulo et al , Liebigs Ann Chem 513-519 (1993), McGee et al , Nucleosides & Nucleotides 14(6) 1329 (1995), all of which are incorporated by reference)
  • a preferred embodiment utilizes ammo-modified nucleosides These ammo-modified oboses can then be used to form either amide or amme linkages to the conductive ohgomers
  • the ammo group is attached directly to the nbose, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, short linkers such as those described herein for "Z" may be present between the ammo group and the nbose
  • an amide linkage is used for attachment to the nbose
  • m is zero and thus the conductive ohgomer terminates in the amide bond
  • the nitrogen of the ammo group of the ammo-modified nbose is the "D" atom of the conductive ohgomer
  • Structure 20 has the terminal bond fixed as an amide bond
  • a heteroatom linkage is used, i e oxo, amme, sulfur, etc
  • a preferred embodiment utilizes an amme linkage
  • the nitrogen of the ammo-modified nbose may be the "D" atom of the conductive ohgomer when the Structure 3 conductive ohgomer is used
  • Structures 21 and 22 depict nucleosides with the Structures 3 and 9 conductive ohgomers, respectively, using the nitrogen as the heteroatom, athough other heteroatoms can be used
  • both m and t are not zero
  • a preferred Z here is a methylene group, or other aliphatic alkyl linkers One, two or three carbons in this position are particularly useful for synthetic reasons
  • Suitable linkers include methylene and ethylene
  • the conductive ohgomer is covalently attached to the nucleic acid via the phosphate of the obose-phosphate backbone (or analog) of a nucleic acid
  • the attachment is direct, utilizes a linker or via an amide bond
  • Structure 23 depicts a direct linkage
  • Structure 24 depicts linkage via an amide bond (both utilize the Structure 3 conductive ohgomer, although Structure 8 conductive ohgomers are also possible)
  • Structures 23 and 24 depict the conductive ohgomer in the 3' position, although the 5' position is also possible
  • both Structures 23 and 24 depict naturally occurring phosphodiester bonds, although as those in the art will appreciate, non-standard analogs of phosphodiester bonds may also be used
  • Structure 24 depicts a preferred embodiment, wherein the terminal B-D bond is an amide bond, the terminal Y is not present, and Z is a linker, as defined herein
  • the conductive ohgomer is covalently attached to the nucleic acid via a transition metal ligand
  • the conductive ohgomer is covalently attached to a ligand which provides one or more of the coordination atoms for a transition metal
  • the ligand to which the conductive ohgomer is attached also has the nucleic acid attached, as is generally depicted below in Structure 25
  • the conductive ohgomer is attached to one ligand, and the nucleic acid is attached to another ligand, as is generally depicted below in Structure 26
  • the conductive ohgomer is covalently attached to the nucleic acid
  • M is a metal atom, with transition metals being preferred Suitable transition metals for use in the invention include, but are not limited to, cadmium (Cd), copper (Cu), cobalt (Co), palladium (Pd), zinc (Zn), iron (Fe), ruthenium (Ru), rhodium (Rh), osmium (Os), rhenium (Re), platinium (Pt), scandium (Sc), titanium (Ti), Vanadium (V), chromium (Cr), manganese (Mn), nickel (Ni), Molybdenum (Mo), technetium (Tc), tungsten (W), and indium (Ir) That is, the first series of transition metals, the platinum metals (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir and Pt), along with Fe, Re, W, Mo and Tc, are preferred Particularly preferred are ruthenium, rhenium, osmium, platinium, cobalt
  • L are the co-ligands, that provide the coordination atoms for the binding of the metal ion
  • the number and nature of the co-hgands will depend on the coordination number of the metal ion
  • Mono-, di- or polydentate co-hgands may be used at any position
  • r may range from zero (when all coordination atoms are provided by the other two ligands) to four, when all the co-hgands are monodentate
  • r will be from 0 to 8, depending on the coordination number of the metal ion and the choice of the other ligands
  • the metal ion has a coordination number of six and both the ligand attached to the conductive ohgomer and the ligand attached to the nucleic acid are at least bidentate, that is, r is preferably zero, one (i e the remaining co- gand is bidentate) or two (two monodentate co-hgands are used)
  • Suitable ligands can be the same or different Suitable ligands fall into two categories ligands which use nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, carbon or phosphorus atoms (depending on the metal ion) as the coordination atoms (generally referred to in the literature as sigma ( ⁇ ) donors) and organometalhc ligands such as metallocene ligands (generally referred to in the literature as pi ( ⁇ ) donors, and depicted herein as L Suitable nitrogen donating ligands are well known in the art and include, but are not limited to, NH 2 , NHR, NRR', pyridme, pyrazme, isonicotinamide, imidazole, bipyndine and substituted derivatives of bipyridme, terpyodine and substituted derivatives, phenanthrolmes, particularly 1 ,10-phenanthrohne (abbreviated phen) and substituted derivatives of phenanthrol
  • Suitable sigma donating ligands using carbon, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus are known in the art
  • suitable sigma carbon donors are found in Cotton and Wilkenson, Advanced Organic
  • oxygen ligands include crown ethers, water and others known in the art Phosphmes and substituted phosph es are also suitable, see page 38 of Cotton and Wilkenson
  • oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus and nitrogen-donating ligands are attached in such a manner as to allow the heteroatoms to serve as coordination atoms
  • organometalhc ligands are used In addition to purely organic compounds for use as redox moieties, and various transition metal coordination complexes with ⁇ -bonded organic ligand with donor atoms as heterocychc or exocychc substituents, there is available a wide variety of transition metal organometalhc compounds with ⁇ -bonded organic ligands (see Advanced Inorganic Chemistry, 5th Ed , Cotton & Wilkinson, John Wiley & Sons, 1988, chapter 26, Organometal cs, A Concise Introduction, Elschenbroich et al , 2nd Ed , 1992, VCH, and Comprehensive Organometalhc Chemistry II, A Review of the Literature 1982-1994, Abel et al Ed , Vol 7, chapters 7, 8, 10 & 11 , Pergamon Press, hereby expressly incorporated by reference)
  • Such organometalhc ligands include cyclic aromatic compounds such as the cyclopentadienide ion [C 5 H 5 (-1)
  • organometalhc ligand When one or more of the co-hgands is an organometalhc ligand, the ligand is generally attached via one of the carbon atoms of the organometalhc ligand, although attachment may be via other atoms for heterocychc ligands
  • Preferred organometalhc ligands include metallocene ligands, including substituted derivatives and the metalloceneophanes (see page 1174 of Cotton and Wilkenson, supra)
  • derivatives of metallocene ligands such as methylcyclopentadienyl, with multiple methyl groups being preferred, such as pentamethylcyclopentadienyl, can be used to increase the stability of the metallocene
  • only one of the two metallocene ligands of a metallocene are deovatized
  • any combination of ligands may be used Preferred combinations include a) all ligands are nitrogen donating ligands, b) all ligands are organometalhc ligands, and c) the ligand at the terminus of the conductive ohgomer is a metallocene ligand and the ligand provided by the nucleic acid is a nitrogen donating ligand, with the other ligands, if needed, are either nitrogen donating ligands or metallocene ligands, or a mixture
  • These combinations are depicted in representative structures using the conductive ohgomer of Structure 3 are depicted in Structures 27 (using phenanthrohne and ammo as representative ligands), 28 (using ferrocene as the metal-hgand combination) and 29 (using cyclopentadienyl and ammo as representative ligands)
  • the ligands used in the invention show altered fluorescent properties depending on the redox state of the chelated metal ion As described below, this thus serves as an additional mode of detection of electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode
  • the ligand attached to the nucleic acid is an ammo group attached to the 2' or 3' position of a nbose of the obose-phosphate backbone
  • This ligand may contain a multiplicity of ammo groups so as to form a polydentate ligand which binds the metal ion
  • Other preferred ligands include cyclopentadiene and phenanthrohne
  • metal ions to connect the nucleic acids can serve as an internal control or calibration of the system, to evaluate the number of available nucleic acids on the surface
  • metal ions are used to connect the nucleic acids to the conductive ohgomers, it is generally desirable to have this metal ion complex have a different redox potential than that of the ETMs used in the rest of the system, as described below This is generally true so as to be able to distinguish the presence of the capture probe from the presence of the target sequence This may be useful for identification, calibration and/or quantification
  • the amount of capture probe on an electrode may be compared to the amount of hybridized double stranded nucleic acid to quantify the amount of target sequence in a sample This is quite significant to serve as an internal control of the sensor or system This allows a measurement either prior to the addition of target or after, on the same molecules that will be used for detection, rather than rely on a similar but different control system
  • the actual molecules that will be used for the detection is quite significant to serve as an internal control of the sensor or system
  • the capture probe nucleic acids are covalently attached to the electrode via an insulator
  • the attachment of nucleic acids (and other binding ligands) to insulators such as alkyl groups is well known, and can be done to the base or the backbone, including the nbose or phosphate for backbones containing these moieties, or to alternate backbones for nucleic acid analogs
  • there may be one type of capture probe, or one type of capture probe extender as is more fully described below
  • different capture probes, or one capture probes with a multiplicity of different capture extender probes can be used Similarly, it may be desirable (particular in the case of nucleic acid analytes and binding ligands in mechan ⁇ sm-2 systems) to use auxiliary capture probes that comprise relatively short probe sequences, that can be used to "tack down" components of the
  • the present invention provides substrates composing at least one detection electrode comprising monolayers and capture binding ligands, useful in target analyte detection systems
  • the compositions further comprise a solution or soluble binding ligand, although as is more fully described below, for mechan ⁇ sm-1 systems, the ETMs may be added in the form of non-covalently attached hybridization indicators
  • Solution binding ligands are similar to capture binding ligands, in that they bind, preferably specifically, to target analytes
  • the solution binding ligand may be the same or different from the capture binding ligand
  • the solution binding ligands are not directed attached to the surface, although as depicted in Figure 5A they may be
  • the solution binding ligand either directly comprises a recruitment linker that comprises at least one ETM (Figure 4A), or the recruitment linker binds, either directly (Figure 4A) or indirectly (Figure
  • solution binding ligands or “soluble binding ligands” or “signal carriers” or “label probes” or “label binding ligands” with recruitment linkers composing covalently attached ETMs are provided That is, one portion of the label probe or solution binding ligand directly or indirectly binds to the target analyte, and one portion comprises a recruitment linker composing covalently attached ETMs In some systems, for example in mechan ⁇ sm-1 nucleic acid systems, these may be the same Similarly, for mechan ⁇ sm-1 systems, the recruitment linker comprises nucleic acid that will hybridize to detection probes
  • the terms “electron donor moiety”, “electron acceptor moiety”, and “ETMs” (ETMs) or grammatical equivalents herein refers to molecules capable of electron transfer under certain conditions It is to be understood that electron donor and acceptor capabilities are relative, that is, a molecule which can lose an electron under certain experimental conditions will be able to accept an electron under different experimental conditions It is to be
  • ETMs include, but are not limited to, transition metal complexes, organic ETMs, and electrodes
  • the ETMs are transition metal complexes
  • Transition metals are those whose atoms have a partial or complete d shell of electrons Suitable transition metals for use in the invention are listed above
  • transition metals are complexed with a variety of ligands, L, defined above, to form suitable transition metal complexes, as is well known in the art
  • organic electron donors and acceptors may be covalently attached to the nucleic acid for use in the invention
  • organic molecules include, but are not limited to, riboflavin, xanthene dyes, azme dyes, acodine orange, ⁇ /,/V-d ⁇ methyl-2,7- diazapyrenium dichloode (DAP 2+ ), methylviologen, ethidium bromide, quinones such as N,N'- d ⁇ methylanthra(2,1 ,9-def6,5,10-d'e'f)d ⁇ soqu ⁇ nohne dichlonde (ADIQ 2+ ), porphyons ([meso-tetrak ⁇ s(N- methyl-x-py ⁇ d ⁇ n ⁇ um)porphyr ⁇ n tetrachloode], varlamine blue B hydrochloode, Bmdschedler's green, 2,6-d ⁇ chloro ⁇ ndo
  • 10-methylphenoxyaz ⁇ ne chloride 10-methylphenoxyaz ⁇ ne chloride), methylene blue, Nile blue A (aminoaphthodiethylaminophenoxazine sulfate), ⁇ nd ⁇ go-5,5',7,7'-tetrasulfon ⁇ c ac ⁇ d, ⁇ nd ⁇ go-5,5',7-tosulfon ⁇ c ac ⁇ d, phenosafranme, ⁇ nd ⁇ go-5- monosulfonic acid, safranme T, b ⁇ s(d ⁇ methylglyox ⁇ mato)- ⁇ ron(ll) chloride, induhne scarlet, neutral red, anthracene, coronene, pyrene, 9-phenylanthracene, rubrene, binaphthyl, DPA, phenothiazene, fluoranthene, phenanthrene, chrysene, 1 ,8-d ⁇ pheny
  • the electron donors and acceptors are redox proteins as are known in the art However, redox proteins in many embodiments are not preferred
  • the ETMs are chosen to be charged molecules, preferably when the target analyte is not charged
  • solution binding ligands that either directly or indirectly contain a number of charged ETMs can be bound to the target analyte poor to electrophoresis, to allow the target analyte to have a sufficient charge to move within the electric field, thus providing a dual purpose of providing charge and a detection moiety
  • label probes that contain charged ETMs may be used, that bind either directly to the target analyte or to an intermediate species such as an amplifier probe can be used Alternatively, other charged species can be added in addition to the ETMs Alternatively, these charges species may also be an integral part of the system, for example, part of the label probe may be a charged polymer such as polylysine
  • a reverse electric field generally a pulse of reverse polarity
  • electrophoresis can result in the non-specifically bound label probes being driven off or away from the detection probe surface, to decrease the background non-specific signal
  • ETMs are metallocenes, with ferrocene, including derivatives, being particularly preferred
  • a plurality of ETMs are used as is shown in the examples, the use of multiple ETMs provides signal amplification and thus allows more sensitive detection limits As discussed below, while the use of multiple ETMs on nucleic acids that hybridize to complementary strands can cause decreases in T m s of the hybridization complexes depending on the number, site of attachment and spacing between the multiple ETMs, this is not a factor when the ETMs are on the recruitment linker (i e "mechan ⁇ sm-2" systems), since this does not hybridize to a complementary sequence Accordingly, pluralities of ETMs are preferred, with at least about 2 ETMs per recruitment linker being preferred, and at least about 10 being particularly preferred, and at least about 20 to 50 being especially preferred In some instances, very large numbers of ETMs (50 to 1000) can be used
  • solution binding ligands, or label probes, with covalently attached ETMs are provided.
  • the method of attachment of the ETM to the solution binding ligand will vary depending on the mode of detection (i e mechan ⁇ sm-1 or -2 systems) and the composition of the solution binding ligand
  • the portion of the solution binding ligand (or label probe) that comprises the ETM is referred to as a "recruitment linker" and can comprise either nucleic acid or non-nucleic acid
  • the recruitment linker must be nucleic acid
  • the recruitment linker is nucleic acid (including analogs), and attachment of the ETMs can be via (1) a base, (2) the backbone, including the nbose, the phosphate, or comparable structures in nucleic acid analogs, (3) nucleoside replacement, described below, or (4) metallocene polymers, as desc ⁇ bed below
  • the recruitment linker is non-nucleic acid, and can be either a metallocene polymer or an alkyl-type polymer (including heteroalkyl, as is more fully described below) containing ETM substitution groups
  • the recruitment linker is a nucleic acid, and comprises covalently attached ETMs
  • the ETMs may be attached to nucleosides within the nucleic acid in a variety of positions
  • Preferred embodiments include, but are not limited to, (1) attachment to the base of the nucleoside, (2) attachment of the ETM as a base replacement, (3) attachment to the backbone of the nucleic acid, including either to a nbose of the obose-phosphate backbone or to a phosphate moiety, or to analogous structures in nucleic acid analogs, and (4) attachment via metallocene polymers
  • the recruitment linker is nucleic acid
  • secondary label probes that have a first portion that will hybridize to a portion of the primary label probes and a second portion composing a recruitment linker as is defined herein This is generally depicted in Figure 6Q and 6R, this is similar to the use of an amplifier probe, except that both the primary and the secondary label probes comprise ETMs
  • the ETM is attached to the base of a nucleoside as is generally outlined above for attachment of the conductive ohgomer Attachment can be to an internal nucleoside or a terminal nucleoside
  • the covalent attachment to the base will depend in part on the ETM chosen, but in general is similar to the attachment of conductive ohgomers to bases, as outlined above Attachment may generally be done to any position of the base
  • the ETM is a transition metal complex, and thus attachment of a suitable metal ligand to the base leads to the covalent attachment of the ETM
  • similar types of linkages may be used for the attachment of organic ETMs, as will be appreciated by those in the art
  • the C4 attached ammo group of cytosme, the C6 attached ammo group of adenine, or the C2 attached ammo group of guanme may be used as a transition metal ligand
  • Ligands containing aromatic groups can be attached via acetylene linkages as is known in the art (see Comprehensive Organic Synthesis, Trost et al , Ed , Pergamon Press, Chapter 2 4 Coupling
  • Structure 30 depicts a representative structure in the presence of the metal ion and any other necessary ligands, Structure 30 depicts undine, although as for all the structures herein, any other base may also be used Structure 30
  • L a is a gand, which may include nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus donating ligands or organometalhc ligands such as metallocene ligands
  • Suitable L a ligands include, but not limited to, phenanthrolme, imidazole, bpy and terpy L r and M are as defined above
  • a linker (“Z") may be included between the nucleoside and the ETM
  • the linkage may be done using a linker, which may utilize an amide linkage (see generally Telser et al , J Am Chem Soc 111 7221-7226 (1989), Telser et al , J Am Chem Soc 111 7226-7232 (1989), both of which are expressly incorporated by reference)
  • a linker which may utilize an amide linkage (see generally Telser et al , J Am Chem Soc 111 7221-7226 (1989), Telser et al , J Am Chem Soc 111 7226-7232 (1989), both of which are expressly incorporated by reference)
  • L is a ligand as defined above, with L r and M as defined above as well
  • L is ammo, phen, byp and terpy
  • the ETM attached to a nucleoside is a metallocene, i e the L and L r of Structure 31 are both metallocene ligands, L m , as described above Structure 32 depicts a preferred embodiment wherein the metallocene is ferrocene, and the base is undine, although other bases may be used
  • the ETM is attached to a nbose at any position of the nbose-phosphate backbone of the nucleic acid, i e either the 5' or 3' terminus or any internal nucleoside Ribose in this case can include ribose analogs
  • nucleosides that are modified at either the 2' or 3' position of the ribose can be made, with nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus-containing modifications possible Ammo-modified and oxygen-modified ribose is preferred See generally PCT publication WO 95/15971 , incorporated herein by reference These modification groups may be used as a transition metal hgand,
  • a metallocene serves as the ETM, and is attached via an amide bond as depicted below in Structure 33
  • the examples outline the synthesis of a preferred compound when the metallocene is ferrocene
  • am e linkages are used, as is generally depicted in Structure 34
  • Z is a linker, as defined herein, with 1-16 atoms being preferred, and 2-4 atoms being particularly preferred, and t is either one or zero
  • oxo linkages are used, as is generally depicted in Structure 35 Structure 35
  • Z is a linker, as defined herein, and t is either one or zero.
  • an ETM is attached to a phosphate at any position of the ribose-phosphate backbone of the nucleic acid. This may be done in a variety of ways.
  • phosphodiester bond analogs such as phosphoramide or phosphoramidite linkages may be incorporated into a nucleic acid, where the heteroatom (i.e. nitrogen) serves as a transition metal ligand (see PCT publication WO 95/15971 , incorporated by reference).
  • the conductive ohgomers depicted in Structures 23 and 24 may be replaced by ETMs.
  • the composition has the structure shown in Structure 36.
  • the ETM is attached via a phosphate linkage, generally through the use of a linker, Z.
  • alkyl-based linkers can be used to create multiple branching structures comprising one or more ETMs at the terminus of each branch. Generally, this is done by creating branch points containing multiple hydroxy groups, which optionally can then be used to add additional branch points The terminal hydroxy groups can then be used in phosphoramidite reactions to add ETMs, as is generally done below for the nucleoside replacement and metallocene polymer reactions
  • an ETM such as a metallocene is used as a "nucleoside replacement", serving as an ETM
  • the distance between the two cyclopentadiene rings of ferrocene is similar to the orthongonal distance between two bases in a double stranded nucleic acid
  • Other metallocenes in addition to ferrocene may be used, for example, air stable metallocenes such as those containing cobalt or ruthenium
  • metallocene moieties may be incorporated into the backbone of a nucleic acid, as is generally depicted in Structure 37 (nucleic acid with a ribose-phosphate backbone) and Structure 38 (peptide nucleic acid backbone) Structures 37 and 38 depict ferrocene, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, other metallocenes may be used as well
  • air stable metallocenes are preferred, including metallocenes utilizing ruthenium and cobalt as the metal
  • Z is a linker as defined above, with generally short, alkyl groups, including heteroatoms such as oxygen being preferred Generally, what is important is the length of the linker, such that minimal perturbations of a double stranded nucleic acid is effected, as is more fully described below Thus, methylene, ethylene, ethylene glycols, propylene and butylene are all preferred, with ethylene and ethylene glycol being particularly preferred.
  • each Z linker may be the same or different Structure 37 depicts a ribose-phosphate backbone, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, nucleic acid analogs may also be used, including ribose analogs and phosphate bond analogs Structure 38
  • ETMs in addition to metallocenes, as nucleoside replacements or in polymer embodiments, described below
  • the ETM is a transition metal complex other than a metallocene, composing one, two or three (or more) ligands
  • the ligands can be functionahzed as depicted for the ferrocene to allow the addition of phosphoramidite groups
  • Particularly preferred in this embodiment are complexes comprising at least two ring (for example, aryl and substituted aryl) ligands, where each of the ligands comprises functional groups for attachment via phosphoramidite chemistry
  • this type of reaction creating polymers of ETMs either as a portion of the backbone of the nucleic acid or as "side groups" of the nucleic acids, to allow amplification of the signals generated herein,
  • nucleic acid analogs are made, that is, the invention provides nucleic acids having a backbone comprising at least one metallocene
  • a metallocene such as ferrocene (or other ETM)
  • nucleic acids having a backbone comprising at least one metallocene
  • two nucleic acids each made up of a traditional nucleic acid or analog may be covalently attached to each other via a metallocene
  • a metallocene derivative or substituted metallocene is provided, wherein each of the two aromatic rings of the metallocene has a nucleic acid substitutent group
  • nucleic acid substitutent groups it is also desirable in some instances to add additional substituent groups to one or both of the aromatic rings of the metallocene (or ETM)
  • additional substituent groups to one or both of the aromatic rings of the metallocene (or ETM)
  • these nucleoside replacements are generally part of probe sequences to be hybridized with a substantially complementary nucleic acid, for example a target sequence or another probe sequence
  • substitutent groups to the metallocene rings to facilitate hydrogen bonding to the base or bases on the opposite strand
  • substitutent groups include, but are not limited to, amide groups, amme groups, carboxy c acids, and alcohols, including substituted alcohols
  • these substitutent groups can be attached via linkers as well, although in general this is not preferred
  • substituent groups on an ETM may be added to alter the redox properties of the ETM
  • substituent groups on an ETM may be added to alter the redox properties of the ETM
  • substituent groups on the metallocene may allow two different
  • the intermediate components are also provided.
  • the invention provides phosphoramidite metallocenes, as generally depicted in Structure 39
  • PG is a protecting group, generally suitable for use in nucleic acid synthesis, with DMT, MMT and TMT all being preferred
  • the aromatic rings can either be the rings of the metallocene, or aromatic rings of ligands for transition metal complexes or other organic ETMs
  • the aromatic rings may be the same or different, and may be substituted as discussed herein
  • Structure 40 depicts the ferrocene derivative
  • Structure 41 depicts the ferrocene peptide nucleic acid (PNA) monomer, that can be added to PNA synthesis as is known in the art
  • the PG protecting group is suitable for use in peptide nucleic acid synthesis, with MMT, boc and Fmoc being preferred
  • ETM or metallocene polymers which are added to the nucleic acids, rather than as backbone replacements, as is more fully described below
  • the ETMs are attached as polymers, for example as metallocene polymers, in a ' branched" configuration similar to the "branched DNA” embodiments herein and as outlined in U S Patent No 5,124,246, using modified functionahzed nucleotides
  • the general idea is as follows A modified phosphoramidite nucleotide is generated that can ultimately contain a free hydroxy group that can be used in the attachment of phosphoramidite
  • ETMs such as metallocenes
  • This free hydroxy group could be on the base or the backbone, such as the ribose or the phosphate (although as will be appreciated by those in the art, nucleic acid analogs containing other structures can also be used)
  • the modified nucleotide is incorporated into a nucleic acid, and any hydroxy protecting groups are removed thus leaving the free hydroxyl
  • a phosphoramidite ETM such as a metallocene
  • ETMs such as metallocene ETMs
  • Additional phosphoramidite ETMs such as metallocenes can be added, to form "ETM polymers", including "metallocene polymers” as depicted in Figure 9 with ferrocene
  • it is desirable to increase the solubility of the polymers by adding a "capping" group to the terminal ETM in the polymer, for example a final phosphate group to the metallocene as is generally depicted in Figure 9
  • a "capping" group to the terminal ETM in the polymer, for example a final phosphate group to the metallocene as is generally depicted in Figure 9
  • Other suitable solubility enhancing "capping" groups will be appreciated by those in the art It should be noted that these solubility enhancing groups can be added to the polymers in other places, including to the hgand rings, for example on the metallocenes as discussed herein
  • the 2' position of a ribose of a phosphoramidite nucleotide is first functionahzed to contain a protected hydroxy group, in this case via an oxo-hnkage, although any number of linkers can be used, as is generally described herein for Z linkers
  • the protected modified nucleotide is then incorporated via standard phosphoramidite chemistry into a growing nucleic acid
  • the protecting group is removed, and the free hydroxy group is used, again using standard phosphoramidite chemistry to add a phosphoramidite metallocene such as ferrocene
  • a similar reaction is possible for nucleic acid analogs For example, using peptide nucleic acids and the metallocene monomer shown in Structure
  • the present invention provides recruitment linkers of nucleic acids composing "branches" of metallocene polymers as is generally depicted in Figures 8 and 9 Preferred embodiments also utilize metallocene polymers from one to about 50 metallocenes in length, with from about 5 to about 20 being preferred and from about 5 to about 10 being especially preferred
  • any combination of ETM attachments may be done
  • clusters of nucleosides containing ETMs can decrease the Tm of hybridization of the probe to its target sequence, thus in general, for mechan ⁇ sm-1 systems, the ETMs are spaced out over the length of the sequence, or only small numbers of them are used
  • ETM is a hybridization indicator
  • Hybridization indicators serve as an ETM that will preferentially associate with double stranded nucleic acid is added, usually reversibly, similar to the method of Millan et al , Anal Chem 65 2317-2323 (1993), Millan et al , Anal Chem 662943-2948 (1994), both of which are hereby expressly incorporated by reference
  • increases in the local concentration of ETMs, due to the association of the ETM hybridization indicator with double stranded nucleic acid at the surface can be monitored using the monolayers comprising the conductive ohgomers
  • Hybridization indicators include mtercalators and minor and/or major groove binding moieties
  • mtercalators may be used, since intercalation generally only occurs in the presence of double stranded nucleic acid, only in the presence of double stranded nucleic acid will the ETMs concentrate Intercalating transition metal complex ETMs are known in the art
  • major or minor groove binding moieties such as methylene blue, may also be used in this embodiment
  • the binding acceleration systems of the invention may be used in virtually any method that relies on electrochemical detection of target analytes, with particular utility in nucleic acid detection
  • the methods and compositions of the invention can be used in nucleic acid detection methods that rely on the detection of ETMs that are inherent to the target analyte
  • ETMs that are inherent to the target analyte
  • the guanme bases of nucleic acid can be detected via changes in the redox state, i e guanme oxidation by ruthenium complexes
  • the methods of the invention find use in detection systems that utilize copper surfaces as catalytic electrodes to oxidize the riboses of nucleic acids
  • the recruitment linker is not nucleic acid, and instead may be any sort of linker or polymer As will be appreciated by those in the art, generally any linker or polymer that can be modified to contain ETMs can be used In general, the polymers or linkers should be reasonably soluble and contain suitable functional groups for the addition of ETMs
  • a "recruitment polymer” comprises at least two or three subunits, which are covalently attached At least some portion of the monomeoc subunits contain functional groups for the covalent attachment of ETMs
  • coupling moieties are used to covalently link the subunits with the ETMs
  • Preferred functional groups for attachment are ammo groups, carboxy groups, oxo groups and thiol groups, with ammo groups being particularly preferred
  • Suitable linkers include, but are not limited to, alkyl linkers (including heteroalkyl (including (poly)ethylene glycol-type structures), substituted alkyl, aryalkyl linkers, etc
  • the linkers will comprise one or more functional groups for the attachment of ETMs, which will be done as will be appreciated by those in the art, for example through the use homo-or hetero- bifunctional linkers as are well known (see 1994 Pierce Chemical Company catalog, technical section
  • Suitable recruitment polymers include, but are not limited to, functionahzed styrenes, such as am o styrene, functionahzed dextrans, and polyamino acids
  • Preferred polymers are polyammo acids (both poly-D-ammo acids and poly-L-amino acids), such as polylysine, and polymers containing lysme and other ammo acids being particularly preferred
  • charged recruitment linkers are preferred, for example when non-charged target analytes are to be detected
  • Other suitable polyammo acids are polyglutamic acid, polyaspartic acid, co-polymers of lys e and glutamic or aspartic acid, co-polymers of lysme with alanine, tyrosine, phenylalanme, seone, tryptophan, and/or prohne
  • the recruitment linker comprises a metallocene polymer, as is described above
  • the attachment of the recruitment linkers to the first portion of the label probe i e the portion that binds either directly or indirectly to the target analyte, will depend on the composition of the recruitment linker, as will be appreciated by those in the art
  • the recruitment linker is nucleic acid, it is generally formed during the synthesis of the first portion of the label probe, with incorporation of nucleosides containing ETMs as required
  • the first portion of the label probe and the recruitment linker may be made separately, and then attached
  • attachment of the linker/polymer of the recruitment linker will be done generally using standard chemical techniques, such as will be appreciated by those in the art
  • attachment can be similar to the attachment of insulators to nucleic acids
  • recruitment linkers that are mixtures of nucleic acids and non-nucleic acids, either in a linear form (i e nucleic acid segments linked together with alkyl linkers) or in branched forms (nucleic acids with alkyl "branches" that may contain ETMs and may be additionally branched)
  • the target analyte is a nucleic acid
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • PCR amplification of a target sequence will result in target sequences composing ETMs, generally randomly incorporated into the sequence
  • the system of the invention can then be configured to allow detection using these ETMs, as is generally depicted in Figures 6A and 6B
  • compositions utilizing electrodes composing monolayers of conductive ohgomers and capture probes, and target sequences that comprises a first portion that is capable of hybridizing to a component of an assay complex, and a second portion that does not hybridize to a component of an assay complex and comprises at least one covalently attached electron transfer moiety likewise, methods utilizing these compositions are also provided
  • ETMs may be added to non-recruitment linkers as well
  • ETMs may be added to sections of label probes that do hybridize to components of the assay complex, for example the first portion, or to the target sequence as outlined above and depicted in Figure 6R
  • These ETMs may be used for electron transfer detection in some embodiments, or they may not, depending on the location and system
  • the target sequence containing randomly incorporated ETMs is hybridized directly to the capture probe, as is depicted in Figure 6A and 6B
  • there may be ETMs in the portion hybridizing to the capture probe If the capture probe is attached to the electrode using a conductive ohgomer, these ETMs can be used to detect electron transfer as has been previously described Alternatively these ETM
  • the recruitment linker when the recruitment linker is nucleic acid, it may be desirable in some instances to have some or all of the recruitment linker be double stranded, for example in the mechan ⁇ sm-2 systems
  • the first recruitment linker comprises the covalently attached ETMs
  • the second recruitment linker contains the ETMs, and the first recruitment linker does not, and the ETMs are recruited to the surface by hybridization of the second recruitment linker to the first
  • both the first and second recruitment linkers comprise ETMs It should be noted, as discussed above, that nucleic acids composing a large number of ETMs may not hybridize as well, i e the T m may be decreased, depending on the site of attachment and the characteristics of the ETM Thus, in general, when multiple ETMs are used on hybridizing strands, i e in mechan ⁇ s
  • the compositions of the invention are used to detect target analytes in a sample
  • the target analyte is a nucleic acid
  • target sequences are detected
  • the term "target sequence” or grammatical equivalents herein means a nucleic acid sequence on a single strand of nucleic acid
  • the target sequence may be a portion of a gene, a regulatory sequence, genomic DNA, cDNA, RNA including mRNA and rRNA, or others It may be any length, with the understanding that longer sequences are more specific
  • the complementary target sequence may take many forms For example, it may be contained within a larger nucleic acid sequence, i e all or part of a gene or mRNA, a restriction fragment of a plasmid or genomic DNA, among others
  • probes are made to hybridize to target sequences to determine the presence or absence of the target sequence in a sample Generally speaking, this term will be understood by those skilled in the
  • the probes of the present invention are designed to be complementary to a target sequence (either the target sequence of the sample or to other probe sequences, as is described below), such that hybridization of the target sequence and the probes of the present invention occurs
  • a target sequence either the target sequence of the sample or to other probe sequences, as is described below
  • this complementarity need not be perfect, there may be any number of base pair mismatches which will interfere with hybridization between the target sequence and the single stranded nucleic acids of the present invention
  • the sequence is not a complementary target sequence
  • substantially complementary herein is meant that the probes are sufficiently complementary to the target sequences to hybridize under normal reaction conditions
  • nucleic acid compositions of the invention are useful as oligonucleotide probes
  • the length of the probe will vary with the length of the target sequence and the hybodizatioo and wash conditions
  • oligonucleotide probes range from about 8 to about 50 nucleotides, with from about 10 to about 30 being preferred and from about 12 to about 25 being especially preferred
  • very long probes may be used, e g 50 to 200-300 nucleotides in length
  • nucleosides may be replaced with nucleic acids
  • hybridization conditions may be used in the present invention, including high, moderate and low stringency conditions, see for example Maniatis et al , Molecular Cloning A Laboratory
  • stringent conditions are selected to be about 5-10°C lower than the thermal melting point (Tm) for the specific sequence at a defined ionic strength pH
  • Tm is the temperature (under defined ionic strength, pH and nucleic acid concentration) at which 50% of the probes complementary to the target hybridize to the target sequence at equilibrium (as the target sequences are present in excess, at Tm, 50% of the probes are occupied at equilibrium)
  • Stringent conditions will be those in which the salt concentration is less than about 1 0 sodium ion, typically about
  • less stringent hybridization conditions are used, for example, moderate or low stringency conditions may be used, as are known in the art, see Maniatis and Ausubel, supra, and Tijssen, supra
  • hybridization conditions may also vary when a non-ionic backbone, i e PNA is used, as is known in the art
  • cross-linking agents may be added after target binding to cross-link, i e covalently attach, the two strands of the hybridization complex
  • systems of the invention may take on a large number of different configurations, as is generally depicted in Figures 3, 4, 5 and 6
  • ETMs see Figures 4A, 5A, 5B and 5D, this is generally useful for nucleic acid systems
  • systems in which label probes directly bind to the target analytes see Figures 4C and 4H for nucleic acid examples and Figures 6A, 6B, 6D and 6E, for examples of non-nucleic acid analytes
  • systems in which label probes are indirectly bound to the target sequences for example through the use of amplifier probes (see Figures 4C, 5E, 5F and 5G for nucleic acid examples and Figure 6C for representative non-nucleic acid target analytes)
  • the target sequence be immobilized on the electrode surface
  • capture probes and optionally one or more capture extender probes see Figure 3 for representative nucleic acid examples
  • capture extender probes may be used, that allow a "universal" surface, i e a surface containing a single type of capture probe that can be used to detect any target sequence
  • Capture extender probes are generally depicted in Figures 4C, 5C, 5E, 5G and 5H, as well as Figure 6B, etc , and have a first portion that will hybridize to all or part of the capture probe, and a second portion that will hybridize to a portion of the target sequence This then allows the generation of customized soluble probes, which as will be appreciated by those in the art is generally simpler and less costly As shown herein, two capture extender
  • the binding ligands are added after the formation of the SAM ((4) above) This may be done in a variety of ways, as will be appreciated by those m the art
  • conductive ohgomers with terminal functional groups are made, with preferred embodiments utilizing activated carboxylates and isothiocyanates, that will react with primary amines that are either present or put onto the binding hgand such as a nucleic acid, using an activated carboxylate
  • activated carboxylates that are either present or put onto the binding hgand such as a nucleic acid, using an activated carboxylate
  • the primary aromatic amines and secondary and tertiary amines of the bases should not react, thus allowing site specific addition of nucleic acids to the surface
  • Similar techniques can be used with non-nucleic acid components, for example, as outlined above, the attachment of proteins to SAMs composing metal chelates is known, see U S Patent No 5,620,850 This allows the spotting of probes (either capture
  • binding partner pairs can be utilized, i e one binding partner is attached to the terminus of the conductive ohgomer, and the other to the end of the nucleic acid This may also be done without using a nucleic acid capture probe, that is, one binding partner serves as the capture probe and the other is attached to either the target sequence or a capture extender probe That is, either the target sequence comprises the binding partner, or a capture extender probe that will hybridize to the target sequence comprises the binding partner Suitable binding partner pairs include, but are not limited to, hapten pairs such as biotin/streptavidm, antigens/antibodies, NTA/histidme tags, etc In general, smaller binding partners are preferred, such that the electrons can pass from the nucleic acid into the conductive ohgomer to allow detection
  • the binding partner when the target sequence itself is modified to contain a binding partner, the binding partner is attached via a modified nucleotide that can be enzymatically attached to the target sequence, for example during a PCR target amplification step Alternatively, the binding partner should be easily attached to the target sequence
  • a capture extender probe may be utilized that has a nucleic acid portion for hybridization to the target as well as a binding partner (for example, the capture extender probe may comprise a non-nucleic acid portion such as an alkyl linker that is used to attach a binding partner)
  • the capture extender probe may comprise a non-nucleic acid portion such as an alkyl linker that is used to attach a binding partner
  • the target is not bound to the electrode surface using capture probes
  • the assay complex (the recruitment linker) be in proximity to the surface
  • the assay complex may be present on beads that are added to the electrode composing the monolayer
  • the recruitment linkers comprising the ETMs may be placed in proximity to the conductive ohgomer surface using techniques well known in the art, including gravity settling of the beads on the surface, electrostatic or magnetic interactions between bead components and the surface, using binding partner attachment as outlined above
  • the assay complex may be driven down to the surface, for example via electrophoresis as is outlined herein
  • preferred embodiments utilize assay complexes attached via nucleic acid capture probes
  • the target sequence itself contains the ETMs
  • this may be done using target sequences that have ETMs incorporated at any number of positions, as outlined above
  • the 3'-5' ooeotation of the probes and targets is chosen to get the ETM-contaming structures (i e recruitment linkers or target sequences) as close to the surface of the monolayer as possible, and in the correct orientation This may be done using attachment via insulators or conductive ohgomers as is generally shown in the Figures
  • multiple capture probes can be utilized, either in a configuration such as depicted in Figure 5D, wherein the 5'-3' orientation of the capture probes is different, or where "loops" of target form when multiples of capture probes are used
  • the label probes directly hybridize to the target sequences, as is generally depicted in the figures
  • the target sequence is preferably, but not required to be, immobilized on the surface using capture probes, including capture extender probes
  • Label probes are then used to bong the ETMs into proximity of the surface of the monolayer composing conductive ohgomers
  • multiple label probes are used, that is, label probes are designed such that the portion that hybridizes to the target sequence can be different for a number of different label probes, such that amplification of the signal occurs, since multiple label probes can bind for every target sequence
  • n is an integer of at least one
  • n is from 1 to 50, with from about 1 to about 20 being particularly preferred, and from about 2 to about 5 being especially preferred.
  • label extender probes can be used as generally described below for use with amplifier probes
  • the configuration of the system and the label probes are designed to recruit the ETMs as close as possible to the monolayer surface
  • the label probes are hybridized to the target sequence indirectly That is, the present invention finds use in novel combinations of signal amplification technologies and electron transfer detection on electrodes, which may be particularly useful in sandwich hybridization assays, as generally depicted in the Figures for nucleic acid embodiments, similar systems can be developed for non-nucleic acid target analytes
  • the amplifier probes of the invention are bound to the target sequence in a sample either directly or indirectly Since the amplifier probes preferably contain a relatively large number of amplification sequences that are available for binding of label probes, the detectable signal is significantly increased, and allows the detection limits of the target to be significantly improved
  • These label and amplifier probes, and the detection methods described herein may be used in essentially any known nucleic acid hybridization formats, such as those in which the target is bound directly to a solid phase or in sandwich hybridization assays in which the target is bound to one or more nucleic acids that are in turn bound to the solid phase
  • an amplifier probe is hybridized to the target sequence, either directly (e g Figure 4C and 5E), or through the use of a label extender probe (e g Figure 5Fand 5G), which serves to allow "generic" amplifier probes to be made
  • the target sequence is preferably, but not required to be, immobilized on the electrode using capture probes
  • the amplifier probe contains a multiplicity of amplification sequences, although in some embodiments, as described below, the amplifier probe may contain only a single amplification sequence
  • the amplifier probe may take on a number of different forms, either a branched conformation, a dendomer conformation, or a linear "string" of amplification sequences These amplification sequences are used to form hybridization complexes with label probes, and the ETMs can be detected using the electrode
  • the present invention provides assay complexes composing at least one amplifier probe
  • amplifier probe or “nucleic acid multimer” or “amplification multimer” or grammatical equivalents herein is meant a nucleic acid probe that is used to facilitate signal amplification
  • Amplifier probes comprise at least a first single-stranded nucleic acid probe sequence, as defined below, and at least one single-stranded nucleic acid amplification sequence, with a multiplicity of amplification sequences being preferred
  • Amplifier probes comprise a first probe sequence that is used, either directly or indirectly, to hybridize to the target sequence That is, the amplifier probe itself may have a first probe sequence that is substantially complementary to the target sequence (e g Figure 5E), or it has a first probe sequence that is substantially complementary to a portion of an additional probe, in this case called a label extender probe, that has a first portion that is substantially complementary to the target sequence (e g
  • the first probe sequence of the amplifier probe is substantially complementary to the target sequence, as is generally depicted in Figure 5E
  • the first probe sequence is of a length sufficient to give specificity and stability
  • the probe sequences of the invention that are designed to hybridize to another nucleic acid are at least about 5 nucleosides long, with at least about 10 being preferred and at least about 15 being especially preferred
  • the amplifier probes may form hairpin stem-loop structures in the absence of their target
  • the length of the stem double-stranded sequence will be selected such that the hairpin structure is not favored in the presence of target
  • the use of these type of probes, in the systems of the invention or in any nucleic acid detection systems, can result in a significant decrease in non-specific binding and thus an increase in the signal to noise ratio
  • these hairpin structures comprise four components
  • the first component is a target binding sequence, i e a region complementary to the target (which may be the sample target sequence or another probe sequence to which binding is desired), that is about 10 nucleosides long, with about 15 being preferred
  • the second component is a loop sequence, that can facilitate the formation of nucleic acid loops Particularly preferred in this regard are repeats of GTC, which has been identified in Fragile X Syndrome as forming turns (When PNA analogs are used, turns composing prohne residues may be preferred) Generally, from three to five repeats are used, with four to five being preferred
  • the third component is a self-complementary region, which has a first portion that is complementary to a portion of the target sequence region and a second portion that comprises a first portion of the label probe binding sequence
  • the fourth component is substantially complementary to a label probe (or other probe, as the case may be)
  • the fourth component further comprises a "sticky end", that is, a portion that does not hybridize to any
  • the amplifier probe does not hybridize to the sample target sequence directly, but instead hybridizes to a first portion of a label extender probe, as is generally depicted in Figure 5F
  • a label extender probe As is generally depicted in Figure 5F
  • the first probe sequence of the amplifier probe is substantially complementary to a first portion or domain of a first label extender single-stranded nucleic acid probe
  • the label extender probe also contains a second portion or domain that is substantially complementary to a portion of the target sequence Both of these portions are preferably at least about 10 to about 50 nucleotides in length, with a range of about 15 to about 30 being preferred
  • the terms "first" and “second” are not meant to confer an orientation of the sequences with respect to the 5'-3' orientation of the target or probe sequences For example, assuming
  • more than one label extender probe-amplifier probe pair may be used, tht is, n is more than 1 That is, a plurality of label extender probes may be used, each with a portion that is substantially complementary to a different portion of the target sequence, this can serve as another level of amplification
  • a preferred embodiment utilizes pools of at least two label extender probes, with the upper limit being set by the length of the target sequence
  • more than one label extender probe is used with a single amplifier probe to reduce non-specific binding, as is depicted in Figure 5G and generally outlined in U S Patent No 5,681 ,697, incorporated by reference herein
  • a first portion of the first label extender probe hybridizes to a first portion of the target sequence
  • the second portion of the first label extender probe hybridizes to a first probe sequence of the amplifier probe
  • a first portion of the second label extender probe hybridizes to a second portion of the target sequence
  • the second portion of the second label extender probe hybridizes to a second probe sequence of the amplifier probe
  • the label extender probes may interact with a preamplifier probe, described below, rather than the amplifier probe directly
  • a preferred embodiment utilizes several different amplifier probes, each with first probe sequences that will hybridize to a different portion of the label extender probe
  • the different amplifier probes contain different amplification sequences, although this is generally not preferred
  • the amplifier probe also comprises at least one amplification sequence
  • An ' amplification sequence" or “amplification segment” or grammatical equivalents herein is meant a sequence that is used, either directly or indirectly, to bind to a first portion of a label probe as is more fully described below
  • the amplifier probe comprises a multiplicity of amplification sequences, with from about 3 to about 1000 being preferred, from about 10 to about 100 being particularly preferred, and about 50 being especially preferred In some cases, for example when linear amplifier probes are used, from 1 to about 20 is preferred with from about 5 to about 10 being particularly preferred
  • the amplification sequences may be linked to each other in a variety of ways, as will be appreciated by those in the art They may be covalently linked directly to each other, or to intervening sequences or chemical moieties, through nucleic acid linkages such as phosphodiester bonds, PNA bonds, etc , or through interposed linking agents such ammo acid, carbohydrate or polyol bridges, or through other cross-linking agents or binding partners
  • the s ⁇ te(s) of linkage may be at the ends of a segment, and/or at one or more internal nucleotides in the strand
  • the amplification sequences are attached via nucleic acid linkages
  • branched amplifier probes are used, as are generally described in U S Patent No 5,124,246, hereby incorporated by reference Branched amplifier probes may take on "fork-like” or “comb-like” conformations "Fork-like” branched amplifier probes generally have three or more oligonucleotide segments emanating from a point of origin to form a branched structure The point of origin may be another nucleotide segment or a multifunctional molecule to whcih at least three segments can be covalently or tightly bound "Comb-like" branched amplifier probes have a linear backbone with a multiplicity of sidecham ohgonucleotides extending from the backbone In either conformation, the pendant segments will normally depend from a modified nucleotide or other organic moiety having the appropriate functional groups for attachment of ohgonucleotides Furthermore, in either conformation, a large number of amplification sequences are available for binding, either directly or indirectly, to detection probes In general, these
  • dendomer amplifier probes are used, as are generally described in U S Patent No 5,175,270, hereby expressly incorporated by reference Dendrime ⁇ c amplifier probes have amplification sequences that are attached via hybridization, and thus have portions of double-stranded nucleic acid as a component of their structure The outer surface of the dendomer amplifier probe has a multiplicity of amplification sequences
  • linear amplifier probes are used, that have individual amplification sequences linked end-to-end either directly or with short intervening sequences to form a polymer
  • linear amplification probes may form hairpin stem-loop structures, as is depicted in Figure 12
  • the linear amplifier probe has a single amplification sequence This may be useful when cycles of hyb ⁇ dization/disassociation occurs, forming a pool of amplifier probe that was hybridized to the target and then removed to allow more probes to bind, or when large numbers of ETMs are used for each label probe
  • linear amplifier probes comprise a multiplicity of amplification sequences
  • the amplifier probe may be totally linear, totally branched, totally dendrimeoc, or aoy combination thereof
  • the amplification sequences of the amplifier probe are used, either directly or indirectly, to bind to a label probe to allow detection
  • the amplification sequences of the amplifier probe are substantially complementary to a first portion of a label probe
  • amplifier extender probes are used, that have a first portion that binds to the amplification sequence and a second portion that binds to the first portion of the label probe
  • compositions of the invention may include "preamplifier” molecules, which serves a bridging moiety between the label extender molecules and the amplifier probes In this way, more amplifier and thus more ETMs are ultimately bound to the detection probes
  • Preamplifier molecules may be either linear or branched, and typically contain in the range of about 30-3000 nucleotides
  • reaction may include a variety of other reagents may be included in the assays These include reagents like salts, buffers, neutral proteins, e g albumin, detergents, etc which may be used to facilitate optimal hybridization and detection, and/or reduce non-specific or background interactions Also reagents that otherwise improve the efficiency of the assay, such as protease inhibitors, nuclease inhibitors, anti-microbial agents, etc , may be used, depending on the sample preparation methods and purity of the target
  • the methods are as follows
  • the target is initially driven down to the vicinity of the detection probe using any one of the methods outlined above
  • two methods may be employed, the assay complexes as described below are formed first (i e all the soluble compooents are added together, either simultaneously or sequentially, including capture extender probes, label probes, amplification probes, label extender probes, etc ), including any hybridization accelerators, and then the complex is added to the surface for binding to a detection electrode
  • the target may be added, hybridization acceleration occurs to allow the target to bind the capture binding hgand and then additional components are added to form the assay complex
  • the target may be added, hybridization acceleration occurs to allow the target to bind the capture binding hgand and then additional components are added to form the assay complex
  • the target may be added, hybridization acceleration occurs to allow the target to bind the capture binding hgand and then additional components are added to form the assay complex
  • electrophoretic steps may be used to effect "washing" steps, wherein
  • non-specific interactions can be decreased using several electrophoretic methods
  • label probes that are not specifically directly or indirectly bound to a target sequence can be removed from the surface by a pulse of an opposite electric field, i e the electric field is reversed for some period of time The strength of the reverse electric field is chosen such that specifically bound label probes are not removed (or any of the other required components of the attachment and assay complexes)
  • the label probes or label binding ligands comprising the ETMs carry a charge opposite to the target aoalyte
  • the target analyte carries a large excess of charge, i e a negative charge in the case of nucleic acid
  • the binding of one or more positively charged label probes does not significantly change the net negative charge on the target complex, that is, the target will still be attracted to the cathode
  • un-bound label probes, or label probes not specifically bound to the target are repulsed, thus resulting in a decrease of non-specific binding
  • PNA backbones can be modified to carry a net positive charge, and there are other nucleic acid analogs as known in the art that are positively charged
  • the label probe is has a high amount of opposite charge, such that upon binding to the target analyte, the net charge of the target analyte changes
  • the label probes carry a sufficient positive charge to render the label probe-target analyte complex positively charged This results in the specific target analyte being drawn to the anode, but all other negatively charged elements, i e other nucleic acids, will be repulsed This is particularly useful when there is an excess of other targets present, for example, when the target analyte is a minor species of a large excess of other nucleic acids, for example
  • the target analyte is initially electrophoretically transported to the detection electrode, and then immobilized or attached to the detection electrode In one embodiment, this is done by forming an attachment complex (frequently referred to herein as a hybridization complex when nucleic acid components are used) between a capture probe and a portion of the target analyte
  • a preferred embodiment utilizes capture extender binding ligands (also called capture extender probes herein), in this embodiment, an attachment complex is formed between a portion of the target sequence and a first portion of a capture extender probe, and an additional attachment complex between a second portion of the capture extender probe and a portion of the capture probe Additional preferred embodiments utilize additional capture probes, thus forming an attachment complex between a portion of the target sequence and a first portion of a second capture extender probe, and an attachment complex between a second portion of the second capture extender probe and a second portion of the capture probe
  • the attachment of the target sequence to the electrode is done simultaneously with the other reactions
  • the amplifier probe comprises a first probe sequence that is substantially complementary to a portion of the target sequence, and at least one amplification sequence
  • the first probe sequence of the amplifier probe is hybridized to the target sequence, and any unhybodized amplifier probe is removed This will generally be done as is known in the art, and depends on the type of assay When the target sequence is immobilized on a surface such as an electrode, the removal of excess reagents generally is done via one or more washing steps, as will be appreciated by those in the art
  • the target may be immobilized on any solid support
  • the removal of excess reagents such as the probes of the invention may be done by adding beads (i e solid support particles) that contain complementary sequences to the probes, such that the excess probes bind to the beads The beads can then be removed, for example by centrifugation, filtration, the application of magnetic or electrostatic fields, etc
  • the reaction mixture is then subjected to conditions (temperature, high salt, changes in pH, etc ) under which the amplifier probe disassociates from the target sequence, and the amplifier probe is collected
  • the amplifier probe may then be added to an electrode composiog capture probes for the amplifier probes, label probes added, and detection is achieved
  • a larger pool of probe is generated by adding more amplifier probe to the target sequence and the hybodization/disassociation reactions are repeated, to generate a larger pool of amplifier probe. This pool of amplifier probe is then added to an electrode comprising amplifier capture probes, label probes added, and detection proceeds
  • the target sequence be immobilized on a solid support, including an electrode, using the methods described herein, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, alternate solid support attachment technologies may be used, such as attachment to glass, polymers, etc It is possible to do the reaction on one solid support and then add the pooled amplifier probe to an electrode for detection
  • the amplifier probe comprises a multiplicity of amplification sequences
  • the first probe sequence of the amplifier probe is hybridized to the target sequence, and any unhybodized amplifier probe is removed
  • preferred embodiments utilize immobilized target sequences, wherein the target sequences are immobilized by hybridization with capture probes that are attached to the electrode, or hybridization to capture extender probes that in turn hybridize with immobilized capture probes as is described herein
  • the capture probes and the detection probes are immobilized on the electrode, generally at the same "address"
  • the first probe sequence of the amplifier probe is hybridized to a first portion of at least one label extender probe, and a second portion of the label extender probe is hybridized to a portion of the target sequence
  • Other preferred embodiments utilize more than one label extender probe, as is generally shown in Figure 5G
  • the amplification sequences of the amplifier probe are used directly for detection, by hybridizing at least one label probe sequence
  • the invention thus provides assay complexes that minimally comprise a target sequence and a label probe
  • Assay complex herein is meant the collection of attachment or hybridization complexes comprising analytes, including binding ligands and targets, that allows detection
  • the composition of the assay complex depends on the use of the different probe component outlined herein
  • the assay complex comprises the capture probe and the target sequence
  • the assay complexes may also include capture extender probes, label extender probes, and amplifier probes, as outlined herein, depending on the configuration used
  • the assays are generally run under stringency conditions which allows formation of the label probe attachment complex only in the presence of target Stoogency can be controlled by altering a step parameter that is a thermodynamic variable, including, but not limited to, temperature, formamide concentration, salt concentration, chaotropic salt concentration pH, organic solvent concentration, etc
  • Stringency may also include the use of an electrophoretic step to dove non-specific (i e low stringency) materials away from the detection electrode
  • a preferred method is as follows Single-stranded target sequence is incubated under hybridization conditions with the capture extender probes and the label extender probes A preferred embodiment does this reaction in the presence of the electrode with immobilized capture probes, although this may also be done in two steps, with the initial incubation and the subsequent addition to the electrode Excess reagents are washed off, and amplifier probes are then added If preamplifier probes are used, they may be added either poor to the amplifier probes or simultaneously with the amplifier probes Excess reagents are washed off, and label probes are then added Excess reagents are washed off, and detection proceeds as outlined below
  • a number of capture probes that are each substantially complementary to a different portion of the target sequence are used
  • the system when amplifier probes are used, the system is generally configured such that upon label probe binding, the recruitment linkers composing the ETMs are placed in proximity either to the monolayer surface containing conductive ohgomers (mechan ⁇ sm-2) or in proximity to detection probes
  • mechan ⁇ sm-2 when the ETMs are attached via
  • the length of the linkers from the nucleic acid point of attachment to the ETMs may vary, particularly with the length of the capture probe when capture extender probes are used That is, longer capture probes, with capture extenders, can result in the target sequences being "held” further away from the surface than for shorter capture probes Adding extra linking sequences between the probe nucleic acid and the ETMs can result in the ETMs being spatially closer to the surface, giving better results Similarly, for mechan ⁇ sm-1 systems, the length of the recruitment linker, the length of the detection probe, and their distance, may be optimized
  • nucleic acids utilized in the invention may also be ligated together poor to detection, if applicable, by using standard molecular biology techniques such as the use of a ligase
  • cross-linking agents may be added to hold the structures stable
  • nucleic acids As will be appreciated by those in the art, while described for nucleic acids, the systems outlined herein can be used for other target analytes as well
  • compositions of the invention are generally synthesized as outlined below and in U S S N s 08/743,798, 08/873,978, 08/911,085, 08/911,085, and PCT US97/20014, all of which are expressly incorporated by reference, generally utilizing techniques well known in the art As will be appreciated by those in the art, many of the techniques outlined below are directed to nucleic acids containing a ribose-phosphate backbone However, as outlined above, many alternate nucleic acid analogs may be utilized, some of which may not contain either ribose or phosphate in the backbone In these embodiments, for attachment at positions other than the base, attachment is done as will be appreciated by those in the art, depending on the backbone Thus, for example, attachment can be made at the carbon atoms of the PNA backbone, as is described below, or at either terminus of the PNA
  • the compositions may be made in several ways A preferred method first synthesizes a conductive ohgomer attached to a nucleo
  • compositions of the invention are made by first forming the conductive ohgomer covalently attached to the nucleoside, followed by the addition of additional nucleosides to form a capture probe nucleic acid, with the last step comprising the addition of the conductive ohgomer to the electrode
  • the attachment of the conductive ohgomer to the nucleoside may be done in several ways In a preferred embodiment, all or part of the conductive ohgomer is synthesized first (generally with a functional group on the end for attachment to the electrode), which is then attached to the nucleoside Additional nucleosides are then added as required, with the last step generally being attachment to the electrode Alternatively, ohgomer units are added one at a time to the nucleoside, with addition of additional nucleosides and attachment to the electrode A number of representative syntheses are shown in the Figures of WO 98/20162, PCT/US98/12430, PCT/US98/12082, PCT/US99/01705, PCT/US99/01703, and U S S N s 09/135,183, 60/105,875, and 09/295,691 , all of which are incorporated by reference
  • the conductive ohgomer is then attached to a nucleoside that may contain one (or more) of the ohgomer units, attached as depicted herein
  • attachment is to a ribose of the ribose-phosphate backbooe, including amide and amme linkages
  • attachment is via a phosphate of the ribose-phosphate backbone, as generally outlined
  • attachment is via the base
  • protecting groups may be added to the base poor to addition of the conductive ohgomers, as is generally known in the art
  • the palladium cross-coupling reactions may be altered to prevent dime ⁇ zation problems, i e two conductive ohgomers dimerizmg, rather than coupling to the base
  • attachment to the base may be done by making the nucleoside with one unit of the ohgomer, followed by the addition of others
  • modified nucleosides Once the modified nucleosides are prepared, protected and activated, poor to attachment to the electrode, they may be incorporated into a growing oligonucleotide by standard synthetic techniques (Gait, Oligonucleotide Synthesis A Practical Approach, IRL Press, Oxford, UK 1984, Eckstein) in several ways
  • one or more modified nucleosides are converted to the tophosphate form and incorporated into a growing oligonucleotide chain by using standard molecular biology techniques such as with the use of the enzyme DNA polymerase I, T4 DNA polymerase, T7 DNA polymerase, Taq DNA polymerase, reverse transcriptase, and RNA polymerases
  • DNA polymerase I DNA polymerase I
  • T4 DNA polymerase T4 DNA polymerase
  • T7 DNA polymerase T7 DNA polymerase
  • Taq DNA polymerase reverse transcriptase
  • RNA polymerases RNA polymerases
  • terminal deoxynucleotidyltransferase may be used (Rathff, Terminal deoxynucleotidyltransferase In The Enzymes, Vol 14A P D Boyer ed pp 105-118 Academic Press, San Diego, CA 1981)
  • the present invention provides deoxyobonucleoside tophosphates comprising
  • a target sequence can hybridize to a capture probe (for example on the surface) in such a way that the terminus of the target sequence is exposed, i e unhybodized
  • a capture probe for example on the surface
  • enzyme and t ⁇ phosphate nucleotides labelled with ETMs allows the in situ creation of the label
  • using labeled nucleotides recognized by polymerases can allow simultaneous PCR and detection, that is, the target sequences are generated in situ
  • the modified nucleoside is converted to the phosphoramidite or H- phosphonate form, which are then used in solid-phase or solution syntheses of ohgonucleotides
  • the modified nucleoside either for attachment at the ribose (i e ammo- or thiol-modified nucleosides) or the base, is incorporated into the oligonucleotide at either an internal position or the 5' terminus
  • DMT 4',4-d ⁇ methoxytotyl
  • a preferred method utilizes the attachment of the modified nucleoside (or the nucleoside replacement) to controlled pore glass (CPG) or other ohgomeric supports
  • CPG controlled pore glass
  • the modified nucleoside is protected at the 5' end with DMT, and then reacted with succinic anhydride with activation
  • the resulting succmyl compound is attached to CPG or other ohgomeric supports as is known in the art
  • Further phosphoramidite nucleosides are added, either modified or not, to the 5' end after deprotection
  • the present invention provides conductive ohgomers or insulators covalently attached to nucleosides attached to solid ohgomeric supports such as CPG, and phosphoramidite derivatives of the nucleosides of the invention
  • the invention further provides methods of making label probes with recruitment linkers composing ETMs These synthetic reactions will depend on the character of the recruitment linker and the method of attachment of the ETM, as will be appreciated by those in the art
  • the label probes are generally made as outlined herein with the incorporation of ETMs at one or more positions
  • a transition metal complex is used as the ETM
  • synthesis may occur in several ways
  • the hgand(s) are added to a nucleoside, followed by the transition metal ion, and then the nucleoside with the transition metal complex attached is added to an oligonucleotide, i e by addition to the nucleic acid synthesizer
  • the hgand(s) may be attached, followed by incorportation into a growing oligonucleotide chain, followed by the addition of the metal ion
  • ETMs are attached to a ribose of the ribose-phosphate backbone This is generally done as is outlined herein for conductive ohgomers, as described herein, and in PCT publication WO 95/15971 , using ammo-modified or oxo-modified nucleosides, at either the 2' or 3' position of the ribose
  • the amino group may then be used either as a hgand, for example as a transition metal hgand for attachment of the metal ion, or as a chemically functional group that can be used for attachment of other ligands or organic ETMs, for example via amide linkages, as will be appreciated by those in the art
  • the examples describe the synthesis of nucleosides with a variety of ETMs attached via the ribose
  • ETMs are attached to a phosphate of the ribose-phosphate backbone As outlined herein, this may be done using phosphodiester analogs such as phosphoramidite bonds, see generally PCT publication WO 95/15971 , or can be done in a similar manner to that described in PCT US97/20014, where the conductive ohgomer is replaced by a transition metal hgand or complex or an organic ETM
  • ETMs are attached to a base of the nucleoside
  • ammo groups of the base either naturally occuroog or added as is described herein (see the fngures, for example), are used either as ligands for transition metal complexes or as a chemically functional group that can be used to add other ligands, for example via an amide linkage, or organic ETMs
  • nucleosides containing halogen atoms attached to the heterocychc nog are commercially available Acetylene linked ligands may be added using the halogenated bases, as is generally known, see for example, Tzahs et al Tetrahedron Lett 36(34) 6017-6020 (1995), Tzahs et al ,
  • the nucleosides are made with transition metal ligands, incorporated into a nucleic acid, and then the transition metal ion and any remaining necessary ligands are added as is known in the art In an alternative embodiment, the transition metal ion and additional ligands are added prior to incorporation into the nucleic acid
  • the attachment linker is attached to the electrode
  • the method will vary depending on the type of electrode used As is described herem, the attachment linkers are generally made with a terminal "A" linker to facilitate attachment to the electrode
  • a sulfur-gold attachment is considered a covalent attachment
  • conductive ohgomers, insulators, and attachment linkers are covalently attached via sulfur linkages to the electrode
  • traditional protecting groups for use of attaching molecules to gold electrodes are generally not ideal for use in both synthesis of the compositions described herein and inclusion in oligonucleotide synthetic reactions
  • the present invention provides novel methods for the attachment of conductive ohgomers to gold electrodes, utilizing unusual protecting groups, including ethylpyodine, and tnmethylsilylethyl as is depicted in the Figures
  • unusual protecting groups including ethylpyodine, and tnmethylsilylethyl
  • traditional protecting groups such as acetyl groups and others may be used See Greene et al , supra
  • the subunit of the conductive ohgomer which contains the sulfur atom for attachment to the electrode is protected with an ethyl-pyridme or tnmethylsilylethyl group
  • this is generally done by contacting the subunit containing the sulfur atom (preferably in the form of a sulfhydryl) with a vinyl pyridme group or vinyl tnmethylsilylethyl group under conditions whereby an ethylpyodine group or tnmethylsilylethyl group is added to the sulfur atom
  • This subunit also generally contains a functional moiety for attachment of additional subunits, and thus additional subunits are attached to form the conductive ohgomer
  • the conductive ohgomer is then attached to a nucleoside, and additional nucleosides attached
  • the protecting group is then removed and the sulfur-gold covalent attachment is made Alternatively, all or part of the conductive ohgomer is made, and then either a subunit containing a protected sulfur atom is added, or a sulfur atom is added and then protected
  • the conductive ohgomer is then attached to a nucleoside, and additional nucleosides attached Alternatively, the conductive ohgomer attached to a nucleic acid is made, and then either a subunit containing a protected sulfur atom is added, or a sulfur atom is added and then protected
  • the ethyl pyridme protecting group may be used as above, but removed after one or more steps and replaced with a standard protecting group like a disulfide
  • subunit of a conductive polymer herein is meant at least the moiety of the conductive ohgomer to which the sulfur atom is attached, although additional atoms may be present, including either functional groups which allow the addition of additional components of the conductive ohgomer, or additional components of the conductive ohgomer
  • a subunit comprises at least the first Y group
  • a preferred method comprises 1 ) adding an ethyl pyridme or tnmethylsilylethyl protecting group to a sulfur atom attached to a first subunit of a conductive ohgomer, generally done by adding a vinyl pyridme or tnmethylsilylethyl group to a sulfhydryl, 2) adding additional subunits to form the conductive ohgomer, 3) adding at least a first nucleoside to the conductive ohgomer, 4) adding additional nucleosides to the first nucleoside to form a nucleic acid, 5) attaching the conductive ohgomer to the gold electrode This may also be done in the absence of nucleosides as is described in the Examples
  • the above method may also be used to attach insulator molecules to a gold electrode
  • a monolayer composing conductive ohgomers is added to the electrode
  • the chemistry of addition is similar to or the same as the addition of conductive ohgomers to the electrode, i e using a sulfur atom for attachment to a gold electrode, etc
  • Compositions comprising monolayers in addition to the conductive ohgomers covalently attached to nucleic acids may be made in at least one of five ways (1) addition of the monolayer, followed by subsequent addition of the attachment linker-nucleic acid complex, (2) addition of theattachment linker-nucleic acid complex followed by addition of the monolayer, (3) simultaneous addition of the monolayer and attachment linker-nucleic acid complex, (4) formation of a monolayer (using any of 1 , 2 or 3) which includes attachment linkers which terminate in a functional moiety suitable for attachment of a completed nucleic acid, or (5) formation of a monolayer which includes attachment linkers which terminate in a functional moiety suitable for nucleic
  • the nucleic acid is a peptide nucleic acid or analog
  • the invention provides peptide nucleic acids with at least one covalently attached ETM or attachment linker
  • these moieties are covalently attached to an monomeric subunit of the PNA
  • “monomeric subunit of PNA” herein is meant the -NH-CH 2 CH 2 -N(COCH 2 -Base)-CH 2 -CO- monomer, or derivatives (herein included within the definition of "nucleoside") of PNA
  • the number of carbon atoms in the PNA backbone may be altered, see generally Nielsen et al , Chem Soc Rev 1997 page 73, which discloses a number of PNA derivatives, herein expressly incorporated by reference
  • the amide bond linking the base to the backbone may be altered, phosphoramide and sulfuramide bonds may be used Alternatively, the moieties are attached to an internal monomeric subunit.
  • the moieties can be attached either to a base or to the backbone of the monomeric subuoit Attachment to the base is done as outlined herein or known in the literature
  • the moieties are added to a base which is then incorporated into a PNA as outlined herein
  • the base may be either protected, as required for incorporation into the PNA synthetic reaction, or denvatized, to allow incorporation, either poor to the addition of the chemical substituent or afterwards Protection and denvatization of the bases is shown in PCT US97/20014
  • the bases can then be incorporated into monomeric subunits
  • the moieties are covalently attached to the backbone of the PNA monomer
  • the attachment is generally to one of the unsubstituted carbon atoms of the monomeric subunit, preferably the ⁇ -carbon of the backbone, although attachment at either of the carbon 1 or 2 positions, or the ⁇ -carbon of the amide bond linking the base to the backbone may be done
  • moieties are added at the ⁇ -carbon atoms, either to a terminal monomeric subunit or an internal one
  • a modified monomeric subunit is synthesized with an ETM or an attachment linker, or a functional group for its attachment, and then the base is added and the modified monomer can be incorporated into a growing PNA chain
  • compositions of the invention may additionally contain one or more labels at any position
  • label herein is meant an element (e g an isotope) or chemical compound that is attached to enable the detection of the compound
  • Preferred labels are radioactive isotopic labels, and colored or fluorescent dyes
  • the labels may be incorporated into the compound at any position
  • the compositions of the invention may also contain other moieties such as cross-linking agents to facilitate cross-linking of the target-probe complex See for example, Lukhtanov et al , Nucl Acids Res 24(4) 683 (1996) and Tabone et al , Biochem 33 375 (1994), both of which are expressly incorporated by reference
  • compositions find use in a number of applications, as described herein
  • the compositions of the invention find use in binding assays for the detection of target analytes, in particular nucleic acid target sequences
  • electrodes can be made that have a single species of binding ligand, or multiple binding hgand species, i e in an array format
  • a solid support such as an electrode
  • oligonucleotide arrays are well known in the art
  • techniques are known for "addressing" locations within an electrode and for the surface modification of electrodes
  • arrays of different binding ligands, including nucleic acids are laid down on the electrode, each of which are covalently attached to the electrode via an attachment linker
  • the number of different binding ligands may vary widely, from one to thousands, with from about 4 to about 100,000 being preferred, and from about 10 to about 10,000 being particularly preferred
  • detection proceeds with electronic initiation Without being limited by the mechanism or theory, detection is based on the transfer of electrons from the ETM to the electrode, including via the
  • Detection of electron transfer, i e the presence of the ETMs is generally initiated electronically, with voltage being preferred
  • a potential is applied to the assay complex Precise control and variations in the applied potential can be via a potentiostat and either a three electrode system (one reference, one sample (or working) and one counter electrode) or a two electrode system (one sample and one counter electrode)
  • a potentiostat and either a three electrode system (one reference, one sample (or working) and one counter electrode) or a two electrode system (one sample and one counter electrode)
  • This allows matching of applied potential to peak potential of the system which depends in part on the choice of ETMs and in part on the conductive ohgomer used, the composition and integrity of the monolayer, and what type of reference electrode is used
  • ferrocene is a preferred ETM
  • a co-reductant or co-oxidant (collectively, co-redoxant) is used, as an additional electron source or sink
  • co-redoxant is used, as an additional electron source or sink
  • an input electron source in solution is used in the initiation of electron transfer, preferably when initiation and detection are being done using DC current or at AC frequencies where diffusion is not limiting
  • preferred embodiments utilize monolayers that contain a minimum of "holes", such that short-circuiting of the system is avoided This may be done in several general ways
  • an input electron source is used that has a lower or similar redox potential than the ETM of the label probe
  • both the ETM and the input electron source are oxidized and can thus donate electrons, the ETM donates an electron to the electrode and the input source donates to the ETM
  • ferrocene as a ETM attached to the compositions of the invention as described in the examples, has a redox potential of roughly 200 mV in aqueous solution (which can change significantly depending on what the ferrocene is bound to, the manner of the linkage and
  • an input electron source is used that has a higher redox potential than the ETM of the label probe
  • luminol an electron source
  • the ferrocene is oxided, and transfers a single electron to the electrode via the conductive ohgomer
  • the ETM is unable to accept any electrons from the luminol electron source, since the voltage
  • Luminol has the added benefit of becoming a chemiiuminiscent species upon oxidation (see Jirka et al , Analytica Chimica Acta 284 345 (1993)), thus allowing photo-detection of electron transfer from the ETM to the electrode
  • luminol can only be oxidized by transferring an electron to the ETM on the label probe
  • the ETM is not present, i e when the target sequence is not hybridized to the composition of the invention, luminol is not significantly oxidized, resulting in a low photon emission and thus a low (if any) signal from the luminol In the presence of the target, a much larger signal is generated
  • the measure of luminol oxidation by photon emission is an indirect measurement of the ability of the ETM to donate electrons to the electrode
  • photon detection is generally
  • Suitable electron source molecules are well known in the art, and include, but are not limited to, femcyanide, and luminol
  • ETM such as a metallocene receiving an electron from the electrode, converting it to the metalhcenium, with the output electron acceptor then accepting the electron rapidly and repeatedly
  • cobalticenium is the preferred ETM
  • the presence of the ETMs at the surface of the monolayer can be detected in a variety of ways
  • a variety of detection methods may be used, including, but not limited to, optical detection (as a result of spectral changes upon changes in redox states), which includes fluorescence, phosphorescence, luminiscence, chemiluminescence, electrochemiluminescence, and refractive index, and electronic detection, including, but not limited to, amperommetry, voltammetry, capacitance and impedence
  • optical detection as a result of spectral changes upon changes in redox states
  • electronic detection including, but not limited to, amperommetry, voltammetry, capacitance and impedence
  • These methods include time or frequency dependent methods based on AC or DC currents, pulsed methods, lock-in techniques, filtering (high pass, low pass, band pass), and time-resolved techniques including time-resolved fluorescence
  • the efficient transfer of electrons from the ETM to the electrode results in stereotyped changes in the redox state of the ETM
  • ETMs including the complexes of ruthenium containing bipyodine, pyridme and imidazole rings
  • these changes in redox state are associated with changes in spectral properties
  • Significant differences in absorbance are observed between reduced and oxidized states for these molecules See for example Fabbozzi et al , Chem
  • possible electron donors and acceptors include all the derivatives listed above for photoactivation or initiation Preferred electron donors and acceptors have characteristically large spectral changes upon oxidation and reduction resulting in highly sensitive monitoring of electron transfer Such examples include Ru(NH 3 ) 4 py and Ru(bpy) 2 ⁇ m as preferred examples It should be understood that only the donor or acceptor that is being monitored by absorbance need have ideal spectral characteristics
  • the electron transfer is detected fluoromet ⁇ cally Numerous transition metal complexes, including those of ruthenium, have distinct fluorescence properties Therefore, the change in redox state of the electron donors and electron acceptors attached to the nucleic acid can be monitored very sensitively using fluorescence, for example with Ru(4,7-b ⁇ phenyl 2 -phenanthrohne) 3 2+
  • fluorescence for example with Ru(4,7-b ⁇ phenyl 2 -phenanthrohne) 3 2+
  • the production of this compound can be easily measured using standard fluorescence assay techniques For example, laser induced fluorescence can be recorded in a standard single cell fluorimeter, a flow through "on-line” fluoometer (such as those attached to a chromatography system) or a multi-sample "plate-reader” similar to those marketed for 96-well immuno assays
  • fluorescence can be measured using fiber optic sensors with nucleic acid probes in solution or attached to the fiber optic Fluorescence is monitored using a photomultiplier tube or other light detection instrument attached to the fiber optic The advantage of this system is the extremely small volumes of sample that can be assayed
  • scanning fluorescence detectors such as the Fluorlmager sold by Molecular Dynamics are ideally suited to monitoring the fluorescence of modified nucleic acid molecules arrayed on solid surfaces
  • Fluorlmager sold by Molecular Dynamics
  • transition metal complexes display fluorescence with large Stokes shifts
  • Suitable examples include bis- and tnsphenanthrolme complexes and bis- and tosbipyodyl complexes of transition metals such as ruthenium (see Juris, A , Balzani, V , et al Coord Chem Rev , V 84, p 85-277, 1988)
  • Preferred examples display efficient fluorescence (reasonably high quantum yields) as well as low reorganization energies These include Ru(4,7-b ⁇ phenyl 2 -phenanthrohne) 3 2+ , Ru(4,4'-d ⁇ phenyl-2,2'- b ⁇ pyod ⁇ ne) 3 2+ and platinum complexes (see Cummmgs et al , J Am Chem Soc 118 1949-1960 (1996), incorporated by reference) Alternatively, a reduction in fluorescence associated with hybridization can be measured using these systems
  • electrochemiluminescence is used as the basis of the electron transfer detection
  • ETMs such as Ru 2+ (bpy) 3
  • direct luminescence accompanies excited state decay Changes in this property are associated with nucleic acid hybodizatioo and can be monitored with a simple photomultiplier tube arrangement (see Blackburn, G F Clin Chem 37 1534-1539 (1991), and Juris et al , supra
  • electronic detection is used, including amperommetry, voltammetry, capacitance, and impedence
  • Suitable techniques include, but are not limited to, electrogravimetry, coulometry (including controlled potential coulometry and constant current coulometry), voltametry (cyclic voltametry, pulse voltametry (normal pulse voltametry, square wave voltametry, differential pulse voltametry, Osteryoung square wave voltametry, and coulostatic pulse techniques), stopping analysis (aniodic stripping analysis, cathiodic stripping analysis, square wave stopping voltammetry), conductance measurements (electrolytic conductance, direct analysis), time-dependent electrochemical analyses (chronoamperometry, chronopotentiometry, cyclic chronopotentiometry and amperometry, AC polography, chronogalvametry, and chronocoulometry), AC impedance measurement, capacitance measurement, AC voltametry, and photoelectrochemistry
  • monitoring electron transfer is via amperometoc detection
  • This method of detection involves applying a potential (as compared to a separate reference electrode) between the nucleic acid-conjugated electrode and a reference (counter) electrode in the sample containing target genes of interest Electron transfer of differing efficiencies is induced in samples in the presence or absence of target nucleic acid, that is, the presence or absence of the target nucleic acid, and thus the label probe, can result in different currents
  • the device for measuring electron transfer amperomet ⁇ cally involves sensitive current detection and includes a means of controlling the voltage potential, usually a potentiostat This voltage is optimized with reference to the potential of the electron donating complex on the label probe Possible electron donating complexes include those previously mentioned with complexes of iron, osmium, platinum, cobalt, rhenium and ruthenium being preferred and complexes of iron being most preferred
  • potentiomet ⁇ c or voltammet ⁇ c measurements involve non-faradaic (no net current flow) processes and are utilized traditionally in pH and other ion detectors Similar sensors are used to monitor electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode.
  • other properties of insulators such as resistance
  • conductors such as conductivity, impedance and capicitance
  • any system that generates a current also generates a small magnetic field, which may be monitored in some embodiments
  • one benefit of the fast rates of electron transfer observed in the compositions of the invention is that time resolution can greatly enhance the signal-to-noise results of monitors based on absorbance, fluorescence and electronic current
  • the fast rates of electron transfer of the present invention result both in high signals and stereotyped delays between electron transfer initiation and completion
  • amplifying signals of particular delays such as through the use of pulsed initiation of electron transfer and "lock-in" amplifiers of detection, and Fourier transforms
  • ETMs alternating current
  • ETMs bound to an electrode
  • traditional electrochemical theory such as exemplified in Laviron et al , J Electroanal Chem 97 135 (1979) and Laviron et al , J Electroanal Chem 105 35 (1979), both of which are incorporated by reference, do not accurately model the systems described herein, except for very small E AC (less than 10 mV) and relatively large numbers of molecules That is, the AC current (I) is not accurately described by Laviron's equation This may be due in part to the fact that this theory assumes an unlimited source and sink of electrons, which is not true in the present systems
  • Equation 1 Equation 1
  • Equation 1 n is the number of electrons oxidized or reduced per redox molecule, f is the applied frequency, F is Faraday's constant, N tota , is the total number of redox molecules, E 0 is the formal potential of the redox molecule, R is the gas constant, T is the temperature in degrees Kelvin, and E DC is the electrode potential.
  • the faradaic current can also be expressed as a function of time, as shown in Equation 2 Equation 2
  • ⁇ ,( t) g °- ⁇ F - dV( t)
  • Equation 1 does not incorporate the effect of electron transfer rate nor of instrument factors Electron transfer rate is important when the rate is close to or lower than the applied frequency
  • Equation 3 the true ⁇ AC should be a function of all three, as depicted in Equation 3
  • non-specifically bound label probes/ETMs show differences in impedance (i e higher impedances) than when the label probes containing the ETMs are specifically bound in the correct orientation
  • the non-specifically bound material is washed away, resulting in an effective impedance of infinity
  • AC detection gives several advantages as is generally discussed below, including an increase in sensitivity, and the ability to "filter out" background noise
  • changes in impedance including, for example, bulk impedance
  • frequency response when using AC initiation and detection methods, the frequency response of the system changes as a result of the presence of the ETM
  • frequency response herein is meant a modification of signals as a result of electron transfer between the electrode and the ETM This modification is different depending on signal frequency
  • a frequency response includes AC currents at one or more frequencies, phase shifts, DC offset voltages, faradaic impedance, etc
  • a first input electrical signal is then applied to the system, preferably via at least the sample electrode (containing the complexes of the invention) and the counter electrode, to initiate electron transfer between the electrode and the ETM Three electrode systems may also be used, with the voltage applied to the reference and working electrodes
  • the first input signal comprises at least an AC component
  • the AC component may be of variable amplitude and frequency Generally, for use in the present methods, the AC amplitude ranges from about 1 mV to about 1 1 V, with from about 10 mV to about 800 mV being preferred, and from about 10 mV to about 500 mV being especially preferred
  • the AC frequency ranges from about 0 01 Hz to about 100 MHz, with from about 10 Hz to about 10 MHz being preferred, and from about 100 Hz to about 20 MHz being especially preferred
  • the first input signal comprises a DC compooeot aod ao AC component That is, a DC offset voltage between the sample and counter electrodes is swept through the electrochemical potential of the ETM (for example, when ferrocene is used, the sweep is generally from 0 to 500 mV) (or alternatively, the working electrode is grounded and the reference electrode is swept from 0 to -500 mV) The sweep is used to identify the DC voltage at which the maximum response of the system is seen This is generally at or about the electrochemical potential of the ETM Once this voltage is determined, either a sweep or one or more uniform DC offset voltages may be used DC offset voltages of from about -1 V to about +1 1 V are preferred, with from about -500 mV to about +800 mV being especially preferred, and from about -300 mV to about 500 mV being particularly preferred In a preferred embodiment, the DC offset voltage is not zero On top of the DC offset voltage, an AC signal component of variable amplitude and frequency is
  • DC offset voltages are used, although as outlined above, DC voltage sweeps are preferred This may be done at a single frequency, or at two or more frequencies
  • the AC amplitude is varied Without being bound by theory, it appears that increasing the amplitude increases the driving force Thus, higher amplitudes, which result in higher overpotentials give faster rates of electron transfer Thus, generally, the same system gives an improved response (i e higher output signals) at any single frequency through the use of higher overpotentials at that frequency Thus, the amplitude may be increased at high frequencies to increase the rate of electron transfer through the system, resulting in greater sensitivity In addition, this may be used, for example, to induce responses in slower systems such as those that do not possess optimal spacing configurations
  • measurements of the system are taken at at least two separate amplitudes or overpotentials, with measurements at a plurality of amplitudes being preferred.
  • changes in response as a result of changes in amplitude may form the basis of identification, calibration and quantification of the system
  • one or more AC frequencies can be used as well
  • the AC frequency is varied At different frequencies, different molecules respond in different ways As will be appreciated by those in the art, increasing the frequency generally increases the output current However, when the frequency is greater than the rate at which electrons may travel between the electrode and the ETM, higher frequencies result in a loss or decrease of output signal At some point, the frequency will be greater than the rate of electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode, and then the output signal will also drop
  • detection utilizes a single measurement of output signal at a single frequency That is, the frequency response of the system in the absence of target sequence, and thus the absence of label probe containing ETMs, can be previously determined to be very low at a particular high frequency Using this information, any response at a particular frequency, will show the presence of the assay complex That is, any response at a particular frequency is characteristic of the assay complex Thus, it may only be necessary to use a single input high frequency, and any changes in frequency response is an indication that the ETM is present, and thus that the target sequence is present
  • measurements of the system are taken at at least two separate frequencies, with measurements at a plurality of frequencies being preferred
  • a plurality of frequencies includes a scan For example, measuring the output signal, e g , the AC current, at a low input frequency such as 1 - 20 Hz, and comparing the response to the output signal at high frequency such as 10 - 100 kHz will show a frequency response difference between the presence and absence of the ETM
  • the frequency response is determined at at least two, preferably at least about five, and more preferably at least about ten frequencies
  • an output signal After transmitting the input signal to initiate electron transfer, an output signal is received or detected
  • the presence and magnitude of the output signal will depend on a number of factors, including the overpotential/amphtude of the input signal, the frequency of the input AC signal, the composition of the intervening medium, the DC offset, the environment of the system, the nature of the ETM, the solvent, and the type and concentration of salt
  • the presence and magnitude of the output signal will depend in general on the presence or absence of the ETM, the placement and distance of the ETM from the surface of the monolayer and the character of the input signal
  • the output signal comprises an AC current
  • the magnitude of the output current will depend on a number of parameters By varying these parameters, the system may be optimized in a number of ways
  • AC currents generated in the present invention range from about 1 femptoamp to about 1 milhamp, with currents from about 50 femptoamps to about 100 microamps being preferred, and from about 1 picoamp to about 1 microamp being especially preferred
  • the output signal is phase shifted in the AC component relative to the input signal
  • the systems of the present invention may be sufficiently uniform to allow phase-shifting based detection That is, the complex biomolecules of the invention through which electron transfer occurs react to the AC input in a homogeneous manner, similar to standard electronic components, such that a phase shift can be determined This may serve as the basis of detection between the presence and absence of the ETM, and/or differences between the presence of target-specific assay complexes comprising label probes and non-specific binding of the label probes to the system components
  • the output signal is characteristic of the presence of the ETM, that is, the output sigoal is characteristic of the presence of the target-specific assay complex comprising label probes and ETMs
  • the basis of the detection is a difference in the faradaic impedance of the system as a result of the formation of the assay complex Faradaic impedance is the impedance of the system between the electrode and the ETM Faradaic impedance is quite different from the bulk or dielectric impedance, which is the impedance of the bulk solution between the electrodes Many factors may change the faradaic impedance which may not effect the bulk impedance, and vice versa
  • the assay complexes composiog the nucleic acids in this system have a certain faradaic impedance, that will depend on the distance between the ETM and the electrode, their electronic properties, and the composition of the intervening medium, among other things Of importance in the methods of the invention is that the faradaic impedance between the ETM and the electrode is signficantly
  • the present invention further provides electronic devices or apparatus for the detection of analytes using the compositions of the invention
  • the apparatus includes a test chamber for receiving a sample solution which has at least a first measuring or sample electrode, and a second measuring or counter electrode Three electrode systems are also useful
  • the first and second measuring electrodes are in contact with a test sample receiving region, such that in the presence of a liquid test sample, the two electrophoresis electrodes may be in electrical contact
  • the apparatus also includes detection electrodes composing a single stranded nucleic acid capture probe covalently attached via an attachment linker, and a monolayer comprising conductive ohgomers, such as are described herein
  • the apparatus further comprises an AC voltage source electrically connected to the test chamber, that is, to the measuring electrodes
  • the AC voltage source is capable of delivering DC offset voltage as well
  • the apparatus further comprises a processor capable of comparing the input signal and the output signal
  • the processor is coupled to the electrodes and configured to receive an output signal, and thus detect the presence of the target nucleic acid
  • compositions of the present invention may be used in a variety of research, clinical, quality control, or field testing settings
  • the probes are used in genetic diagnosis
  • probes can be made using the techniques disclosed herein to detect target sequences such as the gene for nonpolyposis colon cancer, the BRCA1 breast cancer gene, P53, which is a gene associated with a variety of cancers, the Apo E4 gene that indicates a greater risk of Alzheimer's disease, allowing for easy presymptomafic screening of patients, mutations in the cystic fibrosis gene, or any of the others well known in the art
  • viral and bacterial detection is done using the complexes of the invention
  • probes are designed to detect target sequences from a variety of bacteria and viruses
  • current blood-screening techniques rely on the detection of anti-
  • HIV antibodies The methods disclosed herein allow for direct screening of clinical samples to detect HIV nucleic acid sequences, particularly highly conserved HIV sequences In addition, this allows direct monitoring of circulating virus within a patient as an improved method of assessing the efficacy of anti-viral therapies Similarly, viruses associated with leukemia, HTLV-I and HTLV-II, may be detected in this way Bacterial infections such as tuberculosis, clymidia and other sexually transmitted diseases, may also be detected
  • the nucleic acids of the invention find use as probes for toxic bacteria in the screening of water and food samples
  • samples may be treated to lyse the bacteria to release its nucleic acid, and then probes designed to recognize bacterial strains, including, but not limited to, such pathogenic strains as, Salmonella, Campylobacter, Vibrio cholerae, Leishmama, enterotoxic strains of £ coli, and Legionnaire's disease bacteria
  • bioremediation strategies may be evaluated using the compositions of the invention
  • the probes are used for forensic "DNA fingerprinting" to match crime-scene DNA against samples taken from victims and suspects
  • the probes in an array are used for sequencing by hybridization
  • the present invention provides for extremely specific and sensitive probes, which may, in some embodiments, detect target sequences without removal of unhyb ⁇ dized probe This will be useful in the generation of automated gene probe assays
  • compositions of the invention are useful to detect successful gene amplification in PCR, thus allowing successful PCR reactions to be an indication of the presence or absence of a target sequence PCR may be used in this manner in several ways
  • the PCR reaction is done as is known in the art, and then added to a composition of the invention comprising the target nucleic acid with a ETM, covalently attached to an electrode via a conductive ohgomer with subsequent detection of the target sequence
  • PCR is done using nucleotides labelled with a ETM, either the preseoce of, or with subsequeot addition to, an electrode with a conductive ohgomer and a target nucleic acid Binding of the PCR product containing
  • the nucleic acid attached to the electrode via a conductive polymer may be one PCR primer, with addition of a second primer labelled with an ETM Elongation results in double stranded nucleic acid with a ETM and electrode covalently attached In this way, the present invention is used for PCR detection of target sequences
  • the arrays are used for mRNA detection
  • a preferred embodiment utilizes either capture probes or capture extender probes that hybridize close to the 3' polyadenylation tail of the mRNAs This allows the use of one species of target binding probe for detection, i e the probe contains a poly-T portion that will bind to the poly-A tail of the mRNA target Generally, the probe will contain a second portion, preferably non-poly-T, that will bind to the detection probe (or other probe) This allows one target-binding probe to be made, and thus decreases the amount of different probe synthesis that is done
  • restriction enzymes and ligation methods allows the creation of
  • the present invention provides methods which can result in sensitive detection of nucleic acids in a preferred embodiment, less than about 10 X 10 6 molecules are detected, with less than about 10 X 10 5 being preferred, less than 10 X 10" being particularly preferred, less than about 10 X 10 3 being especially preferred, and less than about 10 X 10 2 being most preferred.
  • this assumes a 1 1 correlation between target sequences and reporter molecules, if more than one reporter molecule (i e electron transfer moeity) is used for each target sequence, the sensitivity will go up
  • the self-assembled monolayers were formed on a clean gold surface
  • the gold surface can be prepared by a variety of differeot methods melted or polished gold wire, sputtered or evaporated gold on glass or mica or silicon wafers or some other substrate, electroplated or electroless gold on circuit board material or glass or silicon or some other substrate
  • Both the vacuum deposited gold samples (evaporated and sputtered) and the solution deposited gold samples (electroless and electroplated) often require the use of an adhesion layer between the substrate and the gold in order to insure good mechanical stability Chromium, Titanium, TitaniumTungsten or Tantalum is frequently employed with sputtered and evaporated gold
  • Electroplated nickel is usually employed with electroplated and electroless gold, however other adhesion materials can be used
  • the gold substrate is cleaned prior to monolayer formation
  • a variety of different procedures have been employed Cleaning with a chemical solution is the most prevalent Piranha solution (hydrogen peroxide/sulfuric acid) or aqua regia cleaning (Hydrochloric acid/ Nitric acid) is most prevaleot, however electrochemical methods, flame treatment and plasma methods have also been employed
  • the gold substrate is incubated in a deposition solution
  • the deposition solution consists of a mixture of various thiols in a solvent
  • a mixture of alkane thiols in an organic solvent like ethanol is the most prevalent procedure, however numerous variations have been developed Alternative procedures involve gas phase deposition of the alkane thiol, microcontact printing, deposition using neat thiol, deposition from aqueous solvent and two step procedures have been developed
  • the concentration of the alkane thiol in the deposition solution ranges from molar to submicromolar range with 0 5-2 0 milhmolar being the most prevalent
  • the gold substrate is incubated/placed in contact with the deposition solution for less than a second to days depending on the procedure The most common time is 1 hr to overnight incubation The incubation is usually performed at room temperature, however temperatures up to 50°C are common
  • DNA is deposited during the first deposition step and the mixed monolayer formation is completed during the second step in which a second thiol solution minus DNA is added
  • the second step frequently involves mild heating to promote monolayer reorganization
  • a clean gold surface was placed into a clean vial
  • a DNA deposition solution in organic solvent was prepared in which the total thiol concentration was between 400 uM and 1 0 mM
  • the deposition solution contained thiol modified DNA and thiol diluent molecules
  • the ratio of DNA to diluent was usually between 10 1 and 1 10 with 1 1 being preferred
  • the preferred solvents are tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitole, dimethylforamide (DMF) or mixtures thereof
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • DMF dimethylforamide
  • Sufficient DNA deposition solution is added to the vial so as to completely cover the electrode surface
  • the gold substrate is allowed to incubate at ambient temperature or slightly above ambient temperature for 5-30 minutes
  • the deposition solution is removed and a solution of diluent molecule only (100 uM -1 0 mM) in organic solvent is added
  • the gold substrate is allowed to incubate at room
  • a clean gold surface is placed into a clean vial
  • a DNA deposition solution in water is prepared in which the total thiol concentration is between 1 uM and 200 uM
  • the aqueous solution frequently has salt present (approximately 1M), however pure water can be used
  • the deposition solution contains thiol modified DNA and often a thiol diluent molecule
  • the ratio of DNA to diluent is usually between
  • the DNA deposition solution is added to the vial in such a volume so as to completely cover the electrode surface
  • the gold substrate is allowed to incubate at ambient temperature or slightly above ambient temperature for 1-30 minutes with 5 minutes usually being sufficient
  • the deposition solution is removed and a solution of diluent molecule only (10 uM -1 0 mM) in either water or organic solvent is added
  • the gold substrate is allowed to incubate at room temperature or above room temperature until a complete monolayer is formed (10 m ⁇ nutes-24 hours)
  • the gold sample is removed from the solution, rinsed in clean solvent and used
  • Creating Au Ball Electrodes Use a razor blade to cut 10 cm lengths of gold wire (127 ⁇ m diameter, 99 99% pure, e g from Aldoch) Use a 16 gauge needle to pass the wire through a #4 natural rubber septum (of the size to fit over a 14 mL PCR eppendorf tube) (This serves to support the wire and seal the tubes during deposition See below ) Use a clean-burning flame (methane or propane) to melt one centimeter of the wire and form a sphere attached to the wire terminus Adjust the wire length such that when sealed in a PCR tube the gold ball would be positioned near the bottom, able to be submerged in 20 ⁇ L of liquid On the day of use, dip the electrodes in aqua regia (4 3 1 H 2 0 HCI HN0 3 ) for 20 seconds and then rinse thoroughly with water
  • the circuit boards are removed from the foil-lined bags and immersed in a 10% sulfunc acid solution for 30 seconds Following the sulfuoc acid treatmeot, the boards are immersed in two Milh-Q water baths for 1 minute each The boards are then dried under a stream of nitrogen The boards are placed on a X-Y table in a humidity chamber and a 30 nanohter drop of DNA deposition solution is placed on each of the 14 electrodes
  • the DNA deposition solution consists of 33 uM thiolated DNA, 33 uM 2-un ⁇ t phenylacetylene wire (H6), and 16 uM M44 in 6x SSC (900 mM sodium chloride, 90 mM sodium Citrate, pH 7) w/ 1% Tnethylamine
  • the drop is incubated at room temperature for 5 minutes and then the drop is removed by rinsing in a Milh-Q water bath
  • the boards are immersed in a 45° C bath of M44 in acetontole After
  • the circuit boards were removed from the foil-lined bags and immersed in a 10% sulfuoc acid solution for 30 seconds Following the sulfuoc acid treatment, the boards were immersed in two Milh-Q water baths for 1 minute each The boards were then dried under a stream of nitrogen The boards were placed on a X-Y table in a humidity chamber and a 30 nanohter drop of DNA deposition solution was placed on each of the 14 electrodes
  • the DNA deposition solution consisted of 33 uM thiolated DNA, 33 uM 2-un ⁇ t phenylacetylene wire (H6), and 16 uM undec-1-en-11ylto(ethylene glycol)(HS-CH 2 ) ⁇ r (OCH 2 CH 2 ) 3 -OH) in 6x SSC (900 mM sodium chloride, 90 mM sodium Citrate, pH 7) w/1 % Tnethylamine 3 electrodes were spotted with a solution containing DNA 1 (5'- ACCATGGACACAGAT
  • DNA 4 (5'-TGTGCAGTTGACGTGGAT(CH 2 ) 16 SH-3')
  • the deposition solution was allowed to incubate at room temperature for 5 minutes and then the drop was removed by rinsing in a Milli-Q water bath
  • the boards were immersed in a 45°C bath of M44 in acetonitole After 30 minutes, the boards were removed and immersed in an acetonitnle bath for 30 seconds followed by a milh-Q water bath for 30 seconds
  • the boards were dried under a stream of nitrogen and stored in foiled-hned bags flushed with nitrogen until use
  • the modified boards were removed from the foil-lined bags and fitted with an injection molded sample chamber (cartridge) The chamber was adhered to the board using double-sided sticky tape and had a total volume of 250 microhters
  • a hybridization solution was prepared The solution contains 10 nM DNA target ( ⁇ '-TGTGCAGTTGACGTGGATTGTTAAAAGAGACCATCAATGAGGAAGCTGCA GAATGGGATAGAGTCATCCAGT-3' (D-998), 30 nM signaling probe (D-1055) and 10 nm 5'- TCTACAG(N6)C(N6)ATCTGTGTCCATGGT-3' (N6 is shown in Figure 1 D of PCTUS99/01705, it comprises a ferrocene connected by a 4 carbon chain to the 2' oxygen of the ribose of a oucleoside)
  • the signalling probe is as follows 5'-(C23) 4 -N87-N87-N87-N87-ATC CAC GTC AAC TGC ACA-3' (D- 1055)
  • N87 is a branch point composing a ring structure C23 is shown in Figure 1 F of PCTUS99/01705
  • a solution containing 25% Qiagen lysis buffer AL 455 mM NaCI0 4 , 195 mM NaCI, 1 0 mM mercaptohexanol and 10% fetal calf serum 250 microhters of hybrid solutioo was injected into the cartridge and allowed to hybridize for 12 hours After 12 hours, the hybridized chip was plugged into a homemade transconductance amplifier with switching circuitry
  • the transconductance amplifier was equipped with summing circuitry that combines a DC ramp from the computer DAQ card and an AC sine wave from the lock-in amplifier (SR830 Stanford Instruments) Each electrode was scanned sequentially and the data was saved and manipulated using a homemade program designed using Labview (National Instruments) The chip was scanned at between -100 mV and 500 mV (pseudo Ag/Ag/CI reference electrode) DC with a 25

Abstract

The invention relates to compositions and methods useful in the acceleration of binding of target analytes to capture ligands on surfaces. Detection proceeds through the use of an electron transfer moiety (ETM) that is associated with the target analyte, either directly or indirectly, to allow electronic detection of the ETM.

Description

BINDING ACCELERATION TECHNIQUES FOR THE DETECTION OF ANALYTES
This application is a continuing application of U S S N s 09/134,058, filed August 14, 1998 and 60/090,389, filed June 23, 1998
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The invention relates to compositions and methods useful in the acceleration of binding of target analytes to capture ligands on surfaces Detection proceeds through the use of an electron transfer moiety (ETM) that is associated with the target analyte, either directly or indirectly, to allow electronic detection of the ETM
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
There are a number of assays and sensors for the detection of the presence and/or concentration of specific substances in fluids and gases Many of these rely on specific ligand/anti gand reactions as the mechanism of detection That is, pairs of substances (i e the binding pairs or ligand/anti gands) are known to bind to each other, while binding little or not at all to other substances This has been the focus of a number of techniques that utilize these binding pairs for the detection of the complexes These generally are done by labelling one component of the complex in some way, so as to make the entire complex detectable, using, for example, radioisotopes, fluoroscent and other optically active molecules, enzymes, etc
Other assays rely on electronic signals for detection Of particular interest are biosensors At least two types of biosensors are known enzyme-based or metabolic biosensors and binding or bioaffinity sensors See for example U S Patent No 4,713,347, 5,192,507, 4,920,047, 3,873,267, and references disclosed therein While some of these known sensors use alternating current (AC) techniques, these techniques are generally limited to the detection of differences in bulk (or dielectric) impedance The use of electrophoresis in microfluidic methods to facilitate the binding of biological molecules to their binding partners for subsequent detection is known, see for example U S Patent Nos 5,605,662 and 5,632,957, and references disclosed therein
Similarly, electronic detection of nucleic acids using electrodes is also known, see for example U S
Patent Nos 5,591 ,578, 5,824,473, 5,705,348, 5,780,234 and 5,770,369, U S S N 08/911 ,589, and WO 98/20162, PCT/US98/12430, PCT/US98/12082, PCT/US99/10104, PCT/US99/01705, and PCT/US99/01703
One of the significant hurdles in biosensor applications is the rate at which the target analyte binds to the surface for detection and the affinity for the surface There are a number of techniques that have been developed in nucleic acid applications to either accelerate the rate of binding, or to concentrate the sample at the detection surface These include precipitation of nucleic acids (see EP 0 229 442 A1 , including the addition of detergents (see Pontius et al , PNAS USA 88 8237 (1991 )), partitioning of nucleic acids in liquid two phase systems (see Albertsson et al , Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 103 1-
12 (1965), Kohne et al , Biochem 16(24) 5329 (1977), and Muller, Partitioning of Nucleic Acids, Ch 7 in Partitioning in Aqueous Two-Phase Systems, Academic Press, 1985)), as well as partitioning in the presence of macro gands (see Muller et al , Anal Biochem 118 269 (1981 )), and the addition of nucleic acid binding proteins (see Pontius et al , PNAS USA 87 8403 (1990) and U S Patent No 5,015,569), all of which are expressly incorporated by reference In addition, partitioning systems for some proteins have also been developed, see Gmeitis et al , Anal Biochem 139 400 (1984), also incorporated by reference
However, there is a need for a system that combines acceleration of binding of target analytes, including nucleic acids, to a detection electrode for subsequent electronic detection
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
In accordance with the objects outlined above, the present invention provides methods of detecting a target analyte in a sample The methods comprise concentrating the target analyte in a detection chamber comprising a detection electrode comprising a covalently attached capture ligand The target analyte is bound to the capture ligand to form an assay complex comprising at least one electron transfer moiety (ETM) The presence of the ETM is then detected using the detection electrode
In a further aspect, the concentration step comprises placing the sample in an electric field between at least a first electrode and at least a second electrode sufficient to cause electrophoretic transport of the sample to the detection electrode In an additional aspect, the concentration step comprises including at least one volume exclusion agent in the detection chamber
In a further aspect, the concentration step comprises comprises precipitating the target analyte
In an additional aspect, the concentration step comprises including at least two reagents that form two separable solution phases, such that the target analyte concentrates in one of the phases
In a further aspect, the concentration step comprises binding the target analyte to a shuttle particle
In an additional aspect, the invention provides methods of detecting target analytes comprising flowing the sample past a detection electrode comprising a covalently attached capture ligand under conditions that result in the formation of an assay complex As above, the assay complex further comprises at least one electron transfer moiety (ETM), and the presence of the ETM is detected using said detection electrode
In a further aspect, the methods are for the detection of target nucleic acids and include the use of hybridization accelerators The assay complex is formed in the presence of a hybridization accelerator, that may be a nucleic acid binding protein or a polyvalent ion
In an additional aspect, the invention provides methods of detecting a target analyte in a sample comprising adding the sample to a detection electrode comprising a covalently attached capture ligand under conditions that result in the formation of an assay complex The conditions include the presence of mixing particles
In a further aspect, the invention provides substrates comprising a plurality of gold electrodes Each gold electrode comprises a self-assembled monolayer, a capture ligand, and an interconnect such that each electrode is independently addressable Preferred substrates include printed circuit board materials such as fiberglass
In an additional aspect, the invention provides methods of making a substrate comprising a plurality of gold electrodes The methods comprise coating an adhesion metal onto a fiberglass substrate, and coating gold onto the adhesion metal A pattern is then formed using lithography, and the pattern comprises the plurality of electrodes and associated interconnects The methods optionally include adding a self-assembled monolayer (SAM) to each electrode In an additional aspect the invention provides methods of making a substrate comprising a plurality of gold electrodes The methods comprise coating an adhesion metal onto a substrate, and coating gold onto the adhesion metal A pattern is then formed using lithography, and the pattern comprises the plurality of electrodes and associated interconnects The methods further include adding a self- assembled monolayer (SAM) to each electrode
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Figures 1A, 1 B, 1C, 1 D 1 E and 1 F depict several representative configurations of the use of two sets of electrodes, an electrophoresis set and a detection set In Figures 1A and 1B, a substrate 30 has a first electrophoresis electrode 10 with detection electrodes 20 either on top or embedded in but electrically isolated from the electrophoresis electrode There is a sample receiving area 40 as well The counter electrode for the electrophoresis and detection electrodes are not shown Figure 1C represents a side view of Figure 1 A, with the addition of the counter electrophoresis electrode 50 and optionally the counter detection electrode 60 A permeation layer 25 is also shown As will be appreciated by those in the art, these counter electrodes may be the same electrode, if they are used sequentially Figures 1 D, 1 E and 1 F depicts the use of individual electrophoresis electrodes Figure 1 E is a side view of 1 D Figure 1 F shows the configuration for sequentially moving a sample from one detection electrode to another, as is more fully described below
Figure 2 depicts the use of multidimensional arrays of electrophoresis electrodes for both spatial targeting of the sample as well as "mixing" to increase binding kinetics Figure 2A shows electrophoresis electrodes 10 and detection electrodes 20 Electrophoresis voltage applied as between electrophoretic electrodes 10 and 15 and, at the same time, electrophoretic electrodes 12 and 17, can drive the target analyte to detector electrode 20
Figures 3A, 3B and 3C depict three preferred embodiments for attaching a target sequence to the electrode Figure 3A depicts a target sequence 120 hybridized to a capture probe 100 linked via a attachment linker 106, which as outlined herein may be either a conductive oligomer or an insulator The electrode 105 comprises a monolayer of passivation agent 107, which can comprise conductive o gomers (herein depicted as 108) and/or insulators (herein depicted as 109) As for all the embodiments depicted in the figures, n is an integer of at least 1 , although as will be appreciated by those in the art, the system may not utilize a capture probe at all (i e n is zero), although this is generally not preferred The upper limit of n will depend on the length of the target sequence and the required sensitivity Figure 3B depicts the use of a single capture extender probe 110 with a first portion 111 that will hybridize to a first portion of the target sequence 120 and a second portion that will hybridize to the capture probe 100 Figure 3C depicts the use of two capture extender probes 110 and 130 The first capture extender probe 110 has a first portion 111 that will hybridize to a first portion of the target sequence 120 and a second portion 112 that will hybridize to a first portion 102 of the capture probe 100 The second capture extender probe 130 has a first portion 132 that will hybridize to a second portion of the target sequence 120 and a second portion 131 that will hybridize to a second portion 101 of the capture probe 100 As will be appreciated by those in the art, any of these attachment configurations may be used with the embodiments of Figures 4, 5 and 6
Figures 4A, 4B, 4C and 4D depict several possible mechanιsm-1 systems Figures 4A, 4B and 4C depict several possible nucleic acid systems In Figure 4A, a detection probe 140 (which also serves as a capture probe) is attached to electrode 105 via a conductive o gomer 108 The electrode 105 further comprises a monolayer of passivation agents 107 The target sequence 120 hybridizes to the detection probe 140, and an ETM 135 is attached (either covalently to one or other of the target sequence or the detection probe or noncovalently, i e as a hybridization indicator) In Figure 4B, a Figure 3A attachment to the electrode is used, with a capture probe 100 attached to the electrode 105 using an attachment linker 106, which can be either an insulator or a conductive ohgomer The target sequence 120 is hybridized to the capture probe, and a label probe 145, comprising a first portion 141 that hybridizes to a portion of the target sequence 105 and a recruitment linker 142 that hybridizes to a detection probe 140 which is attached to the electrode via a conductive ohgomer 108 Figure 4C is similar, except a first capture extender probe 110 is shown, and an amplifier probe 150, comprising a first portion 152 that will hybridize to a second portion of the target sequence 120 and a second portion
(amplification sequence) 152 that will hybridize to a first portion 141 of the label probe 145 A second portion 142 of the label probe 145 hybridizes to the detection probe 140, with at least one ETM 135 present Figure 3C utilizes a Figure 3B attachment to the electrode Figure 4D depicts a non-nucleic target analyte 165 bound to a capture binding ligand 160, attached to the electrode 105 via an attachment linker 106 A solution binding ligand 170 also binds to the target analyte and comprises a recruitment linker 171 comprising nucleic acid that will hybridize to the detection probe 140 with at least one ETM 135 present
Figures 5A, 5B, 5C, 5D, 5E, 4F and 4G depict some of the nucleic acid mechanιsm-2 embodiments of the invention All of the monolayers depicted herein show the presence of both conductive oligomers
108 and insulators 107 in roughly a 1 1 ratio, although as discussed herein, a variety of different ratios may be used, or the insulator may be completely absent In addition, as will be appreciated by those in the art, any one of these structures may be repeated for a particular target sequence, that is, for long target sequences, there may be multiple assay complexes formed Additionally, any of the electrode- attachment embodiments of Figure 3 may be used in any of these systems Figures 5A, 5B and 5D have the target sequence 120 containing the ETMs 135, as discussed herein these may be added enzymatically, for example during a PCR reaction using nucleotides modified with ETMs, resulting in essentially random incorporation throughout the target sequence, or added to the terminus of the target sequence Figure 5C depicts the use of two different capture probes 100 and 100', that hybridize to different portions of the target sequence 120 As will be appreciated by those in the art, the 5'-3' orientation of the two capture probes in this embodiment is different
Figure 5C depicts the use of label probes 145 that hybridize directly to the target sequence 120 Figure 5C shows the use of a label probe 145, comprising a first portion 141 that hybridizes to a portion of the target sequence 120, a second portion 142 comprising ETMs 135
Figures 5E, 5F and 5G depict systems utilizing label probes 145 that do not hybridize directly to the target, but rather to amplifier probes that are directly (Figure 5E) or indirectly (Figures 5F and 5G) hybridized to the target sequence Figure 5E utilizes an amplifier probe 150 has a first portion 151 that hybridizes to the target sequence 120 and at least one second portion 152, i e the amplifier sequence, that hybridizes to the first portion 141 of the label probe Figure 5F is similar, except that a first label extender probe 160 is used, comprising a first portion 161 that hybridizes to the target sequence 120 and a second portion 162 that hybridizes to a first portion 151 of amplifier probe 150 A second portion 152 of the amplifier probe 150 hybridizes to a first portion 141 of the label probe 140, which also comprises a recruitment linker 142 comprising ETMs 135 Figure 5G adds a second label extender probe 170, with a first portion 171 that hybridizes to a portion of the target sequence 120 and a second portion that hybridizes to a portion of the amplifier probe
Figure 5H depicts a system that utilizes multiple label probes The first portion 141 of the label probe 140 can hybridize to all or part of the recruitment linker 142
Figures 6A - 6H depict some of the possible non-nucleic acid mechanιsm-2 embodiments Figure 6A utilizes a capture binding ligand 200 linked to the electrode 105 by an attachment linker 106 Target analyte 205 binds to the capture binding ligand 200 and to a solution binding ligand 210 with a recruitment linker 220 comprising ETMs 135 Figure 6B depicts a similar case, except that the capture binding ligand 200 is attached to the surface using a second binding partner interaction, for example a nucleic acid, a portion 201 of the capture binding ligand will bind or hybridize to a capture probe 100 on the surface Figure 6C also utilizes a second binding interaction, for example a nucleic acid interaction, to amplify the signal In this case, the solution binding ligand 210 comprises a first portion 220 that will bind or hybridize to a first pontion 231 of a label probe 230 The label probe 230 also comprises a second portion 232 that is a recruitment linker Figure 6D depicts an embodiment similar to 6A, with the use of a second solution binding ligand 240 Figure 6E depicts the case where more than one capture binding ligand (200 and 200') is used Figure 6F shows a conformation wherein the addition of target alters the conformation of the binding ligands, causing the recruitment linker 220 to be placed near the monolayer surface Figure 6G shows the use of the present invention in candidate bioactive agent screening, wherein the addition of a drug candidate to target causes the solution binding ligand to dissociate, causing a loss of signal In addition, the solution binding ligand may be added to another surface and be bound, as is generally depicted in figure 6H for enzymes Figure 6H depicts the use of an enzyme to cleave a substrate comprising a recruitment linker, causing a loss of signal The cleaved piece may also be added to an additional electrode, causing an increase in signal, using either a mechanιsm-1 or a mechanιsm-2 system
Figures 7A, 7B, 7C, 7D and 7E depict different possible configurations of label probes and attachments of ETMs In Figures 7A-C, the recruitment linker is nucleic acid, in Figures 7D and E, it is not A = nucleoside replacement, B = attachment to a base, C = attachment to a πbose, D = attachment to a phosphate, E = metallocene polymer (although as described herein, this can be a polymer of other ETMs as well), attached to a base, nbose or phosphate (or other backbone analogs),
F = dendπmer structure, attached via a base, nbose or phosphate (or other backbone analogs), G = attachment via a "branching" structure, through base, nbose or phosphate (or other backbone analogs), H = attachment of metallocene (or other ETM) polymers, I = attachment via a dendnmer structure, J = attachment using standard linkers
Figure 8 depicts a schematic of an alternate method of adding large numbers of ETMs simultaneously to a nucleic acid using a "branch" point phosphoramidite, as is known in the art As will be appreciated by those in the art, each end point can contain any number of ETMs
Figure 9 depicts a schematic of the synthesis of simultaneous incorporation of multiple ETMs into a nucleic acid, using a "branch" point nucleoside
Figure 10 depicts the synthesis of a "branch" point (in this case an adenosine), to allow the addition of ETM polymers
Figure 11 depicts the use of an activated carboxylate for the addition of a nucleic acid functionalized with a primary amine to a pre-formed SAM
Figure 12 depicts a representative hairpin structure 500 is a target binding sequence, 510 is a loop sequence, 520 is a self-complementary region, 530 is substantially complementary to a detection probe, and 530 is the "sticky end", that is, a portion that does not hybridize to any other portion of the probe, that contains the ETMs Figures 13A, 13B, 13C and 13D depict some embodiments of the invention
Figure 14 depicts the results of the experimental example
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
The present invention is directed to methods and compositions useful in the detection of biological target analyte species such as nucleic acids and proteins based on electrochemical detection on an electrode As is known in the art, one of the significant hurdles of biosensors, particularly biosensors for the detection of nucleic acids, is the rate of binding (i e hybridization in the case of nucleic acids) of the solution-based target to the surface-bound capture ligand See for example Gingeras et al , Nucl Acid Res 13 5373 (1987), hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety This can be affected in a number of ways, including (1 ) concentrating the target analyte near the surface, effectively resulting in a larger amount of the target analyte binding to the capture ligand, (2) configuring the system to allow for good flow or "mixing", again allowing a larger amount of the target analyte to bind to the capture ligand, or, (3) in the case of nucleic acids, using hybridization accelerators, that actually increase the rate of hybridization in assay complexes comprising the target sequence and the capture probes All three of these are sometimes referred to herein as binding or hybridization acceleration, with the understanding that some of these techniques don't actually increase the rate constant of binding, they increase the amount of target analyte bound per unit time by increasing the concentration or by improving mass transport Thus, the present invention is directed to the use of compositions and methods to increase the number of target molecules bound to the surface within a given unit of time While a number of the techniques outlined herein are generally exemplified by nucleic acids, one of skill in the art will recognize the applicability of all the techniques to other target analytes including proteins
Thus, the present invention describes a number of techniques that can be used to accelerate the rate of assay complex formation or increase the number of assay complexes in a given period of time, wherein the target analyte becomes associated with a capture ligand on the electrode surface These techniques include, but are not limited to, electrophoretic transport, the use of volume exclusion agents, the use of nucleic acid binding proteins (in the case of nucleic acid target analytes), the use of polyvalent ions, precipitation agents, partitioning, adjusting the phase compatabihty, structuring flow parameters, the use of microparticles (including both magnetic and non-magnetic particles) as either "shuttles" or "mixers", the use of temperature gradients, the use of filters, and combinations thereof
Accordingly, the present invention provides methods of detecting a target analyte in sample solutions As will be appreciated by those in the art, the sample solution may comprise any number of things, including, but not limited to, bodily fluids (including, but not limited to, blood, urine, serum, lymph, saliva, anal and vaginal secretions, perspiration and semen, of virtually any organism, with mammalian samples being preferred and human samples being particularly preferred), environmental samples (including, but not limited to, air, agricultural, water and soil samples), biological warfare agent samples, research samples (i e in the case of nucleic acids, the sample may be the products of an amplification reaction including both target and signal amplification as is generally described in PCT/US99/01705, such as PCR amplification reaction), purified samples, such as purified genomic DNA, RNA, proteins, etc , raw samples (bacteria, virus, genomic DNA, etc , As will be appreciated by those in the art, virtually any experimental manipulation may have been done on the sample
The methods are directed to the detection of target analytes By "target analytes" or grammatical equivalents herein is meant any molecule or compound to be detected As outlined below, target analytes preferably bind to binding ligands, as is more fully described below As will be appreciated by those in the art, a large number of analytes may be detected using the present methods, basically, any target analyte for which a binding ligand, described below, may be made may be detected using the methods of the invention
When electrophoresis is used, as is more fully outlined below, the target analyte is preferably charged, i e it carries a net charge under the experimental conditions, such that it is able to be transported electrophoretically in an electric field However, non-charged target analytes may be utilized if a charged binding partner or binding ligand is associated with the target analyte For example, as more fully described below, in the case of some target analytes, for example proteins, that carry little or no net charge, soluble binding ligands can be used to bind to the target analytes that additionally contain ETMs and/or charged species, in some embodiments, the ETM may be charged, and thus facilitate both electrophoresis and detection
Suitable analytes include organic and inorganic molecules, including biomolecules In a preferred embodiment, the analyte may be an environmental pollutant (including pesticides, insecticides, toxins, etc ), a chemical (including solvents, organic materials, etc ), therapeutic molecules (including therapeutic and abused drugs, antibiotics, etc ), biomolecules (including hormones, cytokines, proteins, pids, carbohydrates, cellular membrane antigens and receptors (neural, hormonal, nutrient, and cell surface receptors) or their ligands, etc), whole cells (including procaryotic (such as pathogenic bacteria) and eucaryotic cells, including mammalian tumor cells), viruses (including retroviruses, herpesviruses, adenoviruses, lentiviruses, etc ), and spores, etc Particularly preferred analytes are environmental pollutants, nucleic acids, proteins (including enzymes, antibodies, antigens, growth factors, cytokines, etc), therapeutic and abused drugs, cells, and viruses Particularly preferred target analytes include proteins and nucleic acids "Protein" as used herein includes proteins, polypeptides, and peptides The protein may be made up of naturally occurring ammo acids and peptide bonds, or synthetic peptidomimetic structures The side chains may be in either the (R) or the (S) configuration In the preferred embodiment, the ammo acids are in the (S) or L-configuration If non-naturally occurring side chains are used, non-ammo acid substituents may be used, for example to prevent or retard in vivo degradations
By "nucleic acid" or "ohgonucleotide" or grammatical equivalents herein means at least two nucleotides covalently linked together A nucleic acid of the present invention will generally contain phosphodiester bonds, although in some cases, as outlined below, nucleic acid analogs are included that may have alternate backbones, comprising, for example, phosphoramide (Beaucage et al , Tetrahedron 49(10) 1925 (1993) and references therein, Letsinger, J Org Chem 35 3800 (1970), Sprinzl et al , Eur J Biochem 81 579 (1977), Letsinger et al , Nucl Acids Res 14 3487 (1986), Sawai et al, Chem Lett 805 (1984), Letsinger et al , J Am Chem Soc 110 4470 (1988), and Pauwels et al , Chemica Scrιpta 26 141 91986)), phosphorothioate (Mag et al , Nucleic Acids Res 19 1437 (1991 ), and U S Patent No 5,644,048), phosphorodithioate (Briu et al , J Am Chem Soc 111 2321 (1989), O-methylphophoroamidite linkages (see Eckstein, Oligonucleotides and Analogues A Practical Approach, Oxford University Press), and peptide nucleic acid backbones and linkages (see Egholm, J Am Chem Soc 114 1895 (1992), Meier et al , Chem Int Ed Engl 31 1008 (1992), Nielsen, Nature, 365 566 (1993), Carlsson et al , Nature 380 207 (1996), all of which are incorporated by reference)
Other analog nucleic acids include those with positive backbones (Denpcy et al , Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 92 6097 (1995), non-ionic backbones (U S Patent Nos 5,386,023, 5,637,684, 5,602,240, 5,216,141 and 4,469,863, Kiedrowshi et al , Angew Chem Intl Ed English 30 423 (1991 ), Letsinger et al . J Am Chem Soc 110 4470 (1988), Letsinger et al , Nucleoside & Nucleotide 13 1597 (1994), Chapters 2 and 3, ASC Symposium Series 580, "Carbohydrate Modifications in Antisense Research",
Ed Y S Sanghui and P Dan Cook, Mesmaeker et al , Bioorganic & Medicinal Chem Lett 4 395 (1994), Jeffs et al , J Biomolecular NMR 34 17 (1994), Tetrahedron Lett 37 743 (1996)) and non- nbose backbones, including those described in U S Patent Nos 5,235,033 and 5,034,506, and Chapters 6 and 7, ASC Symposium Series 580, "Carbohydrate Modifications in Antisense Research", Ed Y S Sanghui and P Dan Cook Nucleic acids containing one or more carbocychc sugars are also included within the definition of nucleic acids (see Jenkins et al , Chem Soc Rev (1995) pp169- 176) Several nucleic acid analogs are described in Rawls, C & E News June 2, 1997 page 35 All of these references are hereby expressly incorporated by reference These modifications of the nbose- phosphate backbone may be done to facilitate the addition of ETMs, or to increase the stability and half-life of such molecules in physiological environments As will be appreciated by those in the art, all of these nucleic acid analogs may find use in the present invention In addition mixtures of naturally occurring nucleic acids and analogs can be made, for example, at the site of conductive ohgomer or ETM attachment, an analog structure may be used Alternatively, mixtures of different nucleic acid analogs, and mixtures of naturally occuπng nucleic acids and analogs may be made
Particularly preferred are peptide nucleic acids (PNA) which includes peptide nucleic acid analogs These backbones are substantially non-ionic under neutral conditions, in contrast to the highly charged phosphodiester backbone of naturally occurring nucleic acids This results in two advantages First, the PNA backbone exhibits improved hybridization kinetics PNAs have larger changes in the melting temperature (Tm) for mismatched versus perfectly matched basepairs DNA and RNA typically exhibit a 2-4°C drop in Tm for an internal mismatch With the non-ionic PNA backbone, the drop is closer to 7-9°C This allows for better detection of mismatches Similarly, due to their non-ionic nature, hybridization of the bases attached to these backbones is relatively insensitive to salt concentration
The nucleic acids may be single stranded or double stranded, as specified, or contain portions of both double stranded or single stranded sequence The nucleic acid may be DNA, both genomic and cDNA, RNA or a hybrid, where the nucleic acid contains any combination of deoxynbo- and πbo- nucleotides, and any combination of bases, including uracil, adenme, thymme, cytosine, guanme, inosme, xanthme hypoxanthme, isocytosme, isoguanine, etc A preferred embodiment utilizes isocytosme and isoguanine in nucleic acids designed to be complementary to other probes, rather than target sequences, as this reduces non-specific hybridization, as is generally described in U S Patent No 5,681 ,702 As used herein, the term "nucleoside" includes nucleotides as well as nucleoside and nucleotide analogs, and modified nucleosides such as ammo modified nucleosides In addition, "nucleoside" includes non-naturally occuπng analog structures Thus for example the individual units of a peptide nucleic acid, each containing a base, are referred to herein as a nucleoside
In a preferred embodiment, the methods include concentrating the target analyte in the vicinity of a detection electrode The description of the detection electrode compositions is described below As will be appreciated by those in the art, the starting concentration of the target analyte in the sample can vary widely, depending on the type of sample used In general, the starting concentration of the target analyte in the sample is relatively low, and preferred techniques utilize methods that allow the concentration of the target analyte in the vicinity of the detection electrode In general, "concentration" means that the effective diffusion distance a target analyte must travel to bind to the surface is reduced In a preferred embodiment, the concentration at or near the detection electrode is higher than the concentration in the starting sample This may be measured in a variety of ways, including directly, or indirectly as a function of binding acceleration That is, in a preferred embodiment, concentration increases of at least two fold are preferred, with at least 5 fold being particularly preferred, and at least 10 fold increases being especially preferred As will be appreciated by those in the art, the increase in concentration will depend on the starting sample size as well, and thus very large increases in concentration, e g 100-, 1000- and 10,000- (or higher) fold increases may be desirable When the rate of hybridization is used as an indication of concentration, increases of at least two fold more target analyte binding to the detection electrode per unit time is preferred, with at least 5 fold being particularly preferred, and at least 10 fold increases being especially preferred, again, higher increases may be preferable in some embodiments
As outlined herein, there are a variety of suitable concentration methods In a preferred embodiment, the concentrating is done using electrophoresis In general, the system is described as follows A first electrode and a second electrode are used to generate an electric field to effect transport, generally electrophoretic transport, of the target analyte species increases its concentration at a detection electrode, which has a covalently attached capture binding ligand that will bind (either directly or indirectly ) the target analyte In this way, the kinetics of target analyte binding to its capture ligand are significantly increased, by both increasing the concentration of the target analyte in the medium surrounding the capture ligand and reducing the distance a given target analyte molecule must difuse to find a binding ligand
The detection electrode may or may not be the same as the first electrode That is, in one embodiment, the electrodes used to generate the electric fields that result in transport of the analytes to the surface are different from the electrodes used for detection, i e there are two sets of electrodes, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, the two sets may share electrodes, for example the counter electrode In an additional embodiment, the electrodes used for electrophoretic transport and for detection are the same, i e there is only one set of electrodes In some embodiments, the electrophoretic electrode which attracts the target analyte comprises a permeation layer that serves to limit access of the target analytes to the electrode surface and thus protects the analytes from electrochemical degradation
This electrophoretic transport to the vicinity of the detection probe allows the concentration of the target analyte at or near the detection probe surface, which contains capture binding ligands that will bind the target analytes to form assay complexes In some embodiments, the sequential or simultaneous use of a plurality of electrophoresis electrodes allows multidimensional electrophoresis, i e the solution may be targeted, ' mixed" or "stirred" in the vicinity of the detection electrode, to further increase the kinetics of binding As described below, the assay complex comprises an ETM, which is then detected using the detection electrode
It should also be noted that a number of electrophoretic steps may be used, for example, the components of the system may be added sequentially, with an electrophoresis step after each addition to transport the reagents down to the detection electrode Similarly, electrophoresis may be used to effect "washing" steps, wherein excess reagents (non-bound target molecules or non-bound extra binding ligand components, etc ) Or other components of the sample (e g noncomphmentary nucleic acids) are driven away from the detection electrode Thus any combination of electrophoresis steps may be used In addition, the time of the electrophoretic steps may be altered
The methods and compositions of the invention can rely on either two sets of electrodes, wherein one set is used for electrophoresis and the second set is used for detection, or one set of electrodes that functions to effect both electrophoresis and detection, as is generally described below
Samples containing target analytes are placed in an electric field between at least a first and at least a second electrophoresis electrode By "electrode" herein is meant a composition, which, when connected to an electronic device, is able to sense a current or a potential and convert it to a signal Alternatively an electrode can be defined as a composition which can apply a potential to and/or pass electrons to or from species in the solution Thus, an electrode is an ETM as described below Preferred electodes are known in the art and include, but are not limited to, certain metals and their oxides, including gold, platinum, palladium, silicon, aluminum, metal oxide electrodes including platinum oxide, titanium oxide, tin oxide, indium tin oxide, palladium oxide, silicon oxide, aluminum oxide, molybdenum oxide (Mo206), tungsten oxide (W03) and ruthenium oxides, and carbon (including glassy carbon electrodes, graphite and carbon paste) Preferred electrodes include gold, silicon, platinum, carbon and metal oxide electrodes, with gold being particularly preferred
The electrodes described herein are depicted as a flat surface, which is only one of the possible conformations of the electrode and is for schematic purposes only The conformation of the electrode will vary with the detection method used For example, flat planar electrodes may be preferred for optical detection methods, or when arrays of nucleic acids are made, thus requiring addressable locations for both synthesis and detection Alternatively, for single probe analysis, the electrode may be in the form of a tube, with the SAMs comprising conductive ohgomers and nucleic acids bound to the inner surface Electrode coils or mesh may be preferred in some embodiments as well This allows a maximum of surface area containing the nucleic acids to be exposed to a small volume of sample In addition, as is more fully outlined below, the detection electrode may be configured to maximize the contact the entire sample has with the electrode, or to allow mixing, etc
In a preferred embodiment, one (or both) of the electrophoretic electrodes comprises a permeation layer, as is generally described in U S Patent Nos 5,632,957 and 5,605,662, both of which are expressly incorporated by reference in their entirety This is particularly useful when the system is run at high voltages, i e where water hydrolysis occurs The permeation layer serves as an intermediate diffusion layer, and generally has a pore limit property which inhibits or impedes the target analytes, reactants, etc from physical contact with the electrode surface and thus protects against adverse electrochemical effects The permeation layer may be formed of a variety of materials, including, but not limited to, carbon chain polymers, carbon-silicon chain polymers, carbon-phosphorus chain polymers, carbon-nitrogen chain polymers, silicon chain polymers, polymer alloys, layered polymer composites, interpenetrating polymer materials, ceramics, controlled porosity glasss, materials formed as sol-gels, materials formed as aero-gels, agarose, acrylamides, materials formed as hydro-gels, porous graphite, clays or zeolites Particularly preferred are mesh-type polymers formed of acrylamide and cross-linkers, including, but not limited to, tπethylene glycol diacrylate, tetraethyiene glycol diacrylate and N, N'-methylene-bisacrylamide
The electric field is generated between the first and second electrophoresis electrodes The terms "first" and "second" are essentially interchangeable and not meant to confer any spatial or conformational distinctions, although in general, as used herein, the first electrode is generally the electrode spatially closest to the detection electrode (when two sets of electrodes are used), or alternatively, the first electrode is generally depicted as the detection electrode (when only one set of electrodes is used) As will be appreciated by those in the art, any number of possible electrophoresis electrode configurations can be used, as is generally depicted in Figures 1 and 2 In general, there are two types of configurations bulk electrophoresis and targeted electrophoresis
In a preferred embodiment, a bulk electrophoresis configuration is used That is, one set of electrophoresis electrodes are used, as is generally shown in Figures 1A, 1 B and 1C The first electrophoresis electrode (10 in Figure 1) is generally larger than the detection electrodes and is arranged spatially such that the detection probes are within the electric field generated by the electrophoresis electrodes Upon the application of a DC voltage between the electrodes, an electric field is generated such that electrophoretic transport of the charged target analytes to the vicinity of the detection probes is effected While this does not necessarily directly place the target analytes on the detection probes, the decrease in effective diffusion distance and increase in the effective concentration at the detection surface significantly increases the kinetics of target analyte binding to the capture binding ligand on the surface of the detection probe, as diffusion needs to take place in essentially two dimensions, rather than three
In a preferred embodiment, a targeted electrophoresis configuration is used, as is generally depicted in Figures 1 D, 1 E and 1 F In this embodiment, there are a plurality of electrophoresis electrodes that are used to specifically target the analyte to a specific detection electrode, most generally, but not always, in sets This may be done in one of two basic ways In a preferred embodiment, as generally depicted in Figure 1 F and components of which are described in U S Patent No 5,605,662, hereby expressly incorporated by reference, each detection electrode has an associated electrophoresis electrode Thus, by either sequentially or simultaneously applying a voltage between sets of electrophoresis electrodes, target analytes may be moved from one detection electrode to another Assuming for the moment a negatively charged target analyte such as nucleic acid, the system may be run as follows, using the Figure 1 F system In one embodiment, an electric field is generated between anode 50 and electrophoresis electrode 10, which is acting as the cathode, to bring the anionic target analyte mixture down to both electophoresis electrode 10 and thus detection electrode
20, wherein binding of a species of the target analyte mixture can occur The electric field is then shut off, and a new electric field is applied between electrophoresis electrode 10, now acting as an anode, and electrophoresis electrode 11, acting as a cathode This drives the non-bound anionic species from 10 to 11, wherein binding of a second species of target analyte can bind The electric field is turned off, and a new field as between 11 (acting as the anode) and 12 (acting as the cathode) is generated, to move non-bound target analytes to a new detection electrode, etc The advantage of this type of approach is that essentially the entire target analyte population is transported to each capture ligand, thus maximizing the number of target analytes that have an opportunity to bind to their capture ligands
Alternatively, the electrophoresis at each pad can be run simultaneously, with an electric field generated between (assuming a negatively charged target analyte population) anode 50 and cathodes 10, 11, 12 and 13 This is faster, but results in (assuming four pads) only one quarter of the target analyte being "presented" to each detection electrode This may or may not be desirable in different embodiments, for example, when speed rather than sensitivity is important
In a preferred embodiment, a related but different type of targeted electrophoresis is done In this embodiment, a plurality of sets of electrophoresis electrodes are positioned in a three dimensional way, to allow movement of the target analytes to different locations For example, as shown in Figure 2, the use of a three-dimensional array of electrophoresis electrodes allows localization of the sample solution to particular locations, i e individual detection electrodes or sets of detection electrodes Thus, for example, with reference to Figure 2, electrophoretic voltage applied between electrophoretic electrodes 10 and 15 and, at the same time, electrophoretic electrodes 12 and 17 can drive the target analyte to detector electrode 20
Alternatively, in a preferred embodiment, a plurality of electrophoresis electrodes are used, not for specific targeting to a particular location, but rather to increase binding kinetics through "mixing" or
"stirring" of the sample in the vicinity of the detection electrode with its associated capture ligand For example, as shown in Figure 2, an initial electrophoretic step may be done between electrophoretic electrode 18 and a non-depicted second electrophoretic electrode, to drive the target analytes to the detection probe surface, i e "bulk electrophoresis" as defined above Then, voltages, either DC or AC voltages, including pulses of each, can be applied between the additional sets of electrophoresis electrodes, to transport the target analyte to increase both availability and binding kinetics of the target analytes to the capture binding ligands immobilized on the detection electrodes
The strength of the applied electric field is determined by a number of factors, including, but not limited to, the desired time of electrophoresis, the size of the sample (i e the distance the target analyte must travel), the composition of the solution (i e the presence or absence of electroactive charge carriers and their redox potentials), the composition of the components (i e the stability of certain components of the invention to electrochemical potential), the presence or absence of electroactive charge carriers in solution, the size of the chamber, the charge of the target analyte, the size and location of the electrodes, the electrode material, etc
In general, DC voltages are applied for the initial electrophoresis, with DC or AC pulses or fields applied for mixing, if applicable
The strength of the applied field will depend in part on the other components of the system For example, when only one set of electrodes is used and thiol linkages are used to attach the components of the system to the detection electrodes (i e the attachment of passivation agents and conductive ohgomers to the detection electrode, as is more fully outlined below), the applied electrophoretic voltage is below the oxidation potential of the thiol compounds, i e generally less than 1 V Alternatively, higher voltages can be used when thiol linkages are not used Similarly, thiol linkages are acceptable at higher field strengths when two sets of electrodes are used, i e the detection electrodes containing sensitive chemistry are not exposed to high voltages
Thus, in general, electrophoretic voltages range from 1 mV to about 2 V, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, the required voltage will depend on the desired time of running, the net charge on the analytes the presence or absence of buffers, the position of the electrodes, etc As is known in the art, the electrophoretic velocity is μ(dφ/dx), wherein μ is the ionic mobility For one set of electrode embodiments the electrophoretic voltages range from about 50 mV to about 900 mV, with from about 100 mV to about 800 mV being preferred, and from about 250 mV to about 700 mV being especially preferred For two set embodiments the electrophoretic voltages range from about 100 mV to about 2V or higher with from about 500 mV to about 1 5 V being preferred, and from about 1 V to about 1 5 V being especially preferred Of course, as will be appreciated by those in the art, these voltages can be positive or negative, depending on the charge of the analyte
When low voltages are used, i e voltages less than 1 23 V (relative to a normal hydrogen electrode), the voltage at which water hydrolysis occurs, it is necessary to include a electroactive species in the solution, such that current can be transported from the electrode to the solution and an electric field can be generated throughout the solution The type and concentration of the electroactive species will vary with the voltage, the length of required time for electrophoresis (which relates to the required distance, i e sample volume), etc In a preferred embodiment, the redox potential of the electroactive species is higher than that of the ETM used for detection For example, if a electroactive charge carrier with a redox potential of 300 mV is used and the ETM has a redox potential of 100 mV, electrophoresis can be done at 300 mV with subsequent detection being done at 100 mV, without a need to remove the electroactive species
As will be appreciated by those in the art, a wide variety of suitable electroactive charge carriers can be used, including, but not limited to, compounds of iron, including aqueous FeCI, Fe(CN)6 4 /3 , and ferrocene and its derivatives, complexes of ruthenium, including Ru(NH3)5pyr and Ru(NH3)5H20, complexes of cobalt including Co(NH3)6 3+, Co(bpy)3 3+ and Co(tπs)bpy3+), complexes of osmium including Os(bpy)3 2+ and Os(tπs)bpy and derivatives, complexes of rhenium, including Rh(NH3)4CI2, and iodine l3- As is known in the art, some oxidation-reduction reactions produce solids (i e there are not a reversible couple) Generally, these species are not preferred, although in some instances they may be used when the detection electrode is the soluble reaction Thus for example, a Ag/AgCI reaction may be used with nucleic acids, since the AgCI reaction occurs at the anode The concentration of the redox molecule will vary, as will be appreciated by those in the art, with concentrations at or below saturation being useful It should also be noted that in this embodiment, when an electroactive charge carrier is used, it may be necessary to mix or stir the system during electrophoresis
It should be noted that electroactive charge carriers may be used in any system, particularly array- based systems, that utilize electrophoresis For example, electroactive charge carriers may be used in electrophoretic array systems such as described in U S Patent Nos 5,532,129, 5,605,662,
5,565,322 and 5,632,957 and related applications, all of which are incorporated by reference The sample is placed in the electric field to effect electrophoretic transport to one or more detection electrodes The composition of the detection electrode is as described above for the electrophoresis electrodes, with gold, silicon, carbon, platinum and metal oxide electrodes being particularly preferred
In a preferred embodiment, the detection electrodes are formed on a substrate In addition, the discussion herein is generally directed to the formation of gold electrodes, but as will be appreciated by those in the art, other electrodes can be used as well The substrate can comprise a wide variety of materials, as will be appreciated by those in the art, with printed circuit board (PCB) materials being particularly preferred Thus, in general, the suitable substrates include, but are not limited to, fiberglass, teflon, ceramics, glass, silicon, mica, plastic (including acrylics, polystyrene and copolymers of styrene and other materials, polypropylene, polyethylene, polybutylene, polycarbonate, polyurethanes, Teflon™, and derivatives thereof, etc ), GETEK (a blend of polypropylene oxide and fiberglass), etc
In general, preferred materials include printed circuit board materials Circuit board materials are those that comprise an insulating substrate that is coated with a conducting layer and processed using lithography techniques, particularly photolithography techniques, to form the patterns of electrodes and interconnects (sometimes referred to in the art as interconnections or leads) The insulating substrate is generally, but not always, a polymer As is known in the art, one or a plurality of layers may be used, to make either "two dimensional" (e g all electrodes and interconnections in a plane) or "three dimensional" (wherein the electrodes are on one surface and the interconnects may go through the board to the other side) boards Three dimensional systems frequently rely on the use of drilling or etching, followed by electroplating with a metal such as copper, such that the "through board" interconnections are made Circuit board materials are often provided with a foil already attached to the substrate, such as a copper foil, with additional copper added as needed (for example for interconnections), for example by electroplating The copper surface may then need to be roughened, for example through etching, to allow attachment of the adhesion layer
In some embodiments, glass may not be preferred as a substrate
Accordingly, in a preferred embodiment, the present invention provides biochips (sometimes referred to herein "chips") that comprise substrates comprising a plurality of electrodes, preferably gold electrodes The number of electrodes is as outlined for arrays Each electrode preferably comprises a self-assembled monolayer as outlined herein In a preferred embodiment, one of the monolayer- forming species comprises a capture hgand as outlined herein In addition, each electrode has an interconnection, that is attached to the electrode at one end and is ultimately attached to a device that can control the electrode That is, each electrode is independently addressable The substrates can be part of a larger device comprising a detection chamber that exposes a given volume of sample to the detection electrode Generally, the detection chamber ranges from about 1 nL to 1 ml, with about 10 μL to 500 μL being preferred As will be appreciated by those in the art, depending on the experimental conditions and assay, smaller or larger volumes may be used
In some embodiments, the detection chamber and electrode are part of a cartridge that can be placed into a device comprising electronic components (an AC/DC voltage source, an ammeter, a processor, a read-out display, temperature controller, light source, etc ) In this embodiment, the interconnections from each electrode are positioned such that upon insertion of the cartridge into the device, connections between the electrodes and the electronic components are established
Detection electrodes on circuit board material (or other substrates) are generally prepared in a wide variety of ways In general, high purity gold is used, and it may be deposited on a surface via vacuum deposition processes (sputtering and evaporation) or solution deposition (electroplating or electroless processes) When electroplating is done, the substrate must initially comprise a conductive material, fiberglass circuit boards are frequently provided with copper foil Frequently, depending on the substrate, an adhesion layer between the substrate and the gold in order to insure good mechanical stability is used Thus, preferred embodiments utilize a deposition layer of an adhesion metal such as chromium, titanium, titanium/tungsten, tantalum, nickel or palladium, which can be deposited as above for the gold When electroplated metal (either the adhesion metal or the electrode metal) is used, grain refining additives, frequently referred to in the trade as bnghteners, can optionally be added to alter surface deposition properties Preferred bnghteners are mixtures of organic and inorganic species, with cobalt and nickel being preferred
In general, the adhesion layer is from about 100 A thick to about 25 microns (1000 microinches) The
If the adhesion metal is electrochemically active, the electrode metal must be coated at a thickness that prevents "bleed-through", if the adhesion metal is not electrochemically active, the electrode metal may be thinner Generally, the electrode metal (preferably gold) is deposited at thicknesses ranging from about 500 A to about 5 microns (200 microinches), with from about 30 microinches to about 50 microinches being preferred In general, the gold is deposited to make electrodes ranging in size from about 5 microns to about 5 mm in diameter, with about 100 to 250 microns being preferred The detection electrodes thus formed are then preferably cleaned and SAMs added, as is discussed below
Thus, the present invention provides methods of making a substrate comprising a plurality of gold electrodes The methods first comprise coating an adhesion metal, such as nickel or palladium (optionally with bnghtener), onto the substrate Electroplating is preferred The electrode metal, preferably gold, is then coated (again, with electroplating preferred) onto the adhesion metal Then the patterns of the device comprising the electrodes and their associated interconnections are made using lithographic techniques, particularly photolithographic techniques as are known in the art, and wet chemical etching Frequently, a non-conductive chemically resistive insulating material such as solder mask or plastic is laid down using these photolithographic techniques, leaving only the electrodes and a connection point to the leads exposed, the leads themselves are generally coated
The methods continue with the addition of SAMs In a preferred embodiment, drop deposition techniques are used to add the required chemistry, i e the monolayer forming species, one of which is preferably a capture ligand comprising species Drop deposition techniques are well known for making "spot" arrays This is done to add a different composition to each electrode, i e to make an array comprising different capture ligands Alternatively, the SAM species may be identical for each electrode, and this may be accomplished using a drop deposition technique or the immersion of the entire substrate or a surface of the substrate into the solution
When a two electrode system is used, a preferred embodiment utilizes a porous detection electrode positioned between the first and the second electrophoresis electrodes, such that the target must "go through" the detection electrode, and thus maximizes the contact of the target analyte and the detection electrode For example, polycarbonate microporous membranes are gold sputter coated for electron microscope analysis Alternatively, gold coated polyanihne can be used Thus, gold electrodes with very uniform pore sizes, ranging from 0 01 to 20 urn can be made Similarly, silicon wafers with 10 urn pores have been developed for use as a genosensor that enhance capture of the target sequence by 700 fold By adjusting the flow rate, pad area, pore diameter, depth, and electrophoretic parameters, virtually 100 percent of the target analyte in the sample may be bound to the detection electrode
It should also be noted that a number of electrophoretic steps may be used, for example, the components of the system may be added sequentially, with an electrophoresis step after each addition to transport the reagents down to the detection electrode Similarly, electrophoresis may be used to effect "washing" steps, wherein excess reagents (non-bound target molecules or non-bound extra binding ligand components, etc ) are driven away from the detection electrode Thus any combination of electrophoresis steps may be used In addition, the time of the electrophoretic steps may be altered
In addition, as is outlined herein, electrophoresis steps can be combined with other techniques to concentrate analytes at the detection electrode surface For example, as is shown in Figure 13, the system can be configured to allow flow of the sample past the detection electrode in one direction, coupled with electrophoretic flow in the opposite direction, thus effectively concentrating the target analyte while allowing other sample components (particularly uncharged components or components with a charge opposite to the analyte) to be "washed" away In this embodiment, the strength of the electrophoretic field is adjusted based on the size and charge of the target, such that the target remains relatively immobilized at the detection electrode
In a preferred embodiment, concentration of the target analyte is accomplished using at least one volume exclusion agent in the assay reagent mix In this embodiment, the inclusion of a volume exclusion agent, which can absorb solvent and small molecules such as ions, but excludes larger molecules such as target analytes, concentrates the target analyte to smaller apparent volumes, and thus decreasing the effective diffusional volume that the target analyte experiences, thus increasing the likelihood of the target finding a capture ligand As will be appreciated by those in the art, the volume exclusion agents may not necessarily concentrate the sample close to the detection electrode, rather, they decrease the effective diffusional volume that the target analyte experiences or resides within
Thus, the methods of the invention include adding at least one volume exclusion agent to the array mixture As will be appreciated by those in the art, this can be done at virtually any step of the assay, including premixture of the exclusion agent with the sample, prior to the addition of additional reagents (such as label probes, etc ), the addition of the exclusion agent with one or more other assay reagents, or after the addition of the assay reagents Alternatively, the detection chamber may be precoated with a volume exclusion agent (for example agarose, sephadex, sepharose, polyacrylamide, etc ) that will swell in the presence of the sample In some embodiments, a membrane impermeable to the target analyte may be used to separate the volume exclusion agent from the detection electrode can be used Similarly, other components of the system may be coated with swellable volume exclusion agents, such as the magnetic particles described herein In general, adding the agent with the other assay reagents is preferable Once added, there is generally an incubation step as will be appreciated by those in the art
Suitable volume exclusion agents are known in the art, and include, but are not limited to, dextran, dextran sulfate, chonchritm sulfate, polyethylene glycol, polysulfonate, hepaπn sulfate, hespan, high molecular weight nucleic acid, etc See for example Amasino, Anal Chem 152 304 (1986), Wetmur, Biopolymers 14 2517 (1975), Renz et al , Nucl Acid Res 12 3435 (1984), Wahl et al , PNAS USA 75 3683 (1979), and Gingeras et al , Nucl Acid Res 15 5373 (1987), all of which are expressly incorporated by reference In addition, as will be appreciated by those in the art, mixtures of these agents may also be done It should be noted that while volume exclusion is a concentration step, but also that the exclusion agent may be considered a hybridization accelerator, as outlined below In a preferred embodiment, concentration of the target analyte is done by precipitating the target analyte This is particularly effective for nucleic acids As has been shown previously, precipitation of nucleic acids can increase the rate of hybridization by 50 to 100 fold, see EP 0 229 442 A1 , hereby expressly incorporated by reference As above, precipitation is a concentration step, but the precipitating agent may be considered a hybridization accelerator, as outlined below In a preferred embodiment, conditions are selected that precipitate double stranded nucleic acid but not single stranded nucleic acid, as this provides a strong driving force and cuts down on non-specific losses
Suitable nucleic acid precipitating agents include, but are not limited to, salts which contain at least one of the stronger salting out cation or anion groups (including the alkali metal salts and ammonium salts of S04, P04, Li and COOH), organic compounds that are miscible with the reaction solution and which have precipitating or salting out properties, including but not limited to, detergent (see Pontius et al , PNAS USA 88 8237 (1991 ), hereby incorporated by reference), dihydroxybenezene, Sarkosyl (N- laurosarconsine sodium salt), sodium dodecyl sulfate, sodium dnsobutyl sulfosuccinate and sodium tetradecyl sulfate Suitable concentrations of each agent are described in the incorporated references
It should be noted that in some applications as outlined below, detergents need not actually precipitate the nucleic acid but rather are added as hybridization accelerators
In addition, as described in EP 0 229 442 A1 , additional reagents may be added, including, but not limited to, EGTA, EDTA, SDS, SK, PK, EtOH, urea, guanid e HCI, glycogen and dilute amphyl
Furthermore, known concentrations of at least one nucleic acid denaturing agents such as alcohol may be added
As above, the addition of the nucleic acid precipitating agent can be done at virtually any step of the assay, including premixture of the agent with the sample, prior to the addition of additional reagents
(such as label probes, etc ), the addition of the agent with one or more other assay reagents, or after the addition of the assay reagents In general, adding the agent with the other assay reagents is preferable Again, once added, there is generally an incubation step as will be appreciated by those in the art
In a preferred embodiment, the concentrating is done by including at least two reagents that form two separable solution phases, such that the target analyte concentrates in one of the phases or at the interface As is known in the art, if a sample is subjected to two separable solution phases an analyte may be driven from one phase to another and therefore become concentrated in one phase, or, in some circumstances, concentration can occur at the interface between the two phases See for example Albertsson et al , Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 103 1-12 (1965), Kohne et al , Biochem 16(24) 5329 (1977), Muller, Partitioning of Nucleic Acids, Ch 7 in Partitioning in Aqueous Two-Phase Systems. Academic Press, 1985), and Muller et al , Anal Biochem 118 269 (1981 ), all of which are expressly incorporated by reference Thus, by configuring the sample volume, the volume of each phase, the detection electrode chamber and the position of the detection electrode, good concentration at the electrode may be achieved As shown in Muller, Partitioning of Nucleic Acids, Ch 7 in Partitioning in Aqueous Two-Phase Systems, Academic Press, (1985) and Albertsson, supra, partitioning is effected by electrolyte composition, including both the ionic strength and the kinds of ions, polymer concentration, the size of the nucleic acids, the structure and/or complexity of the nucleic acids, and the presence or absence of certain ligands
In a preferred embodiment, ligands can be included in the partitioning mixtures to effect partitioning
As shown in both Muller et al references, the inclusion of ligands that bind to nucleic acids can effect partitioning Thus for example the use of nucleic acid binding dyes covalently bound to heteroalkyl chains such as PEG can strongly raise the partition coefficients See Muller et al , Anal Biochem 118 269 (1981 ), Muller et al , Anal Biochem 118 267 (1981 ), and Muller et al , Eur J Biochem 128 231 (1982), all of which are expressly incorporated by reference
In a preferred embodiment, the phenol emulsion reassociation technique (PERT) is done, as described in Kohne et al , supra In this embodiment, phenol and water (or other aqueous solutions) are added in the right proportions and shaken or mixed, an emulsion forms When the shaking stops, the emulsion breaks and two phases form The addition of single stranded nucleic acid and salt to the aqueous phase results in the extremely fast formation of hybrids As outlined in Kohne, supra, the rate of nucleic acid hybridization depends on (a) the presence of the emulsion, (b) the type and concentration of ions, (c) an appropriate temperature of incubation, (d) the proper pH, (e) the rate and manner of agitating the emulsion, (f) the amount of phenol present, (g) the fragment size of the nucleic acid, (h) the complexity of the nucleic acid, and (I) the concentration of the nucleic acid
In addition, partitioning is also known for proteins, see Gmeitis et al , Anal Biochem 139 400 (1984), hereby expressly incorporated by reference
In a preferred embodiment, both volume exclusion and partitioning may be done simultaneously For example, dextran (3-8%) and PEG (3 5 to 6%) can be mixed and form separate phases Shifts in the ratios of cations or anions can transfer high molecular weight nucleic acids from one phase to another and induce duplex formation
In a preferred embodiment, the concentration step is done using shuttle particles In general, this technique may be described as follows Shuttle particles that will either settle by gravity onto the detection electrode (for example when the detection electrode is at the "bottom" of the chamber), float (for example when the detection electrode is at the "top" of the chamber) or can be induced to associate with the detection electrode (for example through the use of magnetic particles) are used These shuttle particles comprise binding ligands that will associate with the target analyte(s) in the assay solution, generally but not always non-specifically, and then shuttle the target analytes to the detection electrode, where they can be released to bind to the capture binding ligand (either directly or indirectly, as outlined below) As will be appreciated by those in the art, the shuttle binding ligands preferably interact less strongly with the target analytes than the components of the assay complex, i e the capture binding ligand That is, the interaction with the shuttle particle must be weak enough to allow release of the target analytes for binding to the detection electrode
In a preferred embodiment, the target analyte is a nucleic acid and the shuttle particles may be configured in a number of ways In one system, the shuttle particles comprise generally short (i e 4 to 10, although depending on the temperature used, they may be longer) nucleic acid probes that can bind the target analytes These may be either specific, i e contain short sequences specific to the target analyte(s) of interest, or non-specific, le random probes that will shuttle all the nucleic acid in the sample to the surface The attachment of nucleic acids to particles is known, see for example U S S N 60/105,875 and CHAD MIRKIN STUFF Similarly, for non-nucleic acid targets, ligands with varying binding affinities can be used, for example, a weakly binding antibody to a protein target may be attached to the bead, and a stronger affinity antibody may serve as the capture ligand on the surface Alternatively, solution changes may be used to drive the transfer from the bead to the surface
Alternatively, for both nucleic acids and other types of analytes including proteins, the particles may be modified (for example by deπvativization with amme moieties (such as lysine moieties) or carboxy groups) to contain a charge for the electrostatic interaction of the target and the particle
In a preferred embodiment, again when the target analytes are nucleic acids, the shuttle particles may contain nucleic acid binding components, that bind to either single stranded or double stranded nucleic acids For example, particles comprising tercalators are known, see U S Patent 5,582,984, hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety Similarly, particles comprising single-stranded or double- stranded binding proteins can be made Once at the detection surface, the target analytes may be released using known techniques, including heat, pH changes, salt changes, etc It should be noted that these particles may have use in sample preparation, as the particles can bind up all the target analyte, allowing the remaining sample to be washed away or removed, or the particles comprising the target analyte to be removed from the sample
In a preferred embodiment, the surface of the electrode, or of the substrate as described herein, may be altered to increase binding and/or reduce the effective diffusional space for the target analyte. That is, reducing the diffusional space from three dimensions (the detection chamber) to two dimensions (the detection surface) will significantly increase the kinetics of binding. This reduction can be accomplished in several ways. For example, in a preferred embodiment, the terminal groups of the SAM may be modified to comprise electrostatic groups of opposite charge from the target analyte. Thus, the time that a particular target molecule associates with the surface is increased, and diffusion preferably occurs in two dimensions rather than three. This effectively removes the target analytes from the diffusion layer over the detection surface, thus forming a gradient that brings new target analytes down into the diffusion layer. Thus, for example, cation-terminated passivation agents may be used, such as HS-CH2-NR3 + Alternatively, the entire substrate of the detection chamber (i.e. the areas around the individual electrodes) may be coated with weakly binding ligands, similar to the shuttle particles described herein, forming a "lawn" of binding ligands. For example, oligonucleotide probes, that will either specifically bind target sequences or are relatively short non-specific sequences, can be used on the surface. Upon association of a target sequence with these surface probes, diffusion via equilibrium binding and release will allow two dimensional diffusion rather than three dimensional diffusion. In this embodiment, what is important is that the interaction between the surface ligands and the target analytes is weaker than that of the capture ligands, such that binding to the capture ligands is preferred. This can be controlled in the case of nucleic acids using probe length; capture probes will generally be longer than surface probes. As will be appreciated by those in the art, these techniques may be done alone or in addition to any of the other acceleration techniques outlined herein.
In addition, as is more fully described below, particles may also be used as "mixing particles", that serve to stir the solution near the detection electrode and thus increase hybridization
In a preferred embodiment, the binding acceleration is done by configuring the system to maximize the amount of target analyte that can bind to the detection electrode in a given time period This may be done for example by flowing or exposing a large volume of sample containing the target analyte past the detection electrode such that the target analytes have a high probability of associating with the detection electrode
Accordingly, in a preferred embodiment, the methods include flowing the sample containing the target analyte(s) past a detection electrode to form assay complexes In this embodiment, the concentration of the target analyte occurs as a result of a large volume of sample being contacted with the detection electrode per unit time, and also decreases the binding times as compared to a stagnant sample
Thus, in a preferred embodiment, as outlined above for electrophoresis, the device comprising the detection electrode can be configured to have the sample flow past or through the detection electrode Thus, a preferred embodiment utilizes a porous electrode such as a gold electrode, as outlined above, positioned in a sample flow channel See for example W095/11755, incorporated by reference The sample may additionally be recirculated as necessary Rotating disc electrodes are also preferred
Thus, in a preferred embodiment, the detection electrode and surrounding area is configured to result in mixing of the sample, which can serve to disturb this diffusion layer and allow greater access to the surface For example, in one embodiment, the detection electrode is placed in a narrow sample channel Thus, essentially, the detection electrode is a band or zone around the perimeter of the channel Again, as outlined above, re rculation can also occur
In an alternative embodiment, the detection electrode is configured with respect to the chamber such that the flow of the sample past the electrode causes mixing or sample turbulence For example, in one embodiment the detection electrode is "sunken" or "recessed" with respect to the chamber, such that the flow of the sample past the electrode causes mixing, see Figure 13 This effect may be enhanced by including raised surfaces, sometimes referred to herein as "weirs", on the edges of the electrode (including sunken electrodes) that cause mixing
In addition to or instead of any of the methods disclosed herein, a preferred embodiment utilizes particles as "mixing balls" By "particle" or "microparticle" or "nanoparticle" or "bead" or "microsphere" herein is meant microparticulate matter As will be appreciated by those in the art, the particles can comprise a wide variety of materials depending on their use, including, but not limited to, cross-linked starch, dextrans, cellulose, proteins, organic polymers including styrene polymers including polystyrene and methylstyrene as well as other styrene co-polymers, plastics, glass, ceramics, acrylic polymers, magnetically responsive materials, colloids, thoπa sol, carbon graphite, titanium dioxide, nylon, latex, and teflon may all be used "Microsphere Detection Guide" from Bangs Laboratories,
Fishers IN is a helpful guide Preferred embodiments utilize magnetic particles as outlined below In addition, in some instances, the mixing particle need not comprise microparticulate matter, for example, for gravity mixing (i e for mixing based on agitation of the device), any component with a density different from the sample can be used, air bubbles can be used for example as mixing particles
In other embodiments, the mixing particles may be chosen to have a large dielectric constant such that the particles can be moved by the application of an electromagnetic field gradient as could be produced using focused light or a diverging radio frequency (rf) field The particles could also, in some instances, comprising diamagnetic materials, Such particles would not be affected substantially by the application of a linear magnetic field but could be moved by the application of a non-linear magnetic field as might be applied using a non-linear magnet or using a large linear magnet combined with small ferro-magnetic or paramagnetic inclusions in the chamber
The size of the particles will depend on their composition The particles need not be spherical, irregular particles may be used In addition, the particles may be porous, thus increasing the surface area of the particle available for attachment of moieties In general, the size of the particles will vary with their composition, for example, magnetic particles are generally bigger than colloid particles Thus, the particles have diameters ranging from 1- 5 nm (colloids) to 200 μm (magnetic particles)
As will be appreciated by those in the art, the particles can be added at any point during the assay, including before, during or after the addition of the sample
The particles help stir the sample to effect more target binding This may be accomplished in a number of ways For example, particles can be added to the detection chamber and the entire chamber or device agitated In a preferred embodiment, magnetic microparticles such as are known in the art may be used In a preferred embodiment, the first particle is a magnetic particle or a particle that can be induced to display magnetic properties By "magnetic" herein is meant that the particle is attracted in a magnetic field, including ferromagnetic, paramagnetic, and diamagnetic In this embodiment, the particles are preferably from about 0 001 to about 200 μm in diameter, with from about 0 05 to about 200 μm preferred, from about 0 1 to about 100 μm being particularly preferred, and from about 0 5 to about 10 μm being especially preferred
In this embodiment, it may be preferred to vary the direction and/or strength of the magnetic field, for example using electromagnets positioned around the detection chamber to move the beads in a variety of directions Thus, for example, the use of magnetic shuttle particles as both shuttle and mixing particles can be accomplished by multiple magnetic fields, one that brings the particles down to the detection electrode, and one that agitates the beads on the surface of the detection electrode Alternatively, non-magnetic particles may be added to augment the flow-type mixing outlined above
The size of the microparticles will vary as outlined herein Microparticles of 4 5 urn have been observed to rest in solution on a solid support, relatively unaffected by diffusion, where as in the same sample 1 0 urn particles remain suspended away from the solid surface and appear to follow the constraints of diffusion Thus, the larger particles may move freely within the diffusion layer when combined with flow, to convert laminar flow to turbulent flow
In addition, the particles may be chemically altered, for example with volume exclusion agents or hybridization accelerators as outlined herein to combine the acceleration effects As will be appreciated by those in the art, the shuttle particles outlined above may also serve a dual function as mixing particles
Thus, the present invention provides compositions comprising detection electrodes and mixing particles, and methods of detecting target analytes using the compositions
In addition, as is known in the art, one of the rate-limiting steps for target capture on a surface is believed to be the diffusion of molecules across the boundary layer near the solid phase This boundary layer does not appear to mix well even during flow of the sample This boundary layer and its statistical depth is a function of the properties of the solvent, the solid and the solute Thus, altering these parameters may serve to "shrink" the boundary layer the target analyte must pass to reach the surface For example, adjusting the organic content of the solute may make the analyte more accessable to the surface Other parameters that can effect this are viscosity, surface charge, target secondary and tertiary structure, and temperature
In a preferred embodiment, when the target analyte is a nucleic acid, binding acceleration is done by using a hybridization accelerator In this embodiment, the binding of the target analyte to the detection electrode is done in the presence of a hybridization accelerator As outlined herein, there are a variety of hybridization accelerators that actually increase the rate of nucleic acid hybridization, including, but not limited to, nucleic acid binding proteins, salts, polyvalent ions and detergents
In a preferred embodiment, the hybridization accelerator is a nucleic acid binding protein As has been shown in the art, certain binding proteins increase the rate of hybridization of single stranded nucleic acids, see Pontius et al , PNAS USA 87 8403 (1990) and U S Patent 5,015,569, both of which are incorporated by reference Thus, for example, hnRNP (A1 hnRNP) and recA are all known to increase the annealhng rate of double stranded nucleic acids Other single stranded nucleic acid binding proteins and major and minor groove binding proteins may also be used Suitable conditions are known or elucidated from the prior art
In a preferred embodiment, the hybridization accelerator is a salt As is known in the art, the inclusion of high concentrations of salt can increase the rate of hybridization, see EP 0 229442 A1 , hereby incorporated by reference Generally, concentrations of salt up to roughly 2 M can increase the rate of hybridization Suitable salts include, but are not limited to, sodium chloride, cesium chloride, sodium phosphate, sodium perchlorate, litium chloride, potassium chloride, sodium bromide, sodium sulfate and ammonium chloride
In a preferred embodiment, the hybridization accelerator is a polyvalent ion Ions of higher valence such as Mg++ can improve the affinity of nucleic acid strands via electrostatic interactions and thus accelerate hybridization In addition, these polyvalent ions can potentially affect packaging on the surface, that is, as the density of nucleic acid on the surface increases, a negative charge accumulates that may inhibit subsequent binding of more nucleic acid Thus, the inclusion of a polyvalent ion that can serve as a "salt bridge" may serve to increase hybridization Mn++ can have a similar effect
In addition, certain ions such as Mg++ have been shown to improve binding in RNA by another method RNA forms loops aroung Mg++ ions and finds a stable secondary structure coordinating with Mg++ If Mg++ is removed the RNA changes to another structure which is also stable However, the transition phase may be a period of enhanced accessibility for incoming probes Thus, adding sequential rounds of Mg++ followed by EDTA or a similar chelator can cycle through this transition phase and enhance binding
In a preferred embodiment, the hybridization accelerator is a detergent, see Pontius et al , PNAS USA 88 8237 (1991 ), hereby incorporated by reference In this case, certain detergents can increase the rate of hybridization by as much as 104 fold Suitable detergents include, but are not limited to, cationic detergents including, but not limited to, dodecyltrimethylammonium bromide (DTAB) and cetyltπmethylammonium bromide (CTAB), and other variants of the quaternary amme tetramethylammonium bromide (TMAB)
All of the above methods are directed to increasing the amount of target analyte accessible for binding and detection on the detection electrode within a given period of time The detection systems of the present invention are based on the incorporation of an electron transfer moiety (ETM) into an assay complex as the result of target analyte binding
In general, there are two basic detection mechanisms In a preferred embodiment, detection of an ETM is based on electron transfer through the stacked π-orbitals of double stranded nucleic acid This basic mechanism is described in U S Patent Nos 5,591 ,578, 5,770,369, 5,705,348, and PCT US97/20014 and is termed "mechanιsm-1" herein Briefly, previous work has shown that electron transfer can proceed rapidly through the stacked π-orbitals of double stranded nucleic acid, and significantly more slowly through single-stranded nucleic acid Accordingly, this can serve as the basis of an assay Thus, by adding ETMs (either covalently to one of the strands or non-covalently to the hybridization complex through the use of hybridization indicators, described below) to a nucleic acid that is attached to a detection electrode via a conductive ohgomer, electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode, through the nucleic acid and conductive ohgomer, may be detected This general idea is depicted in Figure 3 This may be done where the target analyte is a nucleic acid, alternatively, a non-nucleic acid target analyte is used, with an optional capture binding ligand (to attach the target analyte to the detection electrode) and a soluble binding ligand that carries a nucleic acid "tail", that can then bind either directly or indirectly to a detection probe on the surface to effect detection This general idea is depicted in Figure 3C
Alternatively, the ETM can be detected, not necessarily via electron transfer through nucleic acid, but rather can be directly detected using conductive ohgomers, that is, the electrons from the ETMs need not travel through the stacked π orbitals in order to generate a signal Instead, the presence of ETMs on the surface of a SAM, that comprises conductive ohgomers, can be directly detected This basic idea is termed "mechanιsm-2" herein Thus, upon binding of a target analyte, a soluble binding ligand comprising an ETM is brought to the surface, and detection of the ETM can proceed The role of the SAM comprising the conductive ohgomers is to shield the electrode from solution components and reducing the amount of non-specific binding to the electrodes Viewed differently, the role of the binding ligand is to provide specificity for a recruitment of ETMs to the surface, where they can be detected using conductive ohgomers with electronically exposed termini This general idea is shown in Figures 4, 5 and 6
Thus, in either embodiment, as is more fully outlined below, an assay complex is formed that contains an ETM, which is then detected using the detection electrode
The present system finds particular utility in array formats, i e wherein there is a matrix of addressable detection electrodes (herein generally referred to "pads", "addresses" or "micro-locations") By "array" herein is meant a plurality of capture ligands in an array format, the size of the array will depend on the composition and end use of the array Arrays containing from about 2 different capture ligands to many thousands can be made Generally, the array will comprise from two to as many as 100,000 or more, depending on the size of the electrodes, as well as the end use of the array Preferred ranges are from about 2 to about 10,000, with from about 5 to about 1000 being preferred, and from about 10 to about 100 being particularly preferred In some embodiments, the compositions of the invention may not be in array format, that is, for some embodiments, compositions comprising a single capture ligand may be made as well In addition, in some arrays, multiple substrates may be used, either of different or identical compositions Thus for example, large arrays may comprise a plurality of smaller substrates
The detection electrode comprises a self-assembled monolayer (SAM) By "monolayer" or "self- assembled monolayer" or "SAM" herein is meant a relatively ordered assembly of molecules spontaneously chemisorbed on a surface, in which the molecules have a preferred orientation relative to each other (e g are oriented approximately parallel to each other) and a preferred orientation relative to the surface (e g roughly perpendicular to it) Each of the molecules includes a functional group that adheres to the surface, and a portion that interacts with neighboring molecules in the monolayer to form the relatively ordered array A "mixed" monolayer comprises a heterogeneous monolayer, that is, where at least two different molecules make up the monolayer The SAM may comprise conductive ohgomers alone, or a mixture of conductive ohgomers and insulators As outlined herein, the efficiency of target analyte binding (for example, oligonucleotide hybridization) may increase when the analyte is at a distance from the electrode Similarly, non-specific binding of biomolecules, including the target analytes, to an electrode is generally reduced when a monolayer is present Thus, a monolayer facilitates the maintenance of the analyte away from the electrode surface In addition, a monolayer serves to keep extraneous electroactive species away from the surface of the electrode Thus, this layer helps to prevent electrical contact between the electrodes and the ETMs, or between the electrode and extraneous electroactive species within the solvent Such contact can result in a direct "short circuit" or an indirect short circuit via charged species which may be present in the sample Accordingly, in one embodiment, the monolayer is preferably tightly packed in a uniform layer on the electrode surface, such that a minimum of "holes" exist In this embodiment, the monolayer thus serves as a physical barrier to block solvent accesibihty to the electrode
In a preferred embodiment, the monolayer comprises conductive ohgomers By "conductive ohgomer" herein is meant a substantially conducting ohgomer, preferably linear, some embodiments of which are referred to in the literature as "molecular wires" By "substantially conducting" herein is meant that the ohgomer is capable of transfenng electrons at 100 Hz Generally, the conductive ohgomer has substantially overlapping π-orbitals, i e conjugated π-orbitals, as between the monomeπc units of the conductive ohgomer, although the conductive ohgomer may also contain one or more sigma (σ) bonds
Additionally, a conductive ohgomer may be defined functionally by its ability to inject or receive electrons into or from an associated ETM Furthermore, the conductive ohgomer is more conductive than the insulators as defined herein Additionally, the conductive ohgomers of the invention are to be distinguished from electroactive polymers, that themselves may donate or accept electrons
In a preferred embodiment, the conductive ohgomers have a conductivity, S, of from between about 10"6 to about 104 Ω 1cm \ with from about 105 to about 103 Ω cm 1 being preferred, with these S values being calculated for molecules ranging from about 20A to about 200A As described below, insulators have a conductivity S of about 107 Ω 1cm 1 or lower, with less than about 108 Ω 1cm 1 being preferred See generally Gardner et al , Sensors and Actuators A 51 (1995) 57-66, incorporated herein by reference Desired characteristics of a conductive ohgomer include high conductivity, sufficient solubility in organic solvents and/or water for synthesis and use of the compositions of the invention, and preferably chemical resistance to reactions that occur i) during binding ligand synthesis (i e nucleic acid synthesis, such that nucleosides containing the conductive ohgomers may be added to a nucleic acid synthesizer during the synthesis of the compositions of the invention, n) during the attachment of the conductive ohgomer to an electrode, or m) during binding assays In addition, conductive ohgomers that will promote the formation of self-assembled monolayers are preferred
The ohgomers of the invention comprise at least two monomeric subunits, as described herein As is described more fully below, ohgomers include homo- and hetero-ohgomers, and include polymers
In a preferred embodiment, the conductive ohgomer has the structure depicted in Structure 1
Structure 1
Figure imgf000034_0001
As will be understood by those in the art, all of the structures depicted herein may have additional atoms or structures, i e the conductive ohgomer of Structure 1 may be attached to ETMs, such as electrodes, transition metal complexes, organic ETMs, and metallocenes, and to binding ligands such as nucleic acids, or to several of these Unless otherwise noted, the conductive ohgomers depicted herein will be attached at the left side to an electrode, that is, as depicted in Structure 1 , the left "Y" is connected to the electrode as described herein If the conductive ohgomer is to be attached to a binding ligand, the right "Y", if present, is attached to the binding ligand such as a nucleic acid, either directly or through the use of a linker, as is described herein
In this embodiment, Y is an aromatic group, n is an integer from 1 to 50, g is either 1 or zero, e is an integer from zero to 10, and m is zero or 1 When g is 1 , B-D is a bond able to conjugate with neighboring bonds (herein referred to as a Aconjugated bond@), preferably selected from acetylene, alkene, substituted alkene, amide, azo, -C=N- (including -N=C-, -CR=N- and -N=CR-), -Sι=Sι-, and - Sι=C- (including -C=Sι-, -Sι=CR- and -CR=Sι-) When g is zero, e is preferably 1 , D is preferably carbonyl, or a heteroatom moiety, wherein the heteroatom is selected from oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen silicon or phosphorus Thus, suitable heteroatom moieties include, but are not limited to, -NH and - NR, wherein R is as defined herein, substituted sulfur, sulfonyl (-S02-) sulfoxide (-SO-), phosphme oxide (-PO- and -RPO-), and thiophosphine (-PS- and -RPS-) However, when the conductive ohgomer is to be attached to a gold electrode, as outlined below, sulfur derivatives are not preferred By "aromatic group" or grammatical equivalents herein is meant an aromatic monocychc or polycyclic hydrocarbon moiety generally containing 5 to 14 carbon atoms (although larger polycyclic rings structures may be made) and any carbocy c ketone or thioketone derivative thereof, wherein the carbon atom with the free valence is a member of an aromatic ring Aromatic groups include arylene groups and aromatic groups with more than two atoms removed For the purposes of this application aromatic includes heterocycle "Heterocycle" or "heteroaryl" means an aromatic group wherein 1 to 5 of the indicated carbon atoms are replaced by a heteroatom chosen from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, boron and silicon wherein the atom with the free valence is a member of an aromatic ring, and any heterocychc ketone and thioketone derivative thereof Thus, heterocycle includes thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, pyπmidinyl, oxalyl, mdolyl, puπnyl, qumolyl, isoqumolyl, thiazolyl, imidozyl, etc
Importantly, the Y aromatic groups of the conductive ohgomer may be different, i e the conductive ohgomer may be a heteroohgomer That is, a conductive ohgomer may comprise a ohgomer of a single type of Y groups, or of multiple types of Y groups
The aromatic group may be substituted with a substitution group, generally depicted herein as R R groups may be added as necessary to affect the packing of the conductive ohgomers, i e R groups may be used to alter the association of the ohgomers in the monolayer R groups may also be added to 1) alter the solubility of the ohgomer or of compositions containing the ohgomers, 2) alter the conjugation or electrochemical potential of the system, and 3) alter the charge or characteristics at the surface of the monolayer
In a preferred embodiment, when the conductive ohgomer is greater than three subunits, R groups are preferred to increase solubility when solution synthesis is done However, the R groups, and their positions, are chosen to minimally effect the packing of the conductive ohgomers on a surface, particularly within a monolayer, as described below In general, only small R groups are used within the monolayer, with larger R groups generally above the surface of the monolayer Thus for example the attachment of methyl groups to the portion of the conductive ohgomer within the monolayer to increase solubility is preferred, with attachment of longer alkoxy groups, for example, C3 to C10, is preferably done above the monolayer surface In general, for the systems described herein, this generally means that attachment of stencally significant R groups is not done on any of the first two or three ohgomer subunits, depending on the average length of the molecules making up the monolayer
Suitable R groups include, but are not limited to, hydrogen, alkyl, alcohol, aromatic, ammo, amido, nitro, ethers, esters, aldehydes, sulfonyl, silicon moieties, halogens, sulfur containing moieties, phosphorus containing moieties, and ethylene glycols In the structures depicted herein, R is hydrogen when the position is unsubstituted It should be noted that some positions may allow two substitution groups, R and R', in which case the R and R' groups may be either the same or different
By "alkyl group" or grammatical equivalents herein is meant a straight or branched chain alkyl group, with straight chain alkyl groups being preferred If branched, it may be branched at one or more positions, and unless specified, at any position The alkyl group may range from about 1 to about 30 carbon atoms (C1 -C30), with a preferred embodiment utilizing from about 1 to about 20 carbon atoms (C1 -C20), with about C1 through about C12 to about C15 being preferred, and C1 to C5 being particularly preferred, although in some embodiments the alkyl group may be much larger Also included within the definition of an alkyl group are cycloalkyl groups such as C5 and C6 rings, and heterocychc rings with nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus Alkyl also includes heteroalkyl, with heteroatoms of sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen, and sihcone being preferred Alkyl includes substituted alkyl groups By "substituted alkyl group" herein is meant an alkyl group further comprising one or more substitution moieties "R' , as defined above
By "ammo groups" or grammatical equivalents herein is meant -NH2, -NHR and -NR2 groups, with R being as defined herein
By "nitro group" herein is meant an -N02 group
By "sulfur containing moieties" herein is meant compounds containing sulfur atoms, including but not limited to, thia-, thio- and sulfo- compounds, thiols (-SH and -SR), and sulfides (-RSR-) By "phosphorus containing moieties" herein is meant compounds containing phosphorus, including, but not limited to, phosphines and phosphates By "silicon containing moieties" herein is meant compounds containing silicon
By "ether" herein is meant an -O-R group Preferred ethers include alkoxy groups, with -0-(CH2)2CH3 and -0-(CH2)4CH3 being preferred
By "ester" herein is meant a -COOR group
By "halogen" herein is meant bromine, iodine, chlorine, or fluorine Preferred substituted alkyls are partially or fully halogenated alkyls such as CF3, etc
By "aldehyde" herein is meant -RCHO groups
By "alcohol" herein is meant -OH groups, and alkyl alcohols -ROH By "amido" herein is meant -RCONH- or RCONR- groups
By "ethylene glycol" or "(poly)ethylene glycol" herein is meant a -(0-CH2-CH2)n- group, although each carbon atom of the ethylene group may also be singly or doubly substituted, i e -(0-CR2-CR2)n-, with R as described above Ethylene glycol derivatives with other heteroatoms in place of oxygen (i e -(N-
CH2-CH2)n- or -(S-CH2-CH2)n-, or with substitution groups) are also preferred
Preferred substitution groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, alkoxy groups such as -0-(CH2)2CH3 and -0-(CH2)4CH3 and ethylene glycol and derivatives thereof
Preferred aromatic groups include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, naphthalene, anthracene, phenanthrohne, pyrole, pyridme, thiophene, porphyrms, and substituted derivatives of each of these, included fused ring derivatives
In the conductive ohgomers depicted herein, when g is 1 , B-D is a bond linking two atoms or chemical moieties In a preferred embodiment, B-D is a conjugated bond, containing overlapping or conjugated π-orbitals
Preferred B-D bonds are selected from acetylene (-C^C-, also called alkyne or ethyne), alkene (- CH=CH-, also called ethylene), substituted alkene (-CR=CR-, -CH=CR- and -CR=CH-), amide (-NH-
CO- and -NR-CO- or -CO-NH- and -CO-NR-), azo (-N=N-), esters and thioesters (-CO-0-, -0-CO-, - CS-O- and -0-CS-) and other conjugated bonds such as (-CH=N-, -CR=N-, -N=CH- and -N=CR-), (- SιH=SιH-, -SιR=SιH-, -SιR=SιH-, and -SιR=SιR-), (-SιH=CH-, -SιR=CH-, -SιH=CR-, -SιR=CR-, - CH=SιH-, -CR=SιH-, -CH=SιR-, and -CR=SιR-) Particularly preferred B-D bonds are acetylene, alkene, amide, and substituted derivatives of these three, and azo Especially preferred B-D bonds are acetylene, alkene and amide The ohgomer components attached to double bonds may be in the trans or cis conformation, or mixtures Thus, either B or D may include carbon, nitrogen or silicon The substitution groups are as defined as above for R
When g=0 in the Structure 1 conductive ohgomer, e is preferably 1 and the D moiety may be carbonyl or a heteroatom moiety as defined above
As above for the Y rings, within any single conductive ohgomer, the B-D bonds (or D moieties, when g=0) may be all the same, or at least one may be different For example, when m is zero, the terminal B-D bond may be an amide bond, and the rest of the B-D bonds may be acetylene bonds Generally, when amide bonds are present, as few amide bonds as possible are preferable, but in some embodiments all the B-D bonds are amide bonds Thus, as outlined above for the Y rings, one type of B-D bond may be present in the conductive ohgomer within a monolayer as described below, and another type above the monolayer level, for example to give greater flexibility for nucleic acid hybridization when the nucleic acid is attached via a conductive ohgomer
In the structures depicted herein, n is an integer from 1 to 50, although longer ohgomers may also be used (see for example Schumm et al , Angew Chem Int Ed Engl 1994 33(13) 1360) Without being bound by theory it appears that for efficient hybridization of nucleic acids on a surface, the hybridization should occur at a distance from the surface, i e the kinetics of hybridization increase as a function of the distance from the surface, particularly for long ohgonucleotides of 200 to 300 basepairs Accordingly when a nucleic acid is attached via a conductive ohgomer, as is more fully described below, the length of the conductive ohgomer is such that the closest nucleotide of the nucleic acid is positioned from about 6A to about 10θA (although distances of up to 500A may be used) from the electrode surface, with from about 15A to about 60A being preferred and from about 25A to about 6θA also being preferred Accordingly, n will depend on the size of the aromatic group, but generally will be from about 1 to about 20, with from about 2 to about 15 being preferred and from about 3 to about 10 being especially preferred
In the structures depicted herein, m is either 0 or 1 That is, when m is 0, the conductive ohgomer may terminate in the B-D bond or D moiety, i e the D atom is attached to the nucleic acid either directly or via a linker In some embodiments, for example when the conductive ohgomer is attached to a phosphate of the nbose-phosphate backbone of a nucleic acid, there may be additional atoms, such as a linker, attached between the conductive ohgomer and the nucleic acid Additionally, as outlined below, the D atom may be the nitrogen atom of the ammo-modified nbose Alternatively, when m is 1 , the conductive ohgomer may terminate in Y, an aromatic group, i e the aromatic group is attached to the nucleic acid or linker
As will be appreciated by those in the art, a large number of possible conductive ohgomers may be utilized These include conductive ohgomers falling within the Structure 1 and Structure 8 formulas, as well as other conductive ohgomers, as are generally known in the art, including for example, compounds comprising fused aromatic rings or Teflon®-hke ohgomers, such as -(CF2)n-, -(CHF)n- and
-(CFR)n- See for example, Schumm et al , Angew Chem Intl Ed Engl 33 1361 (1994), Grosshenny et al , Platinum Metals Rev 40(1) 26-35 (1996), Tour, Chem Rev 96 537-553 (1996), Hsung et al , Organometal cs 144808-4815 (1995, and references cited therein, all of which are expressly incorporated by reference
Particularly preferred conductive ohgomers of this embodiment are depicted below Structure 2
Structure 2 is Structure 1 when g is 1 Preferred embodiments of Structure 2 include e is zero, Y is pyrole or substituted pyrole, e is zero, Y is thiophene or substituted thiophene, e is zero, Y is furan or substituted furan, e is zero, Y is phenyl or substituted phenyl, e is zero, Y is pyridme or substituted pyridme, e is 1 , B-D is acetylene and Y is phenyl or substituted phenyl (see Structure 4 below) A preferred embodiment of Structure 2 is also when e is one, depicted as Structure 3 below Structure 3
Figure imgf000039_0002
Preferred embodiments of Structure 3 are Y is phenyl or substituted phenyl and B-D is azo, Y is phenyl or substituted phenyl and B-D is acetylene, Y is phenyl or substituted phenyl and B-D is alkene,
Y is pyridme or substituted pyridme and B-D is acetylene, Y is thiophene or substituted thiophene and B-D is acetylene, Y is furan or substituted furan and B-D is acetylene, Y is thiophene or furan (or substituted thiophene or furan) and B-D are alternating alkene and acetylene bonds
Most of the structures depicted herein utilize a Structure 3 conductive ohgomer However, any
Structure 3 ohgomers may be substituted with any of the other structures depicted herein, i e Structure 1 or 8 ohgomer, or other conducting ohgomer, and the use of such Structure 3 depiction is not meant to limit the scope of the invention
Particularly preferred embodiments of Structure 3 include Structures 4, 5, 6 and 7, depicted below
Structure 4
Figure imgf000039_0003
Particularly preferred embodiments of Structure 4 include n is two, m is one, and R is hydrogen, n is three, m is zero, and R is hydrogen, and the use of R groups to increase solubility
Structure 5
Figure imgf000039_0004
When the B-D bond is an amide bond, as in Structure 5, the conductive ohgomers are pseudopeptide ohgomers Although the amide bond in Structure 5 is depicted with the carbonyl to the left, i e - CONH-, the reverse may also be used, i e -NHCO- Particularly preferred embodiments of Structure 5 include n is two, m is one, and R is hydrogen, n is three, m is zero, and R is hydrogen (in this embodiment, the terminal nitrogen (the D atom) may be the nitrogen of the ammo-modified nbose), and the use of R groups to increase solubility
Structure 6
Figure imgf000040_0001
Preferred embodiments of Structure 6 include the first n is two, second n is one, m is zero, and all R groups are hydrogen, or the use of R groups to increase solubility
Structure 7
Figure imgf000040_0002
Preferred embodiments of Structure 7 include the first n is three, the second n is from 1-3, with m being either 0 or 1 , and the use of R groups to increase solubility
In a preferred embodiment, the conductive ohgomer has the structure depicted in Structure 8
Structure 8
Figure imgf000040_0003
In this embodiment, C are carbon atoms, n is an integer from 1 to 50, m is 0 or 1 , J is a heteroatom selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen, silicon, phosphorus, sulfur, carbonyl or sulfoxide, and G is a bond selected from alkane, alkene or acetylene, such that together with the two carbon atoms the C-G-C group is an alkene (-CH=CH-), substituted alkene (-CR=CR-) or mixtures thereof (-CH=CR- or -CR=CH-), acetylene (-CΞC-), or alkane (-CR2-CR2-, with R being either hydrogen or a substitution group as described herein) The G bond of each subunit may be the same or different than the G bonds of other subunits, that is, alternating ohgomers of alkene and acetylene bonds could be used, etc However, when G is an alkane bond, the number of alkane bonds in the ohgomer should be kept to a minimum, with about six or less sigma bonds per conductive ohgomer being preferred Alkene bonds are preferred, and are generally depicted herein, although alkane and acetylene bonds may be substituted in any structure or embodiment described herein as will be appreciated by those in the art In some embodiments, for example when ETMs are not present, if m=0 then at least one of the G bonds is not an alkane bond
In a preferred embodiment, the m of Structure 8 is zero In a particularly preferred embodiment, m is zero and G is an alkene bond, as is depicted in Structure 9
Structure 9
Figure imgf000041_0001
The alkene ohgomer of structure 9, and others depicted herein, are generally depicted in the preferred trans configuration, although ohgomers of cis or mixtures of trans and cis may also be used As above, R groups may be added to alter the packing of the compositions on an electrode, the hydrophihcity or hydrophobicity of the ohgomer, and the flexibility, i e the rotational, torsional or longitudinal flexibility of the ohgomer n is as defined above
In a preferred embodiment, R is hydrogen, although R may be also alkyl groups and polyethylene glycols or derivatives
In an alternative embodiment, the conductive ohgomer may be a mixture of different types of ohgomers, for example of structures 1 and 8
The conductive ohgomers may or may not have terminal groups Thus, in a preferred embodiment, there is no additional terminal group, and the conductive ohgomer terminates with one of the groups depicted in Structures 1 to 9, for example, a B-D bond such as an acetylene bond Alternatively, in a preferred embodiment, a terminal group is added, sometimes depicted herein as "Q" A terminal group may be used for several reasons, for example, to contribute to the electronic availability of the conductive ohgomer for detection of ETMs, or to alter the surface of the SAM for other reasons, for example to prevent non-specific binding For example, when the target analyte is a nucleic acid, there may be negatively charged groups on the terminus to form a negatively charged surface such that when the nucleic acid is DNA or RNA the nucleic acid is repelled or prevented from lying down on the surface, to facilitate hybridization Preferred terminal groups include -NH2, -OH, -COOH, and alkyl groups such as -CH3, and (poly)alkyloxιdes such as (poly)ethylene glycol, with -OCH2CH2OH, - (OCH2CH20)2H, -(OCH2CH20)3H, and -(OCH2CH20)4H being preferred In one embodiment it is possible to use mixtures of conductive ohgomers with different types of terminal groups Thus, for example, some of the terminal groups may facilitate detection, and some may prevent non-specific binding
It will be appreciated that the monolayer may comprise different conductive ohgomer species, although preferably the different species are chosen such that a reasonably uniform SAM can be formed Thus, for example, when capture binding ligands such as nucleic acids are covalently attached to the electrode using conductive ohgomers, it is possible to have one type of conductive ohgomer used to attach the nucleic acid, and another type in the SAM Similarly, it may be desirable to have mixtures of different lengths of conductive ohgomers in the monolayer, to help reduce non-specific signals Thus, for example, preferred embodiments utilize conductive ohgomers that terminate below the surface of the rest of the monolayer, i e below the insulator layer, if used, or below some fraction of the other conductive ohgomers Similarly, the use of different conductive ohgomers may be done to facilitate monolayer formation or to make monolayers with altered properties
In a preferred embodiment, the monolayer may further comprise insulator moieties By "insulator" herein is meant a substantially nonconducting ohgomer, preferably linear By "substantially nonconducting" herein is meant that the insulator will not transfer electrons at 100 Hz The rate of electron transfer through the insulator is preferrably slower than the rate through the conductive ohgomers described herein
In a preferred embodiment, the insulators have a conductivity, S, of about 107 Ω 1cm 1 or lower, with less than about 10"8 Ω 1cm being preferred See generally Gardner et al , supra
Generally, insulators are alkyl or heteroalkyl ohgomers or moieties with sigma bonds, although any particular insulator molecule may contain aromatic groups or one or more conjugated bonds By "heteroalkyl" herein is meant an alkyl group that has at least one heteroatom, i e nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon or boron included in the chain Alternatively, the insulator may be quite similar to a conductive ohgomer with the addition of one or more heteroatoms or bonds that serve to inhibit or slow, preferably substantially, electron transfer
Suitable insulators are known in the art, and include, but are not limited to, -(CH2)n-, -(CRH)n-, and - (CR2)n-, ethylene glycol or derivatives using other heteroatoms in place of oxygen, i e nitrogen or sulfur (sulfur derivatives are not preferred when the electrode is gold)
As for the conductive ohgomers, the insulators may be substituted with R groups as defined herein to alter the packing of the moieties or conductive ohgomers on an electrode, the hydrophihcity or hydrophobicity of the insulator, and the flexibility i e the rotational, torsional or longitudinal flexibility of the insulator For example, branched alkyl groups may be used Similarly, the insulators may contain terminal groups, as outlined above, particularly to influence the surface of the monolayer
The length of the species making up the monolayer will vary as needed As outlined above, it appears that binding of target analytes (for example, hybridization of nucleic acids) is more efficient at a distance from the surface The species to which capture binding ligands are attached (as outlined below, these can be either insulators or conductive ohgomers) may be basically the same length as the monolayer forming species or longer than them, resulting in the capture binding ligands being more accessible to the solvent for hybridization In some embodiments, the conductive ohgomers to which the capture binding ligands are attached may be shorter than the monolayer
As will be appreciated by those in the art, the actual combinations and ratios of the different species making up the monolayer can vary widely, and will depend on whether mechanιsm-1 or -2 is used and, in the case of electrophoresis, whether a one electrode system or two electrode system is used, as is more fully outlined below Generally, three component systems are preferred for mechanιsm-2 systems, with the first species comprising a capture binding hgand containing species (termed a capture probe when the target analyte is a nucleic acid), attached to the electrode via either an insulator or a conductive ohgomer The second species are conductive ohgomers, and the third species are insulators In this embodiment, the first species can comprise from about 90% to about
1%, with from about 20% to about 40% being preferred When the target analytes are nucleic acids, from about 30% to about 40% is especially preferred for short oligonucleotide targets and from about 10% to about 20% is preferred for longer targets The second species can comprise from about 1 % to about 90%o, with from about 20% to about 90% being preferred, and from about 40% to about 60% being especially preferred The third species can comprise from about 1 % to about 90%, with from about 20% to about 40% being preferred, and from about 15% to about 30% being especially preferred To achieve these approximate proportions, preferred ratios of first second third species in SAM formation solvents are 2 2 1 for short targets, 1 3 1 for longer targets, with total thiol concentration (when used to attach these species, as is more fully outlined below) in the 500 μM to 1 mM range, and 833 μM being preferred
Alternatively, two component systems can be used In one embodiment, for use in either mechanism- 1 or mechanιsm-2 systems, the two components are the first and second species In this embodiment, the first species can comprise from about 1 % to about 90%, with from about 1% to about 40% being preferred, and from about 10% to about 40% being especially preferred The second species can comprise from about 1 % to about 90%, with from about 10% to about 60% being preferred, and from about 20% to about 40% being especially preferred Alternatively, for mechanιsm-1 systems, the two components are the first and the third species In this embodiment, the first species can comprise from about 1 % to about 90%, with from about 1 % to about 40% being preferred, and from about 10% to about 40% being especially preferred The second species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 10% to about 60% being preferred, and from about 20% to about 40% being especially preferred
In a preferred embodiment, the deposition of the SAM is done using aqueous solvents As is generally described in Steel et al , Anal Chem 70 4670 (1998), Herne et al , J Am Chem Soc 119 8916 (1997), and Fmklea, Electrochemistry of Organized Monolayers of Thiols and Related Molecules on Electrodes, from A J Bard, Electroanalvtical Chemistry A Series of Advances, Vol 20, Dekker N Y
1966-, all of which are expressly incorporated by reference, the deposition of the SAM-formmg species can be done out of aqueous solutions, frequently comprising salt
In addition, when electrophoresis systems are used, the composition and integrity of the monolayer may depend on whether a one electrode or two electrode system is used Thus, for example, if a one electrode system is used for both electrophoresis and detection, the configuration of the system will allow the electroactive charge carriers, if used, access to the electrode As will be appreciated by those in the art, if the chemistry of attachment of the conductive ohgomer is stable at the high voltages used to hydrolyze water, no electroactive charge carriers need be used This may be done in one of several ways In a preferred embodiment, the monolayer comprises a significant component of electronically exposed conductive ohgomers, a monolayer such as this effective raises the surface of the electrode, allowing the electroactive charge carriers indirect access to the electrode Alternatively, a poor monolayer may be used, i e a monolayer that contains "pinholes" or "imperfections", such that there is direct solvent access to the electrode Alternatively, the configuration of the electrode may be such that less than the entire surface of the electrode is covered by a SAM, to allow direct access to the electrode, but minimizing the surface for non-specific binding
The covalent attachment of the conductive ohgomers and insulators to the electrode may be accomplished in a variety of ways, depending on the electrode and the composition of the insulators and conductive ohgomers used In a preferred embodiment, the attachment linkers with covalently attached nucleosides or nucleic acids as depicted herein are covalently attached to an electrode Thus, one end or terminus of the attachment linker is attached to the nucleoside or nucleic acid, and the other is attached to an electrode In some embodiments it may be desirable to have the attachment linker attached at a position other than a terminus, or even to have a branched attachment linker that is attached to an electrode at one terminus and to two or more nucleosides at other termini, although this is not preferred Similarly, the attachment linker may be attached at two sites to the electrode, as is generally depicted in Structures 11-13 Generally, some type of linker is used, as depicted below as "A" in Structure 10, where "X" is the conductive ohgomer, "I" is an insulator and the hatched surface is the electrode
Structure 10
Figure imgf000045_0001
In this embodiment, A is a linker or atom The choice of "A" will depend in part on the characteristics of the electrode Thus, for example, A may be a sulfur moiety when a gold electrode is used
Alternatively, when metal oxide electrodes are used, A may be a silicon (silane) moiety attached to the oxygen of the oxide (see for example Chen et al , Langmuir 10 3332-3337 (1994), Lenhard et al , J Electroanal Chem 78 195-201 (1977), both of which are expressly incorporated by reference) When carbon based electrodes are used, A may be an ammo moiety (preferably a primary amme, see for example Demhammer et al , Langmuir 10 1306-1313 (1994)) Thus, preferred A moieties include, but are not limited to, silane moieties, sulfur moieties (including alkyl sulfur moieties), and ammo moieties In a preferred embodiment, epoxide type linkages with redox polymers such as are known in the art are not used
Although depicted herein as a single moiety, the insulators and conductive ohgomers may be attached to the electrode with more than one "A" moiety, the "A" moieties may be the same or different Thus, for example, when the electrode is a gold electrode, and "A" is a sulfur atom or moiety, multiple sulfur atoms may be used to attach the conductive ohgomer to the electrode, such as is generally depicted below in Structures 11 , 12 and 13 As will be appreciated by those in the art, other such structures can be made In Structures 11 , 12 and 13, the A moiety is just a sulfur atom, but substituted sulfur moieties may also be used
Structure 11
Figure imgf000045_0002
Structure 12
Figure imgf000045_0003
Structure 13
Figure imgf000046_0001
It should also be noted that similar to Structure 13, it may be possible to have a a conductive ohgomer terminating in a single carbon atom with three sulfur moities attached to the electrode Additionally, although not always depicted herein, the conductive ohgomers and insulators may also comprise a "Q" terminal group
In a preferred embodiment, the electrode is a gold electrode, and attachment is via a sulfur linkage as is well known in the art, i e the A moiety is a sulfur atom or moiety Although the exact characteristics of the gold-sulfur attachment are not known, this linkage is considered covalent for the purposes of this invention A representative structure is depicted in Structure 14, using the Structure 3 conductive ohgomer, although as for all the structures depicted herein, any of the conductive ohgomers, or combinations of conductive ohgomers, may be used Similarly, any of the conductive ohgomers or insulators may also comprise terminal groups as described herein Structure 14 depicts the "A" linker as composing just a sulfur atom, although additional atoms may be present (i e linkers from the sulfur to the conductive oiigomer or substitution groups) In addition, Structure 14 shows the sulfur atom attached to the Y aromatic group, but as will be appreciated by those in the art, it may be attached to the B-D group (i e an acetylene) as well
Structure 14
Figure imgf000046_0002
In general, thiol linkages are preferred In systems using electrophoresis, thiol linkages are preferred when either two sets of electrodes are used (i e the detection electrodes composiog the SAMs are not used at high electrophoretic voltages (i e greater than 800 or 900 mV), that can cause oxidation of the thiol linkage and thus loss of the SAM), or, if one set of electrodes is used, lower electrophoretic voltages are used as is generally described below
In a preferred embodiment, the electrode is a carbon electrode, i e a glassy carbon electrode, and attachment is via a nitrogen of an amme group A representative structure is depicted in Structure 15 Again, additional atoms may be present, i e Z type linkers and/or terminal groups Structure 15
Figure imgf000047_0001
Structure 16
Figure imgf000047_0002
In Structure 16, the oxygen atom is from the oxide of the metal oxide electrode. The Si atom may also contain other atoms, i.e. be a silicon moiety containing substitution groups. Other attachments for SAMs to other electrodes are known in the art; see for example Napier et al., Langmuir, 1997, for attachment to indium tin oxide electrodes, and also the chemisorption of phosphates to an indium tin oxide electrode (talk by H. Holden Thorpe, CHI conference, May 4-5, 1998).
The SAMs of the invention can be made in a variety of ways, including deposition out of organic solutions and deposition out of aqueous solutions. The methods outlined herein use a gold electrode as the example, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, other metals and methods may be used as well. In one preferred embodiment, indium-tin-oxide (ITO) is used as the electrode.
In a preferred embodiment, a gold surface is first cleaned. A variety of cleaoing procedures may be employed, including, but not limited to, chemical cleaning or etchants (including Piranha solution
(hydrogen peroxide/sulfuric acid) or aqua regia (hydrochloric acid/oitric acid), electrochemical methods, flame treatment, plasma treatment or combinations thereof.
Following cleaning, the gold substrate is exposed to the SAM species. When the electrode is ITO, the SAM species are phosphonate-containing species. This can also be done in a variety of ways, including, but not limited to, solution deposition, gas phase deposition, microcontact printing, spray deposition, deposition using neat components, etc. A preferred embodiment utilizes a deposition solution comprising a mixture of various SAM species in solution, generally thiol-containing species. Mixed monolayers that contain target analytes, particularly DNA, are usually prepared using a two step procedure. The thiolated DNA is deposited during the first deposition step (generally in the presence of at least one other monolayer-forming species) and the mixed monolayer formation is completed during the second step in which a second thiol solution minus DNA is added The second step frequently involves mild heating to promote monolayer reorganization
In a preferred embodiment, the deposition solution is an organic deposition solution In this embodiment, a clean gold surface is placed into a clean vial A binding ligand deposition solution in organic solvent is prepared in which the total thiol concentration is between micromolar to saturation, preferred ranges include from about 1 μM to 10 mM, with from about 400 uM to about 1 0 mM being especially preferred In a preferred embodiment, the deposition solution contains thiol modified DNA (i e nucleic acid attached to an attachment linker) and thiol diluent molecules (either conductive ohgomers or insulators, with the latter being preferred) The ratio of DNA to diluent (if present) is usually between 1000 1 to 1 1000, with from about 10 1 to about 1 10 being preferred and 1 1 being especially preferred The preferred solvents are tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitole, dimethylforamide (DMF), ethanol, or mixtures thereof, generally any solvent of sufficient polarity to dissolve the capture ligand can be used, as long as the solvent is devoid of functional groups that will react with the surface Sufficient DNA deposition solution is added to the vial so as to completely cover the electrode surface The gold substrate is allowed to incubate at ambient temperature or slightly above ambient temperature for a period of time ranging from seconds to hours, with 5-30 minutes being preferred After the initial incubation, the deposition solution is removed and a solution of diluent molecule only (from about 1 μM to 10 mM, with from about 100 uM to about 1 0 mM being preferred) in organic solvent is added The gold substrate is allowed to incubate at room temperature or above room temperature for a period of time (seconds to days, with from about 10 minutes to about 24 hours being preferred) The gold sample is removed from the solution, rinsed in clean solvent and used
In a preferred embodiment, an aqueous deposition solution is used As above, a clean gold surface is placed into a clean vial A DNA deposition solution in water is prepared in which the total thiol concentration is between about 1 uM and 10 mM, with from about 1 μM to about 200 uM being preferred The aqueous solution frequently has salt present (up to saturation, with approximately 1M being preferred), however pure water can be used The deposition solution contains thiol modified DNA and often a thiol diluent molecule The ratio of DNA to diluent is usually between between 1000 1 to 1 1000, with from about 10 1 to about 1 10 being preferred and 1 1 being especially preferred The
DNA deposition solution is added to the vial in such a volume so as to completely cover the electrode surface The gold substrate is allowed to incubate at ambient temperature or slightly above ambient temperature for 1-30 minutes with 5 minutes usually being sufficient After the initial incubation, the deposition solution is removed and a solution of diluent molecule only (10 uM -1 0 mM) in either water or organic solvent is added The gold substrate is allowed to incubate at room temperature or above room temperature until a complete monolayer is formed (10 mιnutes-24 hours) The gold sample is removed from the solution, rinsed in clean solvent and used In a preferred embodiment, as outlined herein, a circuit board is used as the substrate for the gold electrodes Formation of the SAMs on the gold surface is generally done by first cleaning the boards, for example in a 10% sulfuoc acid solution for 30 seconds, detergent solutions, aqua regia, plasma, etc , as outlined herein Following the sulfuoc acid treatment, the boards are washed, for example via immersion in two Milh-Q water baths for 1 minute each The boards are then dried, for example under a stream of nitrogen Spotting of the deposition solution onto the boards is done using any number of known spotting systems, generally by placing the boards on an X-Y table, preferably in a humidity chamber The size of the spotting drop will vary with the size of the electrodes on the boards and the equipment used for delivery of the solution, for example, for 250 μM size electrodes, a 30 nanohter drop is used The volume should be sufficient to cover the electrode surface completely The drop is incubated at room temperature for a period of time (sec to overnight, with 5 minutes preferred) and then the drop is removed by rinsing in a Milh-Q water bath The boards are then preferably treated with a second deposition solution, generally composing insulator in organic solvent, preferably acetonitole, by immersion in a 45°C bath After 30 minutes, the boards are removed and immersed in an acetonitole bath for 30 seconds followed by a milh-Q water bath for 30 seconds The boards are dried under a stream of nitrogen
In a preferred embodiment, the detection electrode further comprises a capture binding ligand, preferably covalently attached By "binding ligand" or "binding species" herein is meant a compound that is used to probe for the presence of the target analyte, that will bind to the target analyte In general, for most of the embodiments described herein, there are at least two binding ligands used per target analyte molecule, a "capture" or "anchor" binding ligand (also referred to herein as a "capture probe", particularly in reference to a nucleic acid binding ligand) that is attached to the detection electrode as described herein, and a soluble binding ligand, that binds independently to the target analyte, and either directly or indirectly comprises at least one ETM
Generally, the capture binding ligand allows the attachment of a target analyte to the detection electrode, for the purposes of detection As is more fully outlined below, attachment of the target analyte to the capture binding ligand may be direct (i e the target analyte binds to the capture binding ligand) or indirect (one or more capture extender ligands may be used)
In a preferred embodiment, the binding is specific, and the binding ligand is part of a binding pair By "specifically bind" herein is meant that the ligand binds the analyte, with specificity sufficient to differentiate between the analyte and other components or contaminants of the test sample However, as will be appreciated by those in the art, it will be possible to detect analytes using binding that is not highly specific, for example, the systems may use different binding ligands, for example an array of different ligands, and detection of any particular analyte is via its "signature" of binding to a panel of binding ligands similar to the manner in which "electronic noses" work The binding should be sufficient to allow the analyte to remain bound under the conditions of the assay, including wash steps to remove non-specific binding in some embodiments, for example in the detection of certain biomolecules, the binding constants of the analyte to the binding ligand will be at least about 10"4 to 10 6 M 1 , with at least about 105 to 109 being preferred and at least about 107 to 109 M being particularly preferred
As will be appreciated by those in the art, the composition of the binding ligand will depend on the composition of the target analyte Binding ligands to a wide variety of analytes are known or can be readily found using known techniques For example, when the analyte is a single-stranded nucleic acid, the binding ligand is generally a substantially complementary nucleic acid Alternatively, as is generally described in U S Patents 5,270,163, 5,475,096, 5,567,588, 5,595,877, 5,637,459, 5,683,867, 5,705,337 and related patents, hereby incorporated by reference, nucleic acid "aptomers" can be developed for binding to virtually any target analyte Similarly the analyte may be a nucleic acid binding protein and the capture binding ligand is either a single-stranded or double-stranded nucleic acid, alternatively, the binding ligand may be a nucleic acid binding protein when the analyte is a single or double-stranded nucleic acid When the analyte is a protein, the binding ligands include proteins (particularly including antibodies or fragments thereof (FAbs, etc )), small molecules, or aptamers, described above Preferred binding ligand proteins include peptides For example, when the analyte is an enzyme, suitable binding ligands include substrates, inhibitors, and other proteins that bind the enzyme, i e components of a multi-enzyme (or protein) complex As will be appreciated by those in the art, any two molecules that will associate, preferably specifically, may be used, either as the analyte or the binding ligand Suitable analyte/bindmg ligand pairs include, but are not limited to, antibodies/antigens receptors/hgand, proteins/nucleic acids, nucleic acids/nucleic acids, enzymes/substrates and/or inhibitors, carbohydrates (including glycoprotems and glycohpιds)/lectιns, carbohydrates and other binding partners, proteins/proteins, and protein/small molecules These may be wild-type or derivative sequences In a preferred embodiment, the binding ligands are portions (particularly the extracellular portions) of cell surface receptors that are known to multimeπze, such as the growth hormone receptor, glucose transporters (particularly GLUT4 receptor), transferon receptor, epidermal growth factor receptor, low density hpoprotein receptor, high density hpoprotein receptor, leptin receptor, interleukm receptors including IL-1 , IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-11 , IL- 12, IL-13, IL-15 and IL-17 receptors, VEGF receptor, PDGF receptor, EPO receptor, TPO receptor, ciliary neurotrophic factor receptor, prolactin receptor, and T-cell receptors Similarly, there is a wide body of literature relating to the development of binding partners based on combinatorial chemistry methods In this embodiment, when the binding ligand is a nucleic acid, preferred compositions and techniques are outlined in WO 98/20162, PCT/US98/12430, PCT/US98/12082, PCT/US99/01705, PCT/US99/01703, and U S S N s 09/135,183, 60/105,875, and 09/295,691 , all of which are hereby expressly incorporated by reference
The method of attachment of the capture binding ligands to the attachment linker (either an insulator or conductive ohgomer) will generally be done as is known in the art, and will depend on both the composition of the attachment linker and the capture binding ligand In general, the capture binding ligands are attached to the attachment linker through the use of functional groups on each that can then be used for attachment Preferred functional groups for attachment are ammo groups, carboxy groups, oxo groups and thiol groups These functional groups can then be attached, either directly or indirectly through the use of a linker, sometimes depicted herein as "Z" Linkers are well known in the art, for example, homo-or hetero-bifunctional linkers as are well known (see 1994 Pierce Chemical Company catalog, technical section on cross-linkers, pages 155-200, incorporated herein by reference) Preferred Z linkers include, but are not limited to, alkyl groups (including substituted alkyl groups and alkyl groups containing heteroatom moieties), with short alkyl groups, esters, amide, amme, epoxy groups and ethylene glycol and derivatives being preferred, with propyl, acetylene, and C2 alkene being especially preferred Z may also be a sulfone group, forming sulfonamide linkages
In this way, capture binding ligands comprising proteins, lectms, nucleic acids, small organic molecules, carbohydrates, etc can be added
A preferred embodiment utilizes protemaceous capture binding ligands As is known in the art, any number of techniques may be used to attach a protemaceous capture binding ligand to an attachment linker A wide variety of techniques are known to add moieties to proteins
A preferred embodiment utilizes nucleic acids as the capture binding ligand While most of the following discussion focuses on nucleic acids, as will be appreciated by those in the art, many of the techniques outlined below apply in a similar manner to non-nucleic acid systems as well
The capture probe nucleic acid is covalently attached to the electrode, via an "attachment linker", that can be either a conductive ohgomer (required for mechanιsm-1 systems) or an insulator By "covalently attached" herein is meant that two moieties are attached by at least one bond, including sigma bonds, pi bonds and coordination bonds
Thus, one end of the attachment linker is attached to a nucleic acid (or other binding ligand), and the other end (although as will be appreciated by those in the art, it need not be the exact terminus for either) is attached to the electrode Thus, any of structures depicted herein may further comprise a nucleic acid effectively as a terminal group Thus, the present invention provides compositions comprising nucleic acids covalently attached to electrodes as is generally depicted below in Structure 17
Structure 17
Figure imgf000052_0001
In Structure 17, the hatched marks on the left represent an electrode X is a conductive ohgomer and I is an insulator as defined herein F, is a linkage that allows the covalent attachment of the electrode and the conductive ohgomer or insulator, including bonds, atoms or linkers such as is described herein, for example as "A", defined below F2 is a linkage that allows the covalent attachment of the conductive ohgomer or insulator to the nucleic acid, and may be a bond, an atom or a linkage as is herein described F2 may be part of the conductive ohgomer, part of the insulator, part of the nucleic acid, or exogeneous to both, for example, as defined herein for "Z"
In a preferred embodiment, the capture probe nucleic acid is covalently attached to the electrode via a conductive ohgomer The covalent attachment of the nucleic acid and the conductive ohgomer may be accomplished in several ways In a preferred embodiment, the attachment is via attachment to the base of the nucleoside, via attachment to the backbone of the nucleic acid (either the nbose, the phosphate, or to an analogous group of a nucleic acid analog backbone), or via a transition metal ligand, as described below The techniques outlined below are generally described for oaturally occuong nucleic acids, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, similar techniques may be used with nucleic acid analogs, and in some cases with other binding ligands
In a preferred embodiment, the conductive ohgomer is attached to the base of a nucleoside of the nucleic acid This may be done in several ways, depending on the ohgomer, as is described below In one embodiment, the ohgomer is attached to a terminal nucleoside, i e either the 3' or 5' nucleoside of the nucleic acid Alternatively, the conductive ohgomer is attached to an internal nucleoside
The point of attachment to the base will vary with the base Generally, attachment at any position is possible In some embodiments, for example when the probe containing the ETMs may be used for hybridization (i e mechanιsm-1 systems) , it is preferred to attach at positions not involved in hydrogen bonding to the complementary base Thus, for example, generally attachment is to the 5 or 6 position of pyπmidines such as undine, cytosine and thymme For puones such as adenme and guanme, the linkage is preferably via the 8 position Attachment to non-standard bases is preferably done at the comparable positions
In one embodiment, the attachment is direct, that is, there are no intervening atoms between the conductive ohgomer and the base In this embodiment, for example, conductive ohgomers with terminal acetylene bonds are attached directly to the base Structure 18 is an example of this linkage, using a Structure 3 conductive ohgomer and undine as the base, although other bases and conductive ohgomers can be used as will be appreciated by those in the art
Structure 18
Figure imgf000053_0001
It should be noted that the pentose structures depicted herein may have hydrogen, hydroxy, phosphates or other groups such as am o groups attached In addition, the pentose and nucleoside structures depicted herein are depicted non-conventionally, as mirror images of the normal rendering In addition, the pentose and nucleoside structures may also contain additional groups, such as protecting groups, at any position, for example as needed during synthesis
In addition, the base may contain additional modifications as needed, i e the carbonyl or amme groups may be altered or protected
In an alternative embodiment, the attachment is any number of different Z linkers, including amide and amme linkages, as is generally depicted in Structure 19 using undine as the base and a Structure 3 ohgomer
Structure 19
Figure imgf000053_0002
In this embodiment, Z is a linker Preferably, Z is a short linker of about 1 to about 10 atoms, with from 1 to 5 atoms being preferred, that may or may not contain alkene, alkynyl, amme, amide, azo, imine, etc , bonds Linkers are known in the art, for example, homo-or hetero-bifunctional linkers as are well known (see 1994 Pierce Chemical Company catalog, technical section on cross-linkers, pages 155-200, incorporated herein by reference) Preferred Z linkers include, but are not limited to, alkyl groups (including substituted alkyl groups and alkyl groups containing heteroatom moieties), with short alkyl groups, esters, amide, amme, epoxy groups and ethylene glycol and derivatives being preferred, with propyl, acetylene, and C2 alkene being especially preferred Z may also be a sulfone group, forming sulfonamide linkages as discussed below
In a preferred embodiment, the attachment of the nucleic acid and the conductive ohgomer is done via attachment to the backbone of the nucleic acid This may be done in a number of ways, including attachment to a nbose of the πbose-phosphate backbone, or to the phosphate of the backbone, or other groups of analogous backbones
As a preliminary matter, it should be understood that the site of attachment in this embodiment may be to a 3' or 5' terminal nucleotide, or to an internal nucleotide, as is more fully described below
In a preferred embodiment, the conductive ohgomer is attached to the nbose of the obose-phosphate backbone This may be done in several ways As is known in the art, nucleosides that are modified at either the 2' or 3' position of the nbose with ammo groups, sulfur groups, sihcone groups, phosphorus groups, or oxo groups can be made (Imazawa et al , J Org Chem , 44 2039 (1979), Hobbs et al , J Org Chem 42(4) 714 (1977), Verheyden et al , J Orrg Chem 36(2) 250 (1971), McGee et al , J Org Chem 61 781-785 (1996), Mikhailopulo et al , Liebigs Ann Chem 513-519 (1993), McGee et al , Nucleosides & Nucleotides 14(6) 1329 (1995), all of which are incorporated by reference) These modified nucleosides are then used to add the conductive ohgomers
A preferred embodiment utilizes ammo-modified nucleosides These ammo-modified oboses can then be used to form either amide or amme linkages to the conductive ohgomers In a preferred embodiment, the ammo group is attached directly to the nbose, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, short linkers such as those described herein for "Z" may be present between the ammo group and the nbose
In a preferred embodiment, an amide linkage is used for attachment to the nbose Preferably, if the conductive ohgomer of Structures 1-3 is used, m is zero and thus the conductive ohgomer terminates in the amide bond In this embodiment, the nitrogen of the ammo group of the ammo-modified nbose is the "D" atom of the conductive ohgomer Thus, a preferred attachment of this embodiment is depicted in Structure 20 (using the Structure 3 conductive ohgomer)
Structure 20
Figure imgf000055_0001
As will be appreciated by those in the art, Structure 20 has the terminal bond fixed as an amide bond
In a preferred embodiment, a heteroatom linkage is used, i e oxo, amme, sulfur, etc A preferred embodiment utilizes an amme linkage Again, as outlined above for the amide linkages, for amme linkages, the nitrogen of the ammo-modified nbose may be the "D" atom of the conductive ohgomer when the Structure 3 conductive ohgomer is used Thus, for example, Structures 21 and 22 depict nucleosides with the Structures 3 and 9 conductive ohgomers, respectively, using the nitrogen as the heteroatom, athough other heteroatoms can be used
Structure 21
Figure imgf000055_0002
In Structure 21 , preferably both m and t are not zero A preferred Z here is a methylene group, or other aliphatic alkyl linkers One, two or three carbons in this position are particularly useful for synthetic reasons
Structure 22
Figure imgf000055_0003
In Structure 22, Z is as defined above Suitable linkers include methylene and ethylene
in an alternative embodiment, the conductive ohgomer is covalently attached to the nucleic acid via the phosphate of the obose-phosphate backbone (or analog) of a nucleic acid In this embodiment, the attachment is direct, utilizes a linker or via an amide bond Structure 23 depicts a direct linkage, and Structure 24 depicts linkage via an amide bond (both utilize the Structure 3 conductive ohgomer, although Structure 8 conductive ohgomers are also possible) Structures 23 and 24 depict the conductive ohgomer in the 3' position, although the 5' position is also possible Furthermore, both Structures 23 and 24 depict naturally occurring phosphodiester bonds, although as those in the art will appreciate, non-standard analogs of phosphodiester bonds may also be used
Structure 23
Figure imgf000056_0001
In Structure 23, if the terminal Y is present (i e m=1), then preferably Z is not present (i e t=0) If the terminal Y is not present, then Z is preferably present
Structure 24 depicts a preferred embodiment, wherein the terminal B-D bond is an amide bond, the terminal Y is not present, and Z is a linker, as defined herein
Structure 24
— X- B Dή Y C N z
^ n
Figure imgf000056_0002
In a preferred embodiment, the conductive ohgomer is covalently attached to the nucleic acid via a transition metal ligand In this embodiment, the conductive ohgomer is covalently attached to a ligand which provides one or more of the coordination atoms for a transition metal In one embodiment, the ligand to which the conductive ohgomer is attached also has the nucleic acid attached, as is generally depicted below in Structure 25 Alternatively, the conductive ohgomer is attached to one ligand, and the nucleic acid is attached to another ligand, as is generally depicted below in Structure 26 Thus, in the presence of the transition metal, the conductive ohgomer is covalently attached to the nucleic acid Both of these structures depict Structure 3 conductive ohgomers, although other ohgomers may be utilized Structures 25 and 26 depict two representative structures
Structure 25
Figure imgf000056_0003
Structure 26
Figure imgf000057_0001
L,
In the structures depicted herein, M is a metal atom, with transition metals being preferred Suitable transition metals for use in the invention include, but are not limited to, cadmium (Cd), copper (Cu), cobalt (Co), palladium (Pd), zinc (Zn), iron (Fe), ruthenium (Ru), rhodium (Rh), osmium (Os), rhenium (Re), platinium (Pt), scandium (Sc), titanium (Ti), Vanadium (V), chromium (Cr), manganese (Mn), nickel (Ni), Molybdenum (Mo), technetium (Tc), tungsten (W), and indium (Ir) That is, the first series of transition metals, the platinum metals (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir and Pt), along with Fe, Re, W, Mo and Tc, are preferred Particularly preferred are ruthenium, rhenium, osmium, platinium, cobalt and iron
L are the co-ligands, that provide the coordination atoms for the binding of the metal ion As will be appreciated by those in the art, the number and nature of the co-hgands will depend on the coordination number of the metal ion Mono-, di- or polydentate co-hgands may be used at any position Thus, for example, when the metal has a coordination number of six, the L from the terminus of the conductive ohgomer, the L contributed from the nucleic acid, and r, add up to six Thus, when the metal has a coordination number of six, r may range from zero (when all coordination atoms are provided by the other two ligands) to four, when all the co-hgands are monodentate Thus generally, r will be from 0 to 8, depending on the coordination number of the metal ion and the choice of the other ligands
In one embodiment, the metal ion has a coordination number of six and both the ligand attached to the conductive ohgomer and the ligand attached to the nucleic acid are at least bidentate, that is, r is preferably zero, one (i e the remaining co- gand is bidentate) or two (two monodentate co-hgands are used)
As will be appreciated in the art, the co-hgands can be the same or different Suitable ligands fall into two categories ligands which use nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, carbon or phosphorus atoms (depending on the metal ion) as the coordination atoms (generally referred to in the literature as sigma (σ) donors) and organometalhc ligands such as metallocene ligands (generally referred to in the literature as pi (π) donors, and depicted herein as L Suitable nitrogen donating ligands are well known in the art and include, but are not limited to, NH2, NHR, NRR', pyridme, pyrazme, isonicotinamide, imidazole, bipyndine and substituted derivatives of bipyridme, terpyodine and substituted derivatives, phenanthrolmes, particularly 1 ,10-phenanthrohne (abbreviated phen) and substituted derivatives of phenanthrolmes such as 4,7-dimethylphenanthrohne and dιpyrιdol[3,2-a 2',3'-c]phenazιne (abbreviated dppz), dipyπdophenazine, 1 ,4,5,8,9,12-hexaazatπphenylene (abbreviated hat), 9,10- phenanthrenequinone diimine (abbreviated phi), 1 ,4,5,8-tetraazaphenanthrene (abbreviated tap), 1 ,4,8,11-tetra-azacyclotetradecane (abbreviated cyclam), EDTA, EGTA and isocyanide Substituted derivatives, including fused derivatives, may also be used In some embodiments, porphynns and substituted derivatives of the porphyrm family may be used See for example, Comprehensive
Coordination Chemistry, Ed Wilkinson et al , Pergammon Press, 1987, Chapters 13 2 (pp73-98), 21 1 (pp 813-898) and 21 3 (pp 915-957), all of which are hereby expressly incorporated by reference
Suitable sigma donating ligands using carbon, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus are known in the art For example, suitable sigma carbon donors are found in Cotton and Wilkenson, Advanced Organic
Chemistry, 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1988, hereby incorporated by reference, see page 38, for example Similarly, suitable oxygen ligands include crown ethers, water and others known in the art Phosphmes and substituted phosph es are also suitable, see page 38 of Cotton and Wilkenson
The oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus and nitrogen-donating ligands are attached in such a manner as to allow the heteroatoms to serve as coordination atoms
In a preferred embodiment, organometalhc ligands are used In addition to purely organic compounds for use as redox moieties, and various transition metal coordination complexes with δ-bonded organic ligand with donor atoms as heterocychc or exocychc substituents, there is available a wide variety of transition metal organometalhc compounds with π-bonded organic ligands (see Advanced Inorganic Chemistry, 5th Ed , Cotton & Wilkinson, John Wiley & Sons, 1988, chapter 26, Organometal cs, A Concise Introduction, Elschenbroich et al , 2nd Ed , 1992, VCH, and Comprehensive Organometalhc Chemistry II, A Review of the Literature 1982-1994, Abel et al Ed , Vol 7, chapters 7, 8, 10 & 11 , Pergamon Press, hereby expressly incorporated by reference) Such organometalhc ligands include cyclic aromatic compounds such as the cyclopentadienide ion [C5H5(-1)] and various ring substituted and ring fused derivatives, such as the indeny de (-1) ion, that yield a class of bιs(cyclopentadιeyl) metal compounds, (i e the metallocenes), see for example Robins et al , J Am Chem Soc 104 1882-1893 (1982), and Gassman et al , J Am Chem Soc 108 4228-4229 (1986), incorporated by reference Of these, ferrocene [(C5H5)2Fe] and its derivatives are prototypical examples which have been used in a wide variety of chemical (Connelly et al , Chem Rev 96 877- 910 (1996), incorporated by reference) and electrochemical (Geiger et al , Advances in Organometalhc Chemistry 23 1-93, and Geiger et al , Advances in Organometalhc Chemistry 24 87, incorporated by reference) electron transfer or "redox" reactions Metallocene derivatives of a variety of the first, second and third row transition metals are potential candidates as redox moieties that are covalently attached to either the nbose ring or the nucleoside base of nucleic acid Other potentially suitable organometalhc ligands include cyclic arenes such as benzene, to yield bιs(arene)metal compounds and their ring substituted and ring fused derivatives, of which bιs(benzene)chromιum is a prototypical example, Other acyclic π-bonded ligands such as the allyl(-1 ) ion, or butadiene yield potentially suitable organometalhc compounds, and all such ligands, in conjuction with other π-bonded and δ- bonded ligands constitute the general class of organometalhc compounds in which there is a metal to carbon bond Electrochemical studies of various dimers and ohgomers of such compounds with bridging organic ligands, and additional non-bridging ligands, as well as with and without metal-metal bonds are potential candidate redox moieties in nucleic acid analysis
When one or more of the co-hgands is an organometalhc ligand, the ligand is generally attached via one of the carbon atoms of the organometalhc ligand, although attachment may be via other atoms for heterocychc ligands Preferred organometalhc ligands include metallocene ligands, including substituted derivatives and the metalloceneophanes (see page 1174 of Cotton and Wilkenson, supra) For example, derivatives of metallocene ligands such as methylcyclopentadienyl, with multiple methyl groups being preferred, such as pentamethylcyclopentadienyl, can be used to increase the stability of the metallocene In a preferred embodiment, only one of the two metallocene ligands of a metallocene are deovatized
As described herein, any combination of ligands may be used Preferred combinations include a) all ligands are nitrogen donating ligands, b) all ligands are organometalhc ligands, and c) the ligand at the terminus of the conductive ohgomer is a metallocene ligand and the ligand provided by the nucleic acid is a nitrogen donating ligand, with the other ligands, if needed, are either nitrogen donating ligands or metallocene ligands, or a mixture These combinations are depicted in representative structures using the conductive ohgomer of Structure 3 are depicted in Structures 27 (using phenanthrohne and ammo as representative ligands), 28 (using ferrocene as the metal-hgand combination) and 29 (using cyclopentadienyl and ammo as representative ligands)
Structure 27
Figure imgf000059_0001
Structure 28
Figure imgf000059_0002
Structure 29
Figure imgf000060_0001
In a preferred embodiment, the ligands used in the invention show altered fluorescent properties depending on the redox state of the chelated metal ion As described below, this thus serves as an additional mode of detection of electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode
In addition, similar methods can be used to attach proteins to the detection electrode, see for example U S Patent No 5,620,850, hereby incorporated by reference
In a preferred embodiment, as is described more fully below, the ligand attached to the nucleic acid is an ammo group attached to the 2' or 3' position of a nbose of the obose-phosphate backbone This ligand may contain a multiplicity of ammo groups so as to form a polydentate ligand which binds the metal ion Other preferred ligands include cyclopentadiene and phenanthrohne
The use of metal ions to connect the nucleic acids can serve as an internal control or calibration of the system, to evaluate the number of available nucleic acids on the surface However, as will be appreciated by those in the art, if metal ions are used to connect the nucleic acids to the conductive ohgomers, it is generally desirable to have this metal ion complex have a different redox potential than that of the ETMs used in the rest of the system, as described below This is generally true so as to be able to distinguish the presence of the capture probe from the presence of the target sequence This may be useful for identification, calibration and/or quantification Thus, the amount of capture probe on an electrode may be compared to the amount of hybridized double stranded nucleic acid to quantify the amount of target sequence in a sample This is quite significant to serve as an internal control of the sensor or system This allows a measurement either prior to the addition of target or after, on the same molecules that will be used for detection, rather than rely on a similar but different control system Thus, the actual molecules that will be used for the detection can be quantified prior to any experiment This is a significant advantage over poor methods
In a preferred embodiment, the capture probe nucleic acids (or other binding ligands) are covalently attached to the electrode via an insulator The attachment of nucleic acids (and other binding ligands) to insulators such as alkyl groups is well known, and can be done to the base or the backbone, including the nbose or phosphate for backbones containing these moieties, or to alternate backbones for nucleic acid analogs In a preferred embodiment, there may be one or more different capture probe species on the surface In some embodiments, there may be one type of capture probe, or one type of capture probe extender, as is more fully described below Alternatively, different capture probes, or one capture probes with a multiplicity of different capture extender probes can be used Similarly, it may be desirable (particular in the case of nucleic acid analytes and binding ligands in mechanιsm-2 systems) to use auxiliary capture probes that comprise relatively short probe sequences, that can be used to "tack down" components of the system, for example the recruitment linkers, to increase the concentration of ETMs at the surface
Thus the present invention provides substrates composing at least one detection electrode comprising monolayers and capture binding ligands, useful in target analyte detection systems
In a preferred embodiment, the compositions further comprise a solution or soluble binding ligand, although as is more fully described below, for mechanιsm-1 systems, the ETMs may be added in the form of non-covalently attached hybridization indicators Solution binding ligands are similar to capture binding ligands, in that they bind, preferably specifically, to target analytes The solution binding ligand may be the same or different from the capture binding ligand Generally, the solution binding ligands are not directed attached to the surface, although as depicted in Figure 5A they may be The solution binding ligand either directly comprises a recruitment linker that comprises at least one ETM (Figure 4A), or the recruitment linker binds, either directly (Figure 4A) or indirectly (Figure
4E), to the solution binding ligand
Thus, "solution binding ligands" or "soluble binding ligands" or "signal carriers" or "label probes" or "label binding ligands" with recruitment linkers composing covalently attached ETMs are provided That is, one portion of the label probe or solution binding ligand directly or indirectly binds to the target analyte, and one portion comprises a recruitment linker composing covalently attached ETMs In some systems, for example in mechanιsm-1 nucleic acid systems, these may be the same Similarly, for mechanιsm-1 systems, the recruitment linker comprises nucleic acid that will hybridize to detection probes The terms "electron donor moiety", "electron acceptor moiety", and "ETMs" (ETMs) or grammatical equivalents herein refers to molecules capable of electron transfer under certain conditions It is to be understood that electron donor and acceptor capabilities are relative, that is, a molecule which can lose an electron under certain experimental conditions will be able to accept an electron under different experimental conditions It is to be understood that the number of possible electron donor moieties and electron acceptor moieties is very large, and that one skilled in the art of electron transfer compounds will be able to utilize a number of compounds in the present invention
Preferred ETMs include, but are not limited to, transition metal complexes, organic ETMs, and electrodes In a preferred embodiment, the ETMs are transition metal complexes Transition metals are those whose atoms have a partial or complete d shell of electrons Suitable transition metals for use in the invention are listed above
The transition metals are complexed with a variety of ligands, L, defined above, to form suitable transition metal complexes, as is well known in the art
In addition to transition metal complexes, other organic electron donors and acceptors may be covalently attached to the nucleic acid for use in the invention These organic molecules include, but are not limited to, riboflavin, xanthene dyes, azme dyes, acodine orange, Λ/,/V-dιmethyl-2,7- diazapyrenium dichloode (DAP2+), methylviologen, ethidium bromide, quinones such as N,N'- dιmethylanthra(2,1 ,9-def6,5,10-d'e'f)dιιsoquιnohne dichlonde (ADIQ2+), porphyons ([meso-tetrakιs(N- methyl-x-pyπdιnιum)porphyrιn tetrachloode], varlamine blue B hydrochloode, Bmdschedler's green, 2,6-dιchloroιndophenol, 2,6-dιbromophenohndophenol, Brilliant crest blue (3-amιno-9-dιmethyl-amιno-
10-methylphenoxyazιne chloride), methylene blue, Nile blue A (aminoaphthodiethylaminophenoxazine sulfate), ιndιgo-5,5',7,7'-tetrasulfonιc acιd, ιndιgo-5,5',7-tosulfonιc acιd, phenosafranme, ιndιgo-5- monosulfonic acid, safranme T, bιs(dιmethylglyoxιmato)-ιron(ll) chloride, induhne scarlet, neutral red, anthracene, coronene, pyrene, 9-phenylanthracene, rubrene, binaphthyl, DPA, phenothiazene, fluoranthene, phenanthrene, chrysene, 1 ,8-dιphenyl-1 ,3,5,7-octatetracene, naphthalene, acenaphthalene, perylene, TMPD and analogs and substituted derivatives of these compounds
In one embodiment, the electron donors and acceptors are redox proteins as are known in the art However, redox proteins in many embodiments are not preferred
In one embodiment, particularly when an electrophoresis step is used, the ETMs are chosen to be charged molecules, preferably when the target analyte is not charged Thus, for example, solution binding ligands that either directly or indirectly contain a number of charged ETMs can be bound to the target analyte poor to electrophoresis, to allow the target analyte to have a sufficient charge to move within the electric field, thus providing a dual purpose of providing charge and a detection moiety
Thus for example, label probes that contain charged ETMs may be used, that bind either directly to the target analyte or to an intermediate species such as an amplifier probe can be used Alternatively, other charged species can be added in addition to the ETMs Alternatively, these charges species may also be an integral part of the system, for example, part of the label probe may be a charged polymer such as polylysine However, in this embodiment, the migration of non-specifically bound label probes to the detection surface can result in an increase in non-specific signals Therefore, in this embodiment, the use of a reverse electric field (generally a pulse of reverse polarity) after electrophoresis can result in the non-specifically bound label probes being driven off or away from the detection probe surface, to decrease the background non-specific signal
The choice of the specific ETMs will be influenced by the type of electron transfer detection used, as is generally outlined below Preferred ETMs are metallocenes, with ferrocene, including derivatives, being particularly preferred
In a preferred embodiment, a plurality of ETMs are used As is shown in the examples, the use of multiple ETMs provides signal amplification and thus allows more sensitive detection limits As discussed below, while the use of multiple ETMs on nucleic acids that hybridize to complementary strands can cause decreases in Tms of the hybridization complexes depending on the number, site of attachment and spacing between the multiple ETMs, this is not a factor when the ETMs are on the recruitment linker (i e "mechanιsm-2" systems), since this does not hybridize to a complementary sequence Accordingly, pluralities of ETMs are preferred, with at least about 2 ETMs per recruitment linker being preferred, and at least about 10 being particularly preferred, and at least about 20 to 50 being especially preferred In some instances, very large numbers of ETMs (50 to 1000) can be used
Thus, solution binding ligands, or label probes, with covalently attached ETMs are provided The method of attachment of the ETM to the solution binding ligand will vary depending on the mode of detection (i e mechanιsm-1 or -2 systems) and the composition of the solution binding ligand As is more fully outlined below, in mechanιsm-2 systems, the portion of the solution binding ligand (or label probe) that comprises the ETM is referred to as a "recruitment linker" and can comprise either nucleic acid or non-nucleic acid For mechanιsm-1 systems, the recruitment linker must be nucleic acid
Thus, as will be appreciated by those in the art, there are a variety of coofigurations that can be used
In a preferred embodiment, the recruitment linker is nucleic acid (including analogs), and attachment of the ETMs can be via (1) a base, (2) the backbone, including the nbose, the phosphate, or comparable structures in nucleic acid analogs, (3) nucleoside replacement, described below, or (4) metallocene polymers, as descπbed below In a preferred embodiment, the recruitment linker is non-nucleic acid, and can be either a metallocene polymer or an alkyl-type polymer (including heteroalkyl, as is more fully described below) containing ETM substitution groups These options are generally depicted in Figure 7
In a preferred embodiment, the recruitment linker is a nucleic acid, and comprises covalently attached ETMs The ETMs may be attached to nucleosides within the nucleic acid in a variety of positions
Preferred embodiments include, but are not limited to, (1) attachment to the base of the nucleoside, (2) attachment of the ETM as a base replacement, (3) attachment to the backbone of the nucleic acid, including either to a nbose of the obose-phosphate backbone or to a phosphate moiety, or to analogous structures in nucleic acid analogs, and (4) attachment via metallocene polymers
In addition, as is described below, when the recruitment linker is nucleic acid, it may be desirable to use secondary label probes, that have a first portion that will hybridize to a portion of the primary label probes and a second portion composing a recruitment linker as is defined herein This is generally depicted in Figure 6Q and 6R, this is similar to the use of an amplifier probe, except that both the primary and the secondary label probes comprise ETMs
In a preferred embodiment, the ETM is attached to the base of a nucleoside as is generally outlined above for attachment of the conductive ohgomer Attachment can be to an internal nucleoside or a terminal nucleoside
The covalent attachment to the base will depend in part on the ETM chosen, but in general is similar to the attachment of conductive ohgomers to bases, as outlined above Attachment may generally be done to any position of the base In a preferred embodiment, the ETM is a transition metal complex, and thus attachment of a suitable metal ligand to the base leads to the covalent attachment of the ETM Alternatively, similar types of linkages may be used for the attachment of organic ETMs, as will be appreciated by those in the art
In one embodiment, the C4 attached ammo group of cytosme, the C6 attached ammo group of adenine, or the C2 attached ammo group of guanme may be used as a transition metal ligand
Ligands containing aromatic groups can be attached via acetylene linkages as is known in the art (see Comprehensive Organic Synthesis, Trost et al , Ed , Pergamon Press, Chapter 2 4 Coupling
Reactions Between sp2 and sp Carbon Centers, Sonogashira, pp521-549, and pp950-953, hereby incorporated by reference) Structure 30 depicts a representative structure in the presence of the metal ion and any other necessary ligands, Structure 30 depicts undine, although as for all the structures herein, any other base may also be used Structure 30
Figure imgf000064_0001
La is a gand, which may include nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus donating ligands or organometalhc ligands such as metallocene ligands Suitable La ligands include, but not limited to, phenanthrolme, imidazole, bpy and terpy Lr and M are as defined above Again, it will be appreciated by those in the art, a linker ("Z") may be included between the nucleoside and the ETM
Similarly, as for the conductive ohgomers, the linkage may be done using a linker, which may utilize an amide linkage (see generally Telser et al , J Am Chem Soc 111 7221-7226 (1989), Telser et al , J Am Chem Soc 111 7226-7232 (1989), both of which are expressly incorporated by reference) These structures are generally depicted below in Structure 31 , which again uses undine as the base, although as above, the other bases may also be used
Structure 31
Figure imgf000065_0001
In this embodiment, L is a ligand as defined above, with Lr and M as defined above as well Preferably, L is ammo, phen, byp and terpy
In a preferred embodiment, the ETM attached to a nucleoside is a metallocene, i e the L and Lr of Structure 31 are both metallocene ligands, Lm, as described above Structure 32 depicts a preferred embodiment wherein the metallocene is ferrocene, and the base is undine, although other bases may be used
Structure 32
Figure imgf000065_0002
Preliminary data suggest that Structure 32 may cychze, with the second acetylene carbon atom attacking the carbonyl oxygen, forming a furan- ke structure Preferred metallocenes include ferrocene, cobaltocene and osmiumocene In a preferred embodiment, the ETM is attached to a nbose at any position of the nbose-phosphate backbone of the nucleic acid, i e either the 5' or 3' terminus or any internal nucleoside Ribose in this case can include ribose analogs As is known in the art, nucleosides that are modified at either the 2' or 3' position of the ribose can be made, with nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus-containing modifications possible Ammo-modified and oxygen-modified ribose is preferred See generally PCT publication WO 95/15971 , incorporated herein by reference These modification groups may be used as a transition metal hgand, or as a chemically functional moiety for attachment of other transition metal ligands and organometalhc ligands, or organic electron donor moieties as will be appreciated by those in the art In this embodiment, a linker such as depicted herein for "Z" may be used as well, or a conductive ohgomer between the ribose and the ETM Preferred embodiments utilize attachment at the 2' or 3' position of the ribose, with the 2' position being preferred Thus for example, the conductive ohgomers depicted in Structure 13, 14 and 15 may be replaced by ETMs, alternatively, the ETMs may be added to the free terminus of the conductive ohgomer
In a preferred embodiment, a metallocene serves as the ETM, and is attached via an amide bond as depicted below in Structure 33 The examples outline the synthesis of a preferred compound when the metallocene is ferrocene
Structure 33
Figure imgf000066_0001
In a preferred embodiment, am e linkages are used, as is generally depicted in Structure 34
Structure 34
Figure imgf000066_0002
Z is a linker, as defined herein, with 1-16 atoms being preferred, and 2-4 atoms being particularly preferred, and t is either one or zero
In a preferred embodiment, oxo linkages are used, as is generally depicted in Structure 35 Structure 35
Figure imgf000067_0001
In Structure 35, Z is a linker, as defined herein, and t is either one or zero. Preferred Z linkers include alkyl groups including heteroalkyl groups such as (CH2)n and (CH2CH20)n, with n from 1 to 10 being preferred, and n = 1 to 4 being especially preferred, and n=4 being particularly preferred.
Linkages utilizing other heteroatoms are also possible.
In a preferred embodiment, an ETM is attached to a phosphate at any position of the ribose-phosphate backbone of the nucleic acid. This may be done in a variety of ways. In one embodiment, phosphodiester bond analogs such as phosphoramide or phosphoramidite linkages may be incorporated into a nucleic acid, where the heteroatom (i.e. nitrogen) serves as a transition metal ligand (see PCT publication WO 95/15971 , incorporated by reference). Alternatively, the conductive ohgomers depicted in Structures 23 and 24 may be replaced by ETMs. In a preferred embodiment, the composition has the structure shown in Structure 36.
Structure 36
Figure imgf000067_0002
In Structure 36, the ETM is attached via a phosphate linkage, generally through the use of a linker, Z. Preferred Z linkers include alkyl groups, including heteroalkyl groups such as (CH2)n, (CH2CH20)n, with n from 1 to 10 being preferred, and n = 1 to 4 being especially preferred, and n=4 being particularly preferred.
In mechanism-2 systems, when the ETM is attached to the base or the backbone of the nucleoside, it is possible to attach the ETMs via "dendrimer" structures, as is more fully outlined below. As is generally depicted in Figure 8, alkyl-based linkers can be used to create multiple branching structures comprising one or more ETMs at the terminus of each branch. Generally, this is done by creating branch points containing multiple hydroxy groups, which optionally can then be used to add additional branch points The terminal hydroxy groups can then be used in phosphoramidite reactions to add ETMs, as is generally done below for the nucleoside replacement and metallocene polymer reactions
In a preferred embodiment, an ETM such as a metallocene is used as a "nucleoside replacement", serving as an ETM For example, the distance between the two cyclopentadiene rings of ferrocene is similar to the orthongonal distance between two bases in a double stranded nucleic acid Other metallocenes in addition to ferrocene may be used, for example, air stable metallocenes such as those containing cobalt or ruthenium Thus, metallocene moieties may be incorporated into the backbone of a nucleic acid, as is generally depicted in Structure 37 (nucleic acid with a ribose-phosphate backbone) and Structure 38 (peptide nucleic acid backbone) Structures 37 and 38 depict ferrocene, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, other metallocenes may be used as well In general, air stable metallocenes are preferred, including metallocenes utilizing ruthenium and cobalt as the metal
Structure 37
In Structure 37, Z is a linker as defined above, with generally short, alkyl groups, including heteroatoms such as oxygen being preferred Generally, what is important is the length of the linker, such that minimal perturbations of a double stranded nucleic acid is effected, as is more fully described below Thus, methylene, ethylene, ethylene glycols, propylene and butylene are all preferred, with ethylene and ethylene glycol being particularly preferred In addition, each Z linker may be the same or different Structure 37 depicts a ribose-phosphate backbone, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, nucleic acid analogs may also be used, including ribose analogs and phosphate bond analogs Structure 38
Figure imgf000069_0001
In Structure 38, preferred Z groups are as listed above, and again, each Z linker can be the same or different As above, other nucleic acid analogs may be used as well
In addition, although the structures and discussion above depicts metallocenes, and particularly ferrocene, this same general idea can be used to add ETMs in addition to metallocenes, as nucleoside replacements or in polymer embodiments, described below Thus, for example, when the ETM is a transition metal complex other than a metallocene, composing one, two or three (or more) ligands, the ligands can be functionahzed as depicted for the ferrocene to allow the addition of phosphoramidite groups Particularly preferred in this embodiment are complexes comprising at least two ring (for example, aryl and substituted aryl) ligands, where each of the ligands comprises functional groups for attachment via phosphoramidite chemistry As will be appreciated by those in the art, this type of reaction, creating polymers of ETMs either as a portion of the backbone of the nucleic acid or as "side groups" of the nucleic acids, to allow amplification of the signals generated herein, can be done with virtually any ETM that can be functionahzed to contain the correct chemical groups
Thus, by inserting a metallocene such as ferrocene (or other ETM) into the backbone of a nucleic acid, nucleic acid analogs are made, that is, the invention provides nucleic acids having a backbone comprising at least one metallocene This is distinguished from nucleic acids having metallocenes attached to the backbone, i e via a ribose, a phosphate, etc That is, two nucleic acids each made up of a traditional nucleic acid or analog (nucleic acids in this case including a single nucleoside), may be covalently attached to each other via a metallocene Viewed differently, a metallocene derivative or substituted metallocene is provided, wherein each of the two aromatic rings of the metallocene has a nucleic acid substitutent group In addition, as is more fully outlined below, it is possible to incorporate more than one metallocene into the backbone, either with nucleotides in between and/or with adjacent metallocenes When adjacent metallocenes are added to the backbone, this is similar to the process described below as "metallocene polymers", that is, there are areas of metallocene polymers within the backbone
In addition to the nucleic acid substitutent groups, it is also desirable in some instances to add additional substituent groups to one or both of the aromatic rings of the metallocene (or ETM) For example, as these nucleoside replacements are generally part of probe sequences to be hybridized with a substantially complementary nucleic acid, for example a target sequence or another probe sequence, it is possible to add substitutent groups to the metallocene rings to facilitate hydrogen bonding to the base or bases on the opposite strand These may be added to any position on the metallocene rings Suitable substitutent groups include, but are not limited to, amide groups, amme groups, carboxy c acids, and alcohols, including substituted alcohols In addition, these substitutent groups can be attached via linkers as well, although in general this is not preferred
In addition, substituent groups on an ETM, particularly metallocenes such as ferrocene, may be added to alter the redox properties of the ETM Thus, for example, in some embodiments, as is more fully described below, it may be desirable to have different ETMs attached in different ways (i e base or ribose attachment), on different probes, or for different purposes (for example, calibration or as an internal standard) Thus, the addition of substituent groups on the metallocene may allow two different
ETMs to be distinguished
In order to generate these metallocene-backbone nucleic acid analogs, the intermediate components are also provided Thus, in a preferred embodiment, the invention provides phosphoramidite metallocenes, as generally depicted in Structure 39
Structure 39
Figure imgf000070_0001
In Structure 39, PG is a protecting group, generally suitable for use in nucleic acid synthesis, with DMT, MMT and TMT all being preferred The aromatic rings can either be the rings of the metallocene, or aromatic rings of ligands for transition metal complexes or other organic ETMs The aromatic rings may be the same or different, and may be substituted as discussed herein Structure 40 depicts the ferrocene derivative
Structure 40
Figure imgf000071_0001
These phosphoramidite analogs can be added to standard oligonucleotide syntheses as is known in the art
Structure 41 depicts the ferrocene peptide nucleic acid (PNA) monomer, that can be added to PNA synthesis as is known in the art
Structure 41
Figure imgf000071_0002
In Structure 41 , the PG protecting group is suitable for use in peptide nucleic acid synthesis, with MMT, boc and Fmoc being preferred
These same intermediate compounds can be used to form ETM or metallocene polymers, which are added to the nucleic acids, rather than as backbone replacements, as is more fully described below In a preferred embodiment, particularly for use in mechanιsm-2 systems, the ETMs are attached as polymers, for example as metallocene polymers, in a ' branched" configuration similar to the "branched DNA" embodiments herein and as outlined in U S Patent No 5,124,246, using modified functionahzed nucleotides The general idea is as follows A modified phosphoramidite nucleotide is generated that can ultimately contain a free hydroxy group that can be used in the attachment of phosphoramidite
ETMs such as metallocenes This free hydroxy group could be on the base or the backbone, such as the ribose or the phosphate (although as will be appreciated by those in the art, nucleic acid analogs containing other structures can also be used) The modified nucleotide is incorporated into a nucleic acid, and any hydroxy protecting groups are removed thus leaving the free hydroxyl Upon the addition of a phosphoramidite ETM such as a metallocene, as described above in structures 39 and
40, ETMs, such as metallocene ETMs, are added Additional phosphoramidite ETMs such as metallocenes can be added, to form "ETM polymers", including "metallocene polymers" as depicted in Figure 9 with ferrocene In addition, in some embodiments, it is desirable to increase the solubility of the polymers by adding a "capping" group to the terminal ETM in the polymer, for example a final phosphate group to the metallocene as is generally depicted in Figure 9 Other suitable solubility enhancing "capping" groups will be appreciated by those in the art It should be noted that these solubility enhancing groups can be added to the polymers in other places, including to the hgand rings, for example on the metallocenes as discussed herein
A preferred embodiment of this general idea is outlined in the Figures In this embodiment, the 2' position of a ribose of a phosphoramidite nucleotide is first functionahzed to contain a protected hydroxy group, in this case via an oxo-hnkage, although any number of linkers can be used, as is generally described herein for Z linkers The protected modified nucleotide is then incorporated via standard phosphoramidite chemistry into a growing nucleic acid The protecting group is removed, and the free hydroxy group is used, again using standard phosphoramidite chemistry to add a phosphoramidite metallocene such as ferrocene A similar reaction is possible for nucleic acid analogs For example, using peptide nucleic acids and the metallocene monomer shown in Structure
41 , peptide nucleic acid structures containing metallocene polymers could be generated
Thus, the present invention provides recruitment linkers of nucleic acids composing "branches" of metallocene polymers as is generally depicted in Figures 8 and 9 Preferred embodiments also utilize metallocene polymers from one to about 50 metallocenes in length, with from about 5 to about 20 being preferred and from about 5 to about 10 being especially preferred
In addition, when the recruitment linker is nucleic acid, any combination of ETM attachments may be done In general, as outlined herein, when mechanιsm-1 systems are used, clusters of nucleosides containing ETMs can decrease the Tm of hybridization of the probe to its target sequence, thus in general, for mechanιsm-1 systems, the ETMs are spaced out over the length of the sequence, or only small numbers of them are used
In mechanιsm-1 systems, non-covalently attached ETMs may be used In one embodiment, the ETM is a hybridization indicator Hybridization indicators serve as an ETM that will preferentially associate with double stranded nucleic acid is added, usually reversibly, similar to the method of Millan et al , Anal Chem 65 2317-2323 (1993), Millan et al , Anal Chem 662943-2948 (1994), both of which are hereby expressly incorporated by reference In this embodiment, increases in the local concentration of ETMs, due to the association of the ETM hybridization indicator with double stranded nucleic acid at the surface, can be monitored using the monolayers comprising the conductive ohgomers
Hybridization indicators include mtercalators and minor and/or major groove binding moieties In a preferred embodiment, mtercalators may be used, since intercalation generally only occurs in the presence of double stranded nucleic acid, only in the presence of double stranded nucleic acid will the ETMs concentrate Intercalating transition metal complex ETMs are known in the art Similarly, major or minor groove binding moieties, such as methylene blue, may also be used in this embodiment
In addition, the binding acceleration systems of the invention may be used in virtually any method that relies on electrochemical detection of target analytes, with particular utility in nucleic acid detection For example, the methods and compositions of the invention can be used in nucleic acid detection methods that rely on the detection of ETMs that are inherent to the target analyte For example, as is generally described in Napier et al , Bioconj Chem 8 906 (1997), hereby expressly incorporated by reference, the guanme bases of nucleic acid can be detected via changes in the redox state, i e guanme oxidation by ruthenium complexes Similarly, the methods of the invention find use in detection systems that utilize copper surfaces as catalytic electrodes to oxidize the riboses of nucleic acids
In a preferred embodiment, the recruitment linker is not nucleic acid, and instead may be any sort of linker or polymer As will be appreciated by those in the art, generally any linker or polymer that can be modified to contain ETMs can be used In general, the polymers or linkers should be reasonably soluble and contain suitable functional groups for the addition of ETMs
As used herein, a "recruitment polymer" comprises at least two or three subunits, which are covalently attached At least some portion of the monomeoc subunits contain functional groups for the covalent attachment of ETMs In some embodiments coupling moieties are used to covalently link the subunits with the ETMs Preferred functional groups for attachment are ammo groups, carboxy groups, oxo groups and thiol groups, with ammo groups being particularly preferred As will be appreciated by those in the art, a wide variety of recruitment polymers are possible Suitable linkers include, but are not limited to, alkyl linkers (including heteroalkyl (including (poly)ethylene glycol-type structures), substituted alkyl, aryalkyl linkers, etc As above for the polymers, the linkers will comprise one or more functional groups for the attachment of ETMs, which will be done as will be appreciated by those in the art, for example through the use homo-or hetero- bifunctional linkers as are well known (see 1994 Pierce Chemical Company catalog, technical section on cross-linkers, pages 155-200, incorporated herein by reference)
Suitable recruitment polymers include, but are not limited to, functionahzed styrenes, such as am o styrene, functionahzed dextrans, and polyamino acids Preferred polymers are polyammo acids (both poly-D-ammo acids and poly-L-amino acids), such as polylysine, and polymers containing lysme and other ammo acids being particularly preferred As outlined above, in some embodiments, charged recruitment linkers are preferred, for example when non-charged target analytes are to be detected Other suitable polyammo acids are polyglutamic acid, polyaspartic acid, co-polymers of lys e and glutamic or aspartic acid, co-polymers of lysme with alanine, tyrosine, phenylalanme, seone, tryptophan, and/or prohne
In a preferred embodiment, the recruitment linker comprises a metallocene polymer, as is described above
The attachment of the recruitment linkers to the first portion of the label probe, i e the portion that binds either directly or indirectly to the target analyte, will depend on the composition of the recruitment linker, as will be appreciated by those in the art When the recruitment linker is nucleic acid, it is generally formed during the synthesis of the first portion of the label probe, with incorporation of nucleosides containing ETMs as required Alternatively, the first portion of the label probe and the recruitment linker may be made separately, and then attached For example, there may be an overlapping section of complementarity, forming a section of double stranded nucleic acid that can then be chemically crosshnked, for example by using psoralen as is known in the art
When non-nucleic acid recruitment linkers are used, attachment of the linker/polymer of the recruitment linker will be done generally using standard chemical techniques, such as will be appreciated by those in the art For example, when alkyl-based linkers are used, attachment can be similar to the attachment of insulators to nucleic acids
In addition, it is possible to have recruitment linkers that are mixtures of nucleic acids and non-nucleic acids, either in a linear form (i e nucleic acid segments linked together with alkyl linkers) or in branched forms (nucleic acids with alkyl "branches" that may contain ETMs and may be additionally branched) In a preferred embodiment, for example when the target analyte is a nucleic acid, it is the target sequence itself that carries the ETMs, rather than the recruitment linker of a label probe For example as is more fully described below, it is possible to enzymatically add tnphosphate nucleotides composing the ETMs of the invention to a growing nucleic acid, for example during a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) As will be recognized by those in the art, while several enzymes have been shown to generally tolerate modified nucleotides, some of the modified nucleotides of the invention, for example the "nucleoside replacement" embodiments and putatively some of the phosphate attachments, may or may not be recognized by the enzymes to allow incorporation into a growing nucleic acid Therefore, preferred attachments in this embodiment are to the base or ribose of the nucleotide
Thus, for example PCR amplification of a target sequence, as is well known in the art, will result in target sequences composing ETMs, generally randomly incorporated into the sequence The system of the invention can then be configured to allow detection using these ETMs, as is generally depicted in Figures 6A and 6B
Alternatively, as outlined more fully below, it is possible to enzymatically add nucleotides composing ETMs to the terminus of a nucleic acid, for example a target nucleic acid In this embodiment, an effective "recruitment linker" is added to the terminus of the target sequence, that can then be used for detection, as is generally depicted in Figure 6Q Thus the invention provides compositions utilizing electrodes composing monolayers of conductive ohgomers and capture probes, and target sequences that comprises a first portion that is capable of hybridizing to a component of an assay complex, and a second portion that does not hybridize to a component of an assay complex and comprises at least one covalently attached electron transfer moiety Similarly, methods utilizing these compositions are also provided
It is also possible to have ETMs connected to probe sequences, i e sequences designed to hybridize to complementary sequences, i e in mechanιsm-1 sequences, although this may also be used in mechanιsm-2 systems Thus, ETMs may be added to non-recruitment linkers as well For example, there may be ETMs added to sections of label probes that do hybridize to components of the assay complex, for example the first portion, or to the target sequence as outlined above and depicted in Figure 6R These ETMs may be used for electron transfer detection in some embodiments, or they may not, depending on the location and system For example, in some embodiments, when for example the target sequence containing randomly incorporated ETMs is hybridized directly to the capture probe, as is depicted in Figure 6A and 6B, there may be ETMs in the portion hybridizing to the capture probe If the capture probe is attached to the electrode using a conductive ohgomer, these ETMs can be used to detect electron transfer as has been previously described Alternatively these ETMs may not be specifically detected
Similarly, in some embodiments, when the recruitment linker is nucleic acid, it may be desirable in some instances to have some or all of the recruitment linker be double stranded, for example in the mechanιsm-2 systems In one embodiment, there may be a second recruitment linker, substantially complementary to the first recruitment linker, that can hybridize to the first recruitment linker In a preferred embodiment, the first recruitment linker comprises the covalently attached ETMs In an alternative embodiment, the second recruitment linker contains the ETMs, and the first recruitment linker does not, and the ETMs are recruited to the surface by hybridization of the second recruitment linker to the first In yet another embodiment, both the first and second recruitment linkers comprise ETMs It should be noted, as discussed above, that nucleic acids composing a large number of ETMs may not hybridize as well, i e the Tm may be decreased, depending on the site of attachment and the characteristics of the ETM Thus, in general, when multiple ETMs are used on hybridizing strands, i e in mechanιsm-1 systems, generally there are less than about 5, with less than about 3 being preferred, or alternatively the ETMs should be spaced sufficiently far apart that the intervening nucleotides can sufficiently hybridize to allow good kinetics
In a preferred embodiment, the compositions of the invention are used to detect target analytes in a sample In a preferred embodiment, the target analyte is a nucleic acid, and target sequences are detected The term "target sequence" or grammatical equivalents herein means a nucleic acid sequence on a single strand of nucleic acid The target sequence may be a portion of a gene, a regulatory sequence, genomic DNA, cDNA, RNA including mRNA and rRNA, or others It may be any length, with the understanding that longer sequences are more specific As will be appreciated by those in the art, the complementary target sequence may take many forms For example, it may be contained within a larger nucleic acid sequence, i e all or part of a gene or mRNA, a restriction fragment of a plasmid or genomic DNA, among others As is outlined more fully below, probes are made to hybridize to target sequences to determine the presence or absence of the target sequence in a sample Generally speaking, this term will be understood by those skilled in the art The target sequence may also be comprised of different target domains, for example, a first target domain of the sample target sequence may hybridize to a capture probe or a portion of capture extender probe, a second target domain may hybridize to a portion of an amplifier probe, a label probe, or a different capture or capture extender probe, etc The target domains may be adjacent or separated The terms "first" and "second" are not meant to confer an orientation of the sequences with respect to the 5'-3' orientation of the target sequence For example, assuming a 5'-3' orientation of the complementary target sequence, the first target domain may be located either 5' to the second domain, or 3' to the second domain If required, the target analyte is prepared using known techniques For example, the sample may be treated to lyse the cells, using known lysis buffers, electroporation, etc , with purification and/or amplification such as PCR occuong as needed, as will be appreciated by those in the art
For nucleic acid systems, the probes of the present invention are designed to be complementary to a target sequence (either the target sequence of the sample or to other probe sequences, as is described below), such that hybridization of the target sequence and the probes of the present invention occurs As outlined below, this complementarity need not be perfect, there may be any number of base pair mismatches which will interfere with hybridization between the target sequence and the single stranded nucleic acids of the present invention However, if the number of mutations is so great that no hybridization can occur under even the least stringent of hybridization conditions, the sequence is not a complementary target sequence Thus, by "substantially complementary" herein is meant that the probes are sufficiently complementary to the target sequences to hybridize under normal reaction conditions
Generally, the nucleic acid compositions of the invention are useful as oligonucleotide probes As is appreciated by those in the art, the length of the probe will vary with the length of the target sequence and the hybodizatioo and wash conditions Generally, oligonucleotide probes range from about 8 to about 50 nucleotides, with from about 10 to about 30 being preferred and from about 12 to about 25 being especially preferred In some cases, very long probes may be used, e g 50 to 200-300 nucleotides in length Thus, in the structures depicted herein, nucleosides may be replaced with nucleic acids
A variety of hybridization conditions may be used in the present invention, including high, moderate and low stringency conditions, see for example Maniatis et al , Molecular Cloning A Laboratory
Manual, 2d Edition, 1989, and Short Protocols in Molecular Biology, ed Ausubel, et al, hereby incorporated by reference Stringent conditions are sequence-dependent and will be different in different circumstances Longer sequences hybridize specifically at higher temperatures An extensive guide to the hybridization of nucleic acids is found in Tijssen, Techniques in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology-Hybridization with Nucleic Acid Probes, "Overview of principles of hybridization and the strategy of nucleic acid assays" (1993) Generally, stringent conditions are selected to be about 5-10°C lower than the thermal melting point (Tm) for the specific sequence at a defined ionic strength pH The Tm is the temperature (under defined ionic strength, pH and nucleic acid concentration) at which 50% of the probes complementary to the target hybridize to the target sequence at equilibrium (as the target sequences are present in excess, at Tm, 50% of the probes are occupied at equilibrium) Stringent conditions will be those in which the salt concentration is less than about 1 0 sodium ion, typically about 0 01 to 1 0 M sodium ion concentration (or other salts) at pH 7 0 to 8 3 and the temperature is at least about 30°C for short probes (e g 10 to 50 nucleotides) and at least about 60°C for long probes (e g greater than 50 nucleotides) Stringent conditions may also be achieved with the addition of destabilizing agents such as formamide
In another embodiment, less stringent hybridization conditions are used, for example, moderate or low stringency conditions may be used, as are known in the art, see Maniatis and Ausubel, supra, and Tijssen, supra
The hybridization conditions may also vary when a non-ionic backbone, i e PNA is used, as is known in the art In addition, cross-linking agents may be added after target binding to cross-link, i e covalently attach, the two strands of the hybridization complex
As will be appreciated by those in the art, the systems of the invention may take on a large number of different configurations, as is generally depicted in Figures 3, 4, 5 and 6 In general, there are three types of systems that can be used (1) systems in which the target sequence itself is labeled with
ETMs (see Figures 4A, 5A, 5B and 5D, this is generally useful for nucleic acid systems), (2) systems in which label probes directly bind to the target analytes (see Figures 4C and 4H for nucleic acid examples and Figures 6A, 6B, 6D and 6E, for examples of non-nucleic acid analytes), and (3) systems in which label probes are indirectly bound to the target sequences, for example through the use of amplifier probes (see Figures 4C, 5E, 5F and 5G for nucleic acid examples and Figure 6C for representative non-nucleic acid target analytes)
in all three of these systems, it is preferred, although not required, that the target sequence be immobilized on the electrode surface This is preferably done using capture probes and optionally one or more capture extender probes, see Figure 3 for representative nucleic acid examples When only capture probes are utilized, it is necessary to have unique capture probes for each target sequence, that is, the surface must be customized to contain unique capture probes Alternatively, capture extender probes may be used, that allow a "universal" surface, i e a surface containing a single type of capture probe that can be used to detect any target sequence "Capture extender" probes are generally depicted in Figures 4C, 5C, 5E, 5G and 5H, as well as Figure 6B, etc , and have a first portion that will hybridize to all or part of the capture probe, and a second portion that will hybridize to a portion of the target sequence This then allows the generation of customized soluble probes, which as will be appreciated by those in the art is generally simpler and less costly As shown herein, two capture extender probes may be used This has generally been done to stabilize assay complexes (for example when the target sequence is large, or when large amplifier probes (particularly branched or dendomer amplifier probes) are used While the discussion and figures herein generally depict nucleic acid embodiments, these same ideas can be used for non-nucleic acid target analytes For example, capture extender ligands can be generated, as will be appreciated by those in the art For example, a nucleic acid "tail" can be added to a binding hgand, as is generally depicted in Figure 6B
In a preferred embodiment, the binding ligands are added after the formation of the SAM ((4) above) This may be done in a variety of ways, as will be appreciated by those m the art In one embodiment, conductive ohgomers with terminal functional groups are made, with preferred embodiments utilizing activated carboxylates and isothiocyanates, that will react with primary amines that are either present or put onto the binding hgand such as a nucleic acid, using an activated carboxylate These two reagents have the advantage of being stable in aqueous solution, yet react with primary alkylamines However, the primary aromatic amines and secondary and tertiary amines of the bases should not react, thus allowing site specific addition of nucleic acids to the surface Similar techniques can be used with non-nucleic acid components, for example, as outlined above, the attachment of proteins to SAMs composing metal chelates is known, see U S Patent No 5,620,850 This allows the spotting of probes (either capture or detection probes, or both) using known methods (ink jet, spotting, etc ) onto the surface
In addition, there are a number of non-nucleic acid methods that can be used to immobilize a nucleic acid on a surface For example, binding partner pairs can be utilized, i e one binding partner is attached to the terminus of the conductive ohgomer, and the other to the end of the nucleic acid This may also be done without using a nucleic acid capture probe, that is, one binding partner serves as the capture probe and the other is attached to either the target sequence or a capture extender probe That is, either the target sequence comprises the binding partner, or a capture extender probe that will hybridize to the target sequence comprises the binding partner Suitable binding partner pairs include, but are not limited to, hapten pairs such as biotin/streptavidm, antigens/antibodies, NTA/histidme tags, etc In general, smaller binding partners are preferred, such that the electrons can pass from the nucleic acid into the conductive ohgomer to allow detection
In a preferred embodiment, when the target sequence itself is modified to contain a binding partner, the binding partner is attached via a modified nucleotide that can be enzymatically attached to the target sequence, for example during a PCR target amplification step Alternatively, the binding partner should be easily attached to the target sequence
Alternatively, a capture extender probe may be utilized that has a nucleic acid portion for hybridization to the target as well as a binding partner (for example, the capture extender probe may comprise a non-nucleic acid portion such as an alkyl linker that is used to attach a binding partner) In this embodiment, it may be desirable to cross-link the double-stranded nucleic acid of the target and capture extender probe for stability, for example using psoralen as is known in the art
In one embodiment, the target is not bound to the electrode surface using capture probes In this embodiment, what is important, as for all the assays herein, is that excess label probes be removed prior to detection and that the assay complex (the recruitment linker) be in proximity to the surface As will be appreciated by those in the art, this may be accomplished in other ways For example, the assay complex may be present on beads that are added to the electrode composing the monolayer The recruitment linkers comprising the ETMs may be placed in proximity to the conductive ohgomer surface using techniques well known in the art, including gravity settling of the beads on the surface, electrostatic or magnetic interactions between bead components and the surface, using binding partner attachment as outlined above Alternatively, after the removal of excess reagents such as excess label probes, the assay complex may be driven down to the surface, for example via electrophoresis as is outlined herein
However, preferred embodiments utilize assay complexes attached via nucleic acid capture probes
In a preferred embodiment, the target sequence itself contains the ETMs As discussed above, this may be done using target sequences that have ETMs incorporated at any number of positions, as outlined above In this embodiment, as for the others of the system, the 3'-5' ooeotation of the probes and targets is chosen to get the ETM-contaming structures (i e recruitment linkers or target sequences) as close to the surface of the monolayer as possible, and in the correct orientation This may be done using attachment via insulators or conductive ohgomers as is generally shown in the Figures In addition, as will be appreciated by those in the art, multiple capture probes can be utilized, either in a configuration such as depicted in Figure 5D, wherein the 5'-3' orientation of the capture probes is different, or where "loops" of target form when multiples of capture probes are used
In a preferred embodiment, the label probes directly hybridize to the target sequences, as is generally depicted in the figures In these embodiments, the target sequence is preferably, but not required to be, immobilized on the surface using capture probes, including capture extender probes Label probes are then used to bong the ETMs into proximity of the surface of the monolayer composing conductive ohgomers In a preferred embodiment, multiple label probes are used, that is, label probes are designed such that the portion that hybridizes to the target sequence can be different for a number of different label probes, such that amplification of the signal occurs, since multiple label probes can bind for every target sequence Thus, as depicted in the figures, n is an integer of at least one
Depending on the sensitivity desired, the length of the target sequence, the number of ETMs per label probe, etc , preferred ranges of n are from 1 to 50, with from about 1 to about 20 being particularly preferred, and from about 2 to about 5 being especially preferred In addition, if "generic" label probes are desired, label extender probes can be used as generally described below for use with amplifier probes
As above, generally in this embodiment the configuration of the system and the label probes are designed to recruit the ETMs as close as possible to the monolayer surface
In a preferred embodiment, the label probes are hybridized to the target sequence indirectly That is, the present invention finds use in novel combinations of signal amplification technologies and electron transfer detection on electrodes, which may be particularly useful in sandwich hybridization assays, as generally depicted in the Figures for nucleic acid embodiments, similar systems can be developed for non-nucleic acid target analytes In these embodiments, the amplifier probes of the invention are bound to the target sequence in a sample either directly or indirectly Since the amplifier probes preferably contain a relatively large number of amplification sequences that are available for binding of label probes, the detectable signal is significantly increased, and allows the detection limits of the target to be significantly improved These label and amplifier probes, and the detection methods described herein, may be used in essentially any known nucleic acid hybridization formats, such as those in which the target is bound directly to a solid phase or in sandwich hybridization assays in which the target is bound to one or more nucleic acids that are in turn bound to the solid phase
In general, these embodiments may be described as follows with particular reference to nucleic acids An amplifier probe is hybridized to the target sequence, either directly (e g Figure 4C and 5E), or through the use of a label extender probe (e g Figure 5Fand 5G), which serves to allow "generic" amplifier probes to be made The target sequence is preferably, but not required to be, immobilized on the electrode using capture probes Preferably, the amplifier probe contains a multiplicity of amplification sequences, although in some embodiments, as described below, the amplifier probe may contain only a single amplification sequence The amplifier probe may take on a number of different forms, either a branched conformation, a dendomer conformation, or a linear "string" of amplification sequences These amplification sequences are used to form hybridization complexes with label probes, and the ETMs can be detected using the electrode
Accordingly, the present invention provides assay complexes composing at least one amplifier probe By "amplifier probe" or "nucleic acid multimer" or "amplification multimer" or grammatical equivalents herein is meant a nucleic acid probe that is used to facilitate signal amplification Amplifier probes comprise at least a first single-stranded nucleic acid probe sequence, as defined below, and at least one single-stranded nucleic acid amplification sequence, with a multiplicity of amplification sequences being preferred Amplifier probes comprise a first probe sequence that is used, either directly or indirectly, to hybridize to the target sequence That is, the amplifier probe itself may have a first probe sequence that is substantially complementary to the target sequence (e g Figure 5E), or it has a first probe sequence that is substantially complementary to a portion of an additional probe, in this case called a label extender probe, that has a first portion that is substantially complementary to the target sequence (e g
Figures 5F and 5G) In a preferred embodiment, the first probe sequence of the amplifier probe is substantially complementary to the target sequence, as is generally depicted in Figure 5E
In general, as for all the probes herein, the first probe sequence is of a length sufficient to give specificity and stability Thus generally, the probe sequences of the invention that are designed to hybridize to another nucleic acid (i e probe sequences, amplification sequences, portions or domains of larger probes) are at least about 5 nucleosides long, with at least about 10 being preferred and at least about 15 being especially preferred
In a preferred embodiment, the amplifier probes, or any of the other probes of the invention, may form hairpin stem-loop structures in the absence of their target The length of the stem double-stranded sequence will be selected such that the hairpin structure is not favored in the presence of target The use of these type of probes, in the systems of the invention or in any nucleic acid detection systems, can result in a significant decrease in non-specific binding and thus an increase in the signal to noise ratio
Generally, these hairpin structures comprise four components The first component is a target binding sequence, i e a region complementary to the target (which may be the sample target sequence or another probe sequence to which binding is desired), that is about 10 nucleosides long, with about 15 being preferred The second component is a loop sequence, that can facilitate the formation of nucleic acid loops Particularly preferred in this regard are repeats of GTC, which has been identified in Fragile X Syndrome as forming turns (When PNA analogs are used, turns composing prohne residues may be preferred) Generally, from three to five repeats are used, with four to five being preferred The third component is a self-complementary region, which has a first portion that is complementary to a portion of the target sequence region and a second portion that comprises a first portion of the label probe binding sequence The fourth component is substantially complementary to a label probe (or other probe, as the case may be) The fourth component further comprises a "sticky end", that is, a portion that does not hybridize to any other portion of the probe, and preferably contains most, if not all, of the ETMs As will be appreciated by those in the art, the any or all of the probes described herein may be configured to form hairpins in the absence of their targets, including the amplifier, capture, capture extender, label and label extender probes In a preferred embodiment, several different amplifier probes are used, each with first probe sequences that will hybridize to a different portion of the target sequence That is, there is more than one level of amplification, the amplifier probe provides an amplification of signal due to a multiplicity of labelling events and several different amplifier probes, each with this multiplicity of labels, for each target sequence is used Thus, preferred embodiments utilize at least two different pools of amplifier probes, each pool having a different probe sequence for hybridization to different portions of the target sequence, the only real limitation on the number of different amplifier probes will be the length of the original target sequence In addition, it is also possible that the different amplifier probes contain different amplification sequences, although this is generally not preferred
In a preferred embodiment, the amplifier probe does not hybridize to the sample target sequence directly, but instead hybridizes to a first portion of a label extender probe, as is generally depicted in Figure 5F This is particularly useful to allow the use of "generic" amplifier probes, that is, amplifier probes that can be used with a variety of different targets This may be desirable since several of the amplifier probes require special synthesis techniques Thus, the addition of a relatively short probe as a label extender probe is preferred Thus, the first probe sequence of the amplifier probe is substantially complementary to a first portion or domain of a first label extender single-stranded nucleic acid probe The label extender probe also contains a second portion or domain that is substantially complementary to a portion of the target sequence Both of these portions are preferably at least about 10 to about 50 nucleotides in length, with a range of about 15 to about 30 being preferred The terms "first" and "second" are not meant to confer an orientation of the sequences with respect to the 5'-3' orientation of the target or probe sequences For example, assuming a 5'-3' ooeotation of the complementary target sequence, the first portion may be located either 5' to the second portion, or 3' to the second portion For convenience herein, the order of probe sequences are generally shown from left to right
lo a preferred embodiment, more than one label extender probe-amplifier probe pair may be used, tht is, n is more than 1 That is, a plurality of label extender probes may be used, each with a portion that is substantially complementary to a different portion of the target sequence, this can serve as another level of amplification Thus, a preferred embodiment utilizes pools of at least two label extender probes, with the upper limit being set by the length of the target sequence
In a preferred embodiment, more than one label extender probe is used with a single amplifier probe to reduce non-specific binding, as is depicted in Figure 5G and generally outlined in U S Patent No 5,681 ,697, incorporated by reference herein In this embodiment, a first portion of the first label extender probe hybridizes to a first portion of the target sequence, and the second portion of the first label extender probe hybridizes to a first probe sequence of the amplifier probe A first portion of the second label extender probe hybridizes to a second portion of the target sequence, and the second portion of the second label extender probe hybridizes to a second probe sequence of the amplifier probe These form structures sometimes referred to as "cruciform" structures or configurations, and are generally done to confer stability when large branched or dendrimeoc amplifier probes are used
In addition, as will be appreciated by those in the art, the label extender probes may interact with a preamplifier probe, described below, rather than the amplifier probe directly
Similarly, as outlined above, a preferred embodiment utilizes several different amplifier probes, each with first probe sequences that will hybridize to a different portion of the label extender probe In addition, as outlined above, it is also possible that the different amplifier probes contain different amplification sequences, although this is generally not preferred
In addition to the first probe sequence, the amplifier probe also comprises at least one amplification sequence An ' amplification sequence" or "amplification segment" or grammatical equivalents herein is meant a sequence that is used, either directly or indirectly, to bind to a first portion of a label probe as is more fully described below Preferably, the amplifier probe comprises a multiplicity of amplification sequences, with from about 3 to about 1000 being preferred, from about 10 to about 100 being particularly preferred, and about 50 being especially preferred In some cases, for example when linear amplifier probes are used, from 1 to about 20 is preferred with from about 5 to about 10 being particularly preferred
The amplification sequences may be linked to each other in a variety of ways, as will be appreciated by those in the art They may be covalently linked directly to each other, or to intervening sequences or chemical moieties, through nucleic acid linkages such as phosphodiester bonds, PNA bonds, etc , or through interposed linking agents such ammo acid, carbohydrate or polyol bridges, or through other cross-linking agents or binding partners The sιte(s) of linkage may be at the ends of a segment, and/or at one or more internal nucleotides in the strand In a preferred embodiment, the amplification sequences are attached via nucleic acid linkages
In a preferred embodiment, branched amplifier probes are used, as are generally described in U S Patent No 5,124,246, hereby incorporated by reference Branched amplifier probes may take on "fork-like" or "comb-like" conformations "Fork-like" branched amplifier probes generally have three or more oligonucleotide segments emanating from a point of origin to form a branched structure The point of origin may be another nucleotide segment or a multifunctional molecule to whcih at least three segments can be covalently or tightly bound "Comb-like" branched amplifier probes have a linear backbone with a multiplicity of sidecham ohgonucleotides extending from the backbone In either conformation, the pendant segments will normally depend from a modified nucleotide or other organic moiety having the appropriate functional groups for attachment of ohgonucleotides Furthermore, in either conformation, a large number of amplification sequences are available for binding, either directly or indirectly, to detection probes In general, these structures are made as is known in the art, using modified multifunctional nucleotides, as is described in U S Patent Nos 5,635,352 and 5,124,246, among others
In a preferred embodiment, dendomer amplifier probes are used, as are generally described in U S Patent No 5,175,270, hereby expressly incorporated by reference Dendrimeπc amplifier probes have amplification sequences that are attached via hybridization, and thus have portions of double-stranded nucleic acid as a component of their structure The outer surface of the dendomer amplifier probe has a multiplicity of amplification sequences
In a preferred embodiment, linear amplifier probes are used, that have individual amplification sequences linked end-to-end either directly or with short intervening sequences to form a polymer As with the other amplifier configurations, there may be additional sequences or moieties between the amplification sequences In addition, as outlined herein, linear amplification probes may form hairpin stem-loop structures, as is depicted in Figure 12
In one embodiment, the linear amplifier probe has a single amplification sequence This may be useful when cycles of hybπdization/disassociation occurs, forming a pool of amplifier probe that was hybridized to the target and then removed to allow more probes to bind, or when large numbers of ETMs are used for each label probe However, in a preferred embodiment, linear amplifier probes comprise a multiplicity of amplification sequences
In addition, the amplifier probe may be totally linear, totally branched, totally dendrimeoc, or aoy combination thereof
The amplification sequences of the amplifier probe are used, either directly or indirectly, to bind to a label probe to allow detection In a preferred embodiment, the amplification sequences of the amplifier probe are substantially complementary to a first portion of a label probe Alternatively, amplifier extender probes are used, that have a first portion that binds to the amplification sequence and a second portion that binds to the first portion of the label probe
In addition, the compositions of the invention may include "preamplifier" molecules, which serves a bridging moiety between the label extender molecules and the amplifier probes In this way, more amplifier and thus more ETMs are ultimately bound to the detection probes Preamplifier molecules may be either linear or branched, and typically contain in the range of about 30-3000 nucleotides
The reactions outlined below may be accomplished in a variety of ways, as will be appreciated by those in the art Components of the reaction may be added simultaneously, or sequentially, in any order, with preferred embodiments outlined below in addition, the reaction may include a variety of other reagents may be included in the assays These include reagents like salts, buffers, neutral proteins, e g albumin, detergents, etc which may be used to facilitate optimal hybridization and detection, and/or reduce non-specific or background interactions Also reagents that otherwise improve the efficiency of the assay, such as protease inhibitors, nuclease inhibitors, anti-microbial agents, etc , may be used, depending on the sample preparation methods and purity of the target
Generally, the methods are as follows In a preferred embodiment, the target is initially driven down to the vicinity of the detection probe using any one of the methods outlined above In general, two methods may be employed, the assay complexes as described below are formed first (i e all the soluble compooents are added together, either simultaneously or sequentially, including capture extender probes, label probes, amplification probes, label extender probes, etc ), including any hybridization accelerators, and then the complex is added to the surface for binding to a detection electrode Alternatively, the target may be added, hybridization acceleration occurs to allow the target to bind the capture binding hgand and then additional components are added to form the assay complex The latter is described in detail below, but either procedure may be followed Similarly, some components may be added, electrophoresed, and other components added, for example, the target analyte may be combined with any capture extender probes and then transported, etc In addition, as outlined herein, electrophoretic steps may be used to effect "washing" steps, wherein excess reagents (non-bound analytes, excess probes, etc ) can be driven from the surface
In a preferred embodiment, non-specific interactions can be decreased using several electrophoretic methods In a preferred embodiment, label probes that are not specifically directly or indirectly bound to a target sequence can be removed from the surface by a pulse of an opposite electric field, i e the electric field is reversed for some period of time The strength of the reverse electric field is chosen such that specifically bound label probes are not removed (or any of the other required components of the attachment and assay complexes)
In a preferred embodiment, for example when electrophoresis is used, the label probes or label binding ligands comprising the ETMs carry a charge opposite to the target aoalyte This can be done either with nucleic acid label probes or charged solution binding ligands, although the discussion focuses on nucleic acid embodiments This can be useful in two different systems In a preferred embodiment, the target analyte carries a large excess of charge, i e a negative charge in the case of nucleic acid The binding of one or more positively charged label probes does not significantly change the net negative charge on the target complex, that is, the target will still be attracted to the cathode However, un-bound label probes, or label probes not specifically bound to the target, are repulsed, thus resulting in a decrease of non-specific binding For example, PNA backbones can be modified to carry a net positive charge, and there are other nucleic acid analogs as known in the art that are positively charged
In a preferred embodiment, the label probe is has a high amount of opposite charge, such that upon binding to the target analyte, the net charge of the target analyte changes Thus, for example, for nucleic acids, the label probes carry a sufficient positive charge to render the label probe-target analyte complex positively charged This results in the specific target analyte being drawn to the anode, but all other negatively charged elements, i e other nucleic acids, will be repulsed This is particularly useful when there is an excess of other targets present, for example, when the target analyte is a minor species of a large excess of other nucleic acids, for example
In a preferred embodiment, the target analyte is initially electrophoretically transported to the detection electrode, and then immobilized or attached to the detection electrode In one embodiment, this is done by forming an attachment complex (frequently referred to herein as a hybridization complex when nucleic acid components are used) between a capture probe and a portion of the target analyte
A preferred embodiment utilizes capture extender binding ligands (also called capture extender probes herein), in this embodiment, an attachment complex is formed between a portion of the target sequence and a first portion of a capture extender probe, and an additional attachment complex between a second portion of the capture extender probe and a portion of the capture probe Additional preferred embodiments utilize additional capture probes, thus forming an attachment complex between a portion of the target sequence and a first portion of a second capture extender probe, and an attachment complex between a second portion of the second capture extender probe and a second portion of the capture probe
Alternatively, the attachment of the target sequence to the electrode is done simultaneously with the other reactions
The method proceeds with the introduction of amplifier probes, if utilized In a preferred embodiment, the amplifier probe comprises a first probe sequence that is substantially complementary to a portion of the target sequence, and at least one amplification sequence In one embodiment, the first probe sequence of the amplifier probe is hybridized to the target sequence, and any unhybodized amplifier probe is removed This will generally be done as is known in the art, and depends on the type of assay When the target sequence is immobilized on a surface such as an electrode, the removal of excess reagents generally is done via one or more washing steps, as will be appreciated by those in the art In this embodiment, the target may be immobilized on any solid support When the target sequence is not immobilized on a surface, the removal of excess reagents such as the probes of the invention may be done by adding beads (i e solid support particles) that contain complementary sequences to the probes, such that the excess probes bind to the beads The beads can then be removed, for example by centrifugation, filtration, the application of magnetic or electrostatic fields, etc
The reaction mixture is then subjected to conditions (temperature, high salt, changes in pH, etc ) under which the amplifier probe disassociates from the target sequence, and the amplifier probe is collected The amplifier probe may then be added to an electrode composiog capture probes for the amplifier probes, label probes added, and detection is achieved
In a preferred embodiment, a larger pool of probe is generated by adding more amplifier probe to the target sequence and the hybodization/disassociation reactions are repeated, to generate a larger pool of amplifier probe This pool of amplifier probe is then added to an electrode comprising amplifier capture probes, label probes added, and detection proceeds
In this embodiment, it is preferred that the target sequence be immobilized on a solid support, including an electrode, using the methods described herein, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, alternate solid support attachment technologies may be used, such as attachment to glass, polymers, etc It is possible to do the reaction on one solid support and then add the pooled amplifier probe to an electrode for detection
In a preferred embodiment, the amplifier probe comprises a multiplicity of amplification sequences
In one embodiment, the first probe sequence of the amplifier probe is hybridized to the target sequence, and any unhybodized amplifier probe is removed Again, preferred embodiments utilize immobilized target sequences, wherein the target sequences are immobilized by hybridization with capture probes that are attached to the electrode, or hybridization to capture extender probes that in turn hybridize with immobilized capture probes as is described herein Generally, in these embodiments, the capture probes and the detection probes are immobilized on the electrode, generally at the same "address" In a preferred embodiment, the first probe sequence of the amplifier probe is hybridized to a first portion of at least one label extender probe, and a second portion of the label extender probe is hybridized to a portion of the target sequence Other preferred embodiments utilize more than one label extender probe, as is generally shown in Figure 5G
In a preferred embodiment, the amplification sequences of the amplifier probe are used directly for detection, by hybridizing at least one label probe sequence
The invention thus provides assay complexes that minimally comprise a target sequence and a label probe "Assay complex" herein is meant the collection of attachment or hybridization complexes comprising analytes, including binding ligands and targets, that allows detection The composition of the assay complex depends on the use of the different probe component outlined herein Thus, in Figure 6A, the assay complex comprises the capture probe and the target sequence The assay complexes may also include capture extender probes, label extender probes, and amplifier probes, as outlined herein, depending on the configuration used
The assays are generally run under stringency conditions which allows formation of the label probe attachment complex only in the presence of target Stoogency can be controlled by altering a step parameter that is a thermodynamic variable, including, but not limited to, temperature, formamide concentration, salt concentration, chaotropic salt concentration pH, organic solvent concentration, etc
Stringency may also include the use of an electrophoretic step to dove non-specific (i e low stringency) materials away from the detection electrode
These parameters may also be used to control non-specific binding, as is generally outlined in U S Patent No 5,681 ,697 Thus it may be desirable to perform certain steps at higher stringency conditions, for example, when an initial hybridization step is done between the target sequence and the label extender and capture extender probes Running this step at conditions which favor specific binding can allow the reduction of non-specific binding
In a preferred nucleic acid embodiment, when all of the components outlined herein are used, a preferred method is as follows Single-stranded target sequence is incubated under hybridization conditions with the capture extender probes and the label extender probes A preferred embodiment does this reaction in the presence of the electrode with immobilized capture probes, although this may also be done in two steps, with the initial incubation and the subsequent addition to the electrode Excess reagents are washed off, and amplifier probes are then added If preamplifier probes are used, they may be added either poor to the amplifier probes or simultaneously with the amplifier probes Excess reagents are washed off, and label probes are then added Excess reagents are washed off, and detection proceeds as outlined below
In one embodiment, a number of capture probes (or capture probes and capture extender probes) that are each substantially complementary to a different portion of the target sequence are used
Again, as outlined herein, when amplifier probes are used, the system is generally configured such that upon label probe binding, the recruitment linkers composing the ETMs are placed in proximity either to the monolayer surface containing conductive ohgomers (mechanιsm-2) or in proximity to detection probes Thus for example, for mechanιsm-2 systems, when the ETMs are attached via
"dendomer" type structures as outlined herein, the length of the linkers from the nucleic acid point of attachment to the ETMs may vary, particularly with the length of the capture probe when capture extender probes are used That is, longer capture probes, with capture extenders, can result in the target sequences being "held" further away from the surface than for shorter capture probes Adding extra linking sequences between the probe nucleic acid and the ETMs can result in the ETMs being spatially closer to the surface, giving better results Similarly, for mechanιsm-1 systems, the length of the recruitment linker, the length of the detection probe, and their distance, may be optimized
In addition, if desirable, nucleic acids utilized in the invention may also be ligated together poor to detection, if applicable, by using standard molecular biology techniques such as the use of a ligase
Similarly, if desirable for stability, cross-linking agents may be added to hold the structures stable
As will be appreciated by those in the art, while described for nucleic acids, the systems outlined herein can be used for other target analytes as well
The compositions of the invention are generally synthesized as outlined below and in U S S N s 08/743,798, 08/873,978, 08/911,085, 08/911,085, and PCT US97/20014, all of which are expressly incorporated by reference, generally utilizing techniques well known in the art As will be appreciated by those in the art, many of the techniques outlined below are directed to nucleic acids containing a ribose-phosphate backbone However, as outlined above, many alternate nucleic acid analogs may be utilized, some of which may not contain either ribose or phosphate in the backbone In these embodiments, for attachment at positions other than the base, attachment is done as will be appreciated by those in the art, depending on the backbone Thus, for example, attachment can be made at the carbon atoms of the PNA backbone, as is described below, or at either terminus of the PNA The compositions may be made in several ways A preferred method first synthesizes a conductive ohgomer attached to a nucleoside, with addition of additional nucleosides to form the capture probe followed by attachment to the electrode Alternatively, the whole capture probe may be made and then the completed conductive ohgomer added, followed by attachment to the electrode Alternatively a monolayer of conductive ohgomer (some of which have functional groups for attachment of capture probes) is attached to the electrode first, followed by attachment of the capture probe The latter two methods may be preferred when conductive ohgomers are used which are not stable in the solvents and under the conditions used in traditional nucleic acid synthesis
In a preferred embodiment, the compositions of the invention are made by first forming the conductive ohgomer covalently attached to the nucleoside, followed by the addition of additional nucleosides to form a capture probe nucleic acid, with the last step comprising the addition of the conductive ohgomer to the electrode
The attachment of the conductive ohgomer to the nucleoside may be done in several ways In a preferred embodiment, all or part of the conductive ohgomer is synthesized first (generally with a functional group on the end for attachment to the electrode), which is then attached to the nucleoside Additional nucleosides are then added as required, with the last step generally being attachment to the electrode Alternatively, ohgomer units are added one at a time to the nucleoside, with addition of additional nucleosides and attachment to the electrode A number of representative syntheses are shown in the Figures of WO 98/20162, PCT/US98/12430, PCT/US98/12082, PCT/US99/01705, PCT/US99/01703, and U S S N s 09/135,183, 60/105,875, and 09/295,691 , all of which are incorporated by reference
The conductive ohgomer is then attached to a nucleoside that may contain one (or more) of the ohgomer units, attached as depicted herein
In a preferred embodiment, attachment is to a ribose of the ribose-phosphate backbooe, including amide and amme linkages In a preferred embodiment, there is at least a methylene group or other short aliphatic alkyl groups (as a Z group) between the nitrogen attached to the ribose and the aromatic ring of the conductive ohgomer
Alternatively, attachment is via a phosphate of the ribose-phosphate backbone, as generally outlined
Figure imgf000091_0001
In a preferred embodiment, attachment is via the base In a preferred embodiment, protecting groups may be added to the base poor to addition of the conductive ohgomers, as is generally known in the art In addition, the palladium cross-coupling reactions may be altered to prevent dimeπzation problems, i e two conductive ohgomers dimerizmg, rather than coupling to the base
Alternatively, attachment to the base may be done by making the nucleoside with one unit of the ohgomer, followed by the addition of others
Once the modified nucleosides are prepared, protected and activated, poor to attachment to the electrode, they may be incorporated into a growing oligonucleotide by standard synthetic techniques (Gait, Oligonucleotide Synthesis A Practical Approach, IRL Press, Oxford, UK 1984, Eckstein) in several ways
In one embodiment, one or more modified nucleosides are converted to the tophosphate form and incorporated into a growing oligonucleotide chain by using standard molecular biology techniques such as with the use of the enzyme DNA polymerase I, T4 DNA polymerase, T7 DNA polymerase, Taq DNA polymerase, reverse transcriptase, and RNA polymerases For the incorporation of a 3' modified nucleoside to a nucleic acid, terminal deoxynucleotidyltransferase may be used (Rathff, Terminal deoxynucleotidyltransferase In The Enzymes, Vol 14A P D Boyer ed pp 105-118 Academic Press, San Diego, CA 1981) Thus, the present invention provides deoxyobonucleoside tophosphates comprising a covalently attached ETM Preferred embodiments utilize ETM attachment to the base or the backbone, such as the ribose (preferably in the 2' position), as is generally depicted below in
Structures 42 and 43
Structure 42
0 0
Figure imgf000092_0001
Structure 43
Figure imgf000093_0001
Thus, in some embodiments, it may be possible to generate the nucleic acids composing ETMs in situ For example, a target sequence can hybridize to a capture probe (for example on the surface) in such a way that the terminus of the target sequence is exposed, i e unhybodized The addition of enzyme and tπphosphate nucleotides labelled with ETMs allows the in situ creation of the label Similarly, using labeled nucleotides recognized by polymerases can allow simultaneous PCR and detection, that is, the target sequences are generated in situ
In a preferred embodiment, the modified nucleoside is converted to the phosphoramidite or H- phosphonate form, which are then used in solid-phase or solution syntheses of ohgonucleotides In this way the modified nucleoside, either for attachment at the ribose (i e ammo- or thiol-modified nucleosides) or the base, is incorporated into the oligonucleotide at either an internal position or the 5' terminus This is generally done in one of two ways First, the 5' position of the ribose is protected with 4',4-dιmethoxytotyl (DMT) followed by reaction with either 2-cyanoethoxy-bιs- dnsopropylaminophosphine in the presence of diisopropylammonium tetrazohde, or by reaction with chlorodiisopropylammo 2'-cyanoethyoxyphosphιne, to give the phosphoramidite as is known in the art, although other techniques may be used as will be appreciated by those in the art See Gait, supra, Caruthers, Science 230 281 (1985), both of which are expressly incorporated herein by reference
For attachment of a group to the 3' terminus, a preferred method utilizes the attachment of the modified nucleoside (or the nucleoside replacement) to controlled pore glass (CPG) or other ohgomeric supports In this embodiment, the modified nucleoside is protected at the 5' end with DMT, and then reacted with succinic anhydride with activation The resulting succmyl compound is attached to CPG or other ohgomeric supports as is known in the art Further phosphoramidite nucleosides are added, either modified or not, to the 5' end after deprotection Thus, the present invention provides conductive ohgomers or insulators covalently attached to nucleosides attached to solid ohgomeric supports such as CPG, and phosphoramidite derivatives of the nucleosides of the invention
The invention further provides methods of making label probes with recruitment linkers composing ETMs These synthetic reactions will depend on the character of the recruitment linker and the method of attachment of the ETM, as will be appreciated by those in the art For nucleic acid recruitment linkers, the label probes are generally made as outlined herein with the incorporation of ETMs at one or more positions When a transition metal complex is used as the ETM, synthesis may occur in several ways In a preferred embodiment, the hgand(s) are added to a nucleoside, followed by the transition metal ion, and then the nucleoside with the transition metal complex attached is added to an oligonucleotide, i e by addition to the nucleic acid synthesizer Alternatively, the hgand(s) may be attached, followed by incorportation into a growing oligonucleotide chain, followed by the addition of the metal ion
In a preferred embodiment, ETMs are attached to a ribose of the ribose-phosphate backbone This is generally done as is outlined herein for conductive ohgomers, as described herein, and in PCT publication WO 95/15971 , using ammo-modified or oxo-modified nucleosides, at either the 2' or 3' position of the ribose The amino group may then be used either as a hgand, for example as a transition metal hgand for attachment of the metal ion, or as a chemically functional group that can be used for attachment of other ligands or organic ETMs, for example via amide linkages, as will be appreciated by those in the art For example, the examples describe the synthesis of nucleosides with a variety of ETMs attached via the ribose
In a preferred embodiment, ETMs are attached to a phosphate of the ribose-phosphate backbone As outlined herein, this may be done using phosphodiester analogs such as phosphoramidite bonds, see generally PCT publication WO 95/15971 , or can be done in a similar manner to that described in PCT US97/20014, where the conductive ohgomer is replaced by a transition metal hgand or complex or an organic ETM
Attachment to alternate backbones, for example peptide nucleic acids or alternate phosphate linkages will be done as will be appreciated by those in the art
In a preferred embodiment, ETMs are attached to a base of the nucleoside This may be done in a variety of ways In one embodiment, ammo groups of the base, either naturally occuroog or added as is described herein (see the fngures, for example), are used either as ligands for transition metal complexes or as a chemically functional group that can be used to add other ligands, for example via an amide linkage, or organic ETMs This is done as will be appreciated by those in the art Alternatively, nucleosides containing halogen atoms attached to the heterocychc nog are commercially available Acetylene linked ligands may be added using the halogenated bases, as is generally known, see for example, Tzahs et al Tetrahedron Lett 36(34) 6017-6020 (1995), Tzahs et al ,
Tetrahedron Lett 36(2) 3489-3490 (1995), and Tzahs et al , Chem Communications (in press) 1996, all of which are hereby expressly incorporated by reference See also the figures and the examples, which describes the synthesis of metallocenes (in this case, ferrocene) attached via acetylene linkages to the bases
In one embodiment, the nucleosides are made with transition metal ligands, incorporated into a nucleic acid, and then the transition metal ion and any remaining necessary ligands are added as is known in the art In an alternative embodiment, the transition metal ion and additional ligands are added prior to incorporation into the nucleic acid
Once the nucleic acids of the invention are made, with a covalently attached attachment linker (i e either an insulator or a conductive ohgomer), the attachment linker is attached to the electrode The method will vary depending on the type of electrode used As is described herem, the attachment linkers are generally made with a terminal "A" linker to facilitate attachment to the electrode For the purposes of this application, a sulfur-gold attachment is considered a covalent attachment
In a preferred embodiment, conductive ohgomers, insulators, and attachment linkers are covalently attached via sulfur linkages to the electrode However, surprisingly, traditional protecting groups for use of attaching molecules to gold electrodes are generally not ideal for use in both synthesis of the compositions described herein and inclusion in oligonucleotide synthetic reactions Accordingly, the present invention provides novel methods for the attachment of conductive ohgomers to gold electrodes, utilizing unusual protecting groups, including ethylpyodine, and tnmethylsilylethyl as is depicted in the Figures However, as will be appreciated by those in the art, when the conductive ohgomers do not contain nucleic acids, traditional protecting groups such as acetyl groups and others may be used See Greene et al , supra
This may be done in several ways In a preferred embodiment, the subunit of the conductive ohgomer which contains the sulfur atom for attachment to the electrode is protected with an ethyl-pyridme or tnmethylsilylethyl group For the former, this is generally done by contacting the subunit containing the sulfur atom (preferably in the form of a sulfhydryl) with a vinyl pyridme group or vinyl tnmethylsilylethyl group under conditions whereby an ethylpyodine group or tnmethylsilylethyl group is added to the sulfur atom
This subunit also generally contains a functional moiety for attachment of additional subunits, and thus additional subunits are attached to form the conductive ohgomer The conductive ohgomer is then attached to a nucleoside, and additional nucleosides attached The protecting group is then removed and the sulfur-gold covalent attachment is made Alternatively, all or part of the conductive ohgomer is made, and then either a subunit containing a protected sulfur atom is added, or a sulfur atom is added and then protected The conductive ohgomer is then attached to a nucleoside, and additional nucleosides attached Alternatively, the conductive ohgomer attached to a nucleic acid is made, and then either a subunit containing a protected sulfur atom is added, or a sulfur atom is added and then protected Alternatively, the ethyl pyridme protecting group may be used as above, but removed after one or more steps and replaced with a standard protecting group like a disulfide Thus, the ethyl pyridme or tnmethylsilylethyl group may serve as the protecting group for some of the synthetic reactions, and then removed and replaced with a traditional protecting group
By "subunit" of a conductive polymer herein is meant at least the moiety of the conductive ohgomer to which the sulfur atom is attached, although additional atoms may be present, including either functional groups which allow the addition of additional components of the conductive ohgomer, or additional components of the conductive ohgomer Thus, for example, when Structure 1 ohgomers are used, a subunit comprises at least the first Y group
A preferred method comprises 1 ) adding an ethyl pyridme or tnmethylsilylethyl protecting group to a sulfur atom attached to a first subunit of a conductive ohgomer, generally done by adding a vinyl pyridme or tnmethylsilylethyl group to a sulfhydryl, 2) adding additional subunits to form the conductive ohgomer, 3) adding at least a first nucleoside to the conductive ohgomer, 4) adding additional nucleosides to the first nucleoside to form a nucleic acid, 5) attaching the conductive ohgomer to the gold electrode This may also be done in the absence of nucleosides as is described in the Examples
The above method may also be used to attach insulator molecules to a gold electrode
In a preferred embodiment, a monolayer composing conductive ohgomers (and optionally insulators) is added to the electrode Generally, the chemistry of addition is similar to or the same as the addition of conductive ohgomers to the electrode, i e using a sulfur atom for attachment to a gold electrode, etc Compositions comprising monolayers in addition to the conductive ohgomers covalently attached to nucleic acids may be made in at least one of five ways (1) addition of the monolayer, followed by subsequent addition of the attachment linker-nucleic acid complex, (2) addition of theattachment linker-nucleic acid complex followed by addition of the monolayer, (3) simultaneous addition of the monolayer and attachment linker-nucleic acid complex, (4) formation of a monolayer (using any of 1 , 2 or 3) which includes attachment linkers which terminate in a functional moiety suitable for attachment of a completed nucleic acid, or (5) formation of a monolayer which includes attachment linkers which terminate in a functional moiety suitable for nucleic acid synthesis, i e the nucleic acid is synthesized on the surface of the monolayer as is known in the art Such suitable functional moieties include, but are not limited to, nucleosides, ammo groups, carboxyl groups, protected sulfur moieties, or hydroxyl groups for phosphoramidite additions The examples describe the formation of a monolayer on a gold electrode using the preferred method (1)
In a preferred embodiment, the nucleic acid is a peptide nucleic acid or analog In this embodiment, the invention provides peptide nucleic acids with at least one covalently attached ETM or attachment linker In a preferred embodiment, these moieties are covalently attached to an monomeric subunit of the PNA By "monomeric subunit of PNA" herein is meant the -NH-CH2CH2-N(COCH2-Base)-CH2-CO- monomer, or derivatives (herein included within the definition of "nucleoside") of PNA For example, the number of carbon atoms in the PNA backbone may be altered, see generally Nielsen et al , Chem Soc Rev 1997 page 73, which discloses a number of PNA derivatives, herein expressly incorporated by reference Similarly, the amide bond linking the base to the backbone may be altered, phosphoramide and sulfuramide bonds may be used Alternatively, the moieties are attached to an internal monomeric subunit. By "internal" herein is meant that the monomeric subunit is not either the N-terminal monomeric subunit or the C-terminal monomeric subuoit lo this embodiment, the moieties can be attached either to a base or to the backbone of the monomeric subuoit Attachment to the base is done as outlined herein or known in the literature In general, the moieties are added to a base which is then incorporated into a PNA as outlined herein The base may be either protected, as required for incorporation into the PNA synthetic reaction, or denvatized, to allow incorporation, either poor to the addition of the chemical substituent or afterwards Protection and denvatization of the bases is shown in PCT US97/20014 The bases can then be incorporated into monomeric subunits
In a preferred embodiment, the moieties are covalently attached to the backbone of the PNA monomer The attachment is generally to one of the unsubstituted carbon atoms of the monomeric subunit, preferably the α-carbon of the backbone, although attachment at either of the carbon 1 or 2 positions, or the α-carbon of the amide bond linking the base to the backbone may be done In the case of PNA analogs, other carbons or atoms may be substituted as well In a preferred embodiment, moieties are added at the α-carbon atoms, either to a terminal monomeric subunit or an internal one
In this embodiment, a modified monomeric subunit is synthesized with an ETM or an attachment linker, or a functional group for its attachment, and then the base is added and the modified monomer can be incorporated into a growing PNA chain
Once generated, the monomeric subunits with covalently attached moieties are incorporated into a PNA using the techniques outlined in Will et al , Tetrahedron 51(44) 12069-12082 (1995), and Vanderlaan et al , Tett Let 38 2249-2252 (1997), both of which are hereby expressly incorporated in their entirety These procedures allow the addition of chemical substituents to peptide nucleic acids without destroying the chemical substituents As will be appreciated by those in the art, electrodes may be made that have any combination of nucleic acids, conductive ohgomers and insulators
The compositions of the invention may additionally contain one or more labels at any position By "label" herein is meant an element (e g an isotope) or chemical compound that is attached to enable the detection of the compound Preferred labels are radioactive isotopic labels, and colored or fluorescent dyes The labels may be incorporated into the compound at any position In addition, the compositions of the invention may also contain other moieties such as cross-linking agents to facilitate cross-linking of the target-probe complex See for example, Lukhtanov et al , Nucl Acids Res 24(4) 683 (1996) and Tabone et al , Biochem 33 375 (1994), both of which are expressly incorporated by reference
Once made, the compositions find use in a number of applications, as described herein In particular, the compositions of the invention find use in binding assays for the detection of target analytes, in particular nucleic acid target sequences As will be appreciated by those in the art, electrodes can be made that have a single species of binding ligand, or multiple binding hgand species, i e in an array format
In addition, as outlined herein, the use of a solid support such as an electrode enables the use of these assays in an array form For example, the use of oligonucleotide arrays are well known in the art In addition, techniques are known for "addressing" locations within an electrode and for the surface modification of electrodes Thus, in a preferred embodiment, arrays of different binding ligands, including nucleic acids, are laid down on the electrode, each of which are covalently attached to the electrode via an attachment linker In this embodiment, the number of different binding ligands may vary widely, from one to thousands, with from about 4 to about 100,000 being preferred, and from about 10 to about 10,000 being particularly preferred
Once the assay complexes of the invention are made, that minimally comprise a target analyte and a label probe, detection proceeds with electronic initiation Without being limited by the mechanism or theory, detection is based on the transfer of electrons from the ETM to the electrode, including via the
"π-way"
Detection of electron transfer, i e the presence of the ETMs, is generally initiated electronically, with voltage being preferred A potential is applied to the assay complex Precise control and variations in the applied potential can be via a potentiostat and either a three electrode system (one reference, one sample (or working) and one counter electrode) or a two electrode system (one sample and one counter electrode) This allows matching of applied potential to peak potential of the system which depends in part on the choice of ETMs and in part on the conductive ohgomer used, the composition and integrity of the monolayer, and what type of reference electrode is used As described herein, ferrocene is a preferred ETM
In a preferred embodiment, a co-reductant or co-oxidant (collectively, co-redoxant) is used, as an additional electron source or sink See generally Sato et al , Bull Chem Soc Jpn 66 1032 (1993), Uosaki et al , Electrochimica Acta 36 1799 (1991), and Alleman et al , J Phys Chem 100 17050 (1996), all of which are incorporated by reference
In a preferred embodiment, an input electron source in solution is used in the initiation of electron transfer, preferably when initiation and detection are being done using DC current or at AC frequencies where diffusion is not limiting In general, as will be appreciated by those in the art, preferred embodiments utilize monolayers that contain a minimum of "holes", such that short-circuiting of the system is avoided This may be done in several general ways In a preferred embodiment, an input electron source is used that has a lower or similar redox potential than the ETM of the label probe Thus, at voltages above the redox potential of the input electron source, both the ETM and the input electron source are oxidized and can thus donate electrons, the ETM donates an electron to the electrode and the input source donates to the ETM For example, ferrocene, as a ETM attached to the compositions of the invention as described in the examples, has a redox potential of roughly 200 mV in aqueous solution (which can change significantly depending on what the ferrocene is bound to, the manner of the linkage and the presence of any substitution groups) Ferrocyanide, an electron source, has a redox potential of roughly 200 mV as well (in aqueous solution) Accordingly, at or above voltages of roughly 200 mV, ferrocene is converted to ferπceoium, which then transfers an electron to the electrode Now the ferπcyanide can be oxidized to transfer an electron to the ETM In this way, the electron source (or co-reductant) serves to amplify the signal generated in the system, as the electron source molecules rapidly and repeatedly donate electrons to the ETM attached to the nucleic acid The rate of electron donation or acceptance will be limited by the rate of diffusion of the co-reductant, the electron transfer between the co-reductant and the ETM, which in turn is affected by the concentration and size, etc
Alternatively, input electron sources that have lower redox potentials than the ETM are used At voltages less than the redox potential of the ETM, but higher than the redox potential of the electron source, the input source such as ferrocyanide is unable to be oxided and thus is unable to donate an electron to the ETM, i e no electron transfer occurs Once ferrocene is oxidized, then there is a pathway for electron transfer In an alternate preferred embodiment, an input electron source is used that has a higher redox potential than the ETM of the label probe For example, luminol, an electron source, has a redox potential of roughly 720 mV At voltages higher than the redox potential of the ETM, but lower than the redox potential of the electron source, i e 200 - 720 mV, the ferrocene is oxided, and transfers a single electron to the electrode via the conductive ohgomer However, the ETM is unable to accept any electrons from the luminol electron source, since the voltages are less than the redox potential of the luminol However, at or above the redox potential of luminol, the luminol then transfers an electron to the ETM, allowing rapid and repeated electron transfer In this way, the electron source (or co-reductant) serves to amplify the signal generated in the system, as the electron source molecules rapidly and repeatedly donate electrons to the ETM of the label probe
Luminol has the added benefit of becoming a chemiiuminiscent species upon oxidation (see Jirka et al , Analytica Chimica Acta 284 345 (1993)), thus allowing photo-detection of electron transfer from the ETM to the electrode Thus, as long as the luminol is unable to contact the electrode directly, i e in the presence of the SAM such that there is no efficient electron transfer pathway to the electrode, luminol can only be oxidized by transferring an electron to the ETM on the label probe When the ETM is not present, i e when the target sequence is not hybridized to the composition of the invention, luminol is not significantly oxidized, resulting in a low photon emission and thus a low (if any) signal from the luminol In the presence of the target, a much larger signal is generated Thus, the measure of luminol oxidation by photon emission is an indirect measurement of the ability of the ETM to donate electrons to the electrode Furthermore, since photon detection is generally more sensitive than electronic detection, the sensitivity of the system may be increased Initial results suggest that luminescence may depend on hydrogen peroxide concentration, pH, and luminol concentration, the latter of which appears to be non-linear
Suitable electron source molecules are well known in the art, and include, but are not limited to, femcyanide, and luminol
Alternatively, output electron acceptors or sinks could be used, i e the above reactions could be run in reverse, with the ETM such as a metallocene receiving an electron from the electrode, converting it to the metalhcenium, with the output electron acceptor then accepting the electron rapidly and repeatedly In this embodiment, cobalticenium is the preferred ETM
The presence of the ETMs at the surface of the monolayer can be detected in a variety of ways A variety of detection methods may be used, including, but not limited to, optical detection (as a result of spectral changes upon changes in redox states), which includes fluorescence, phosphorescence, luminiscence, chemiluminescence, electrochemiluminescence, and refractive index, and electronic detection, including, but not limited to, amperommetry, voltammetry, capacitance and impedence These methods include time or frequency dependent methods based on AC or DC currents, pulsed methods, lock-in techniques, filtering (high pass, low pass, band pass), and time-resolved techniques including time-resolved fluorescence
In one embodiment, the efficient transfer of electrons from the ETM to the electrode results in stereotyped changes in the redox state of the ETM With many ETMs including the complexes of ruthenium containing bipyodine, pyridme and imidazole rings, these changes in redox state are associated with changes in spectral properties Significant differences in absorbance are observed between reduced and oxidized states for these molecules See for example Fabbozzi et al , Chem
Soc Rev 1995 pp197-202) These differences can be monitored using a spectrophotometer or simple photomultiplier tube device
In this embodiment, possible electron donors and acceptors include all the derivatives listed above for photoactivation or initiation Preferred electron donors and acceptors have characteristically large spectral changes upon oxidation and reduction resulting in highly sensitive monitoring of electron transfer Such examples include Ru(NH3)4py and Ru(bpy)2ιm as preferred examples It should be understood that only the donor or acceptor that is being monitored by absorbance need have ideal spectral characteristics
In a preferred embodiment, the electron transfer is detected fluorometπcally Numerous transition metal complexes, including those of ruthenium, have distinct fluorescence properties Therefore, the change in redox state of the electron donors and electron acceptors attached to the nucleic acid can be monitored very sensitively using fluorescence, for example with Ru(4,7-bιphenyl2-phenanthrohne)3 2+ The production of this compound can be easily measured using standard fluorescence assay techniques For example, laser induced fluorescence can be recorded in a standard single cell fluorimeter, a flow through "on-line" fluoometer (such as those attached to a chromatography system) or a multi-sample "plate-reader" similar to those marketed for 96-well immuno assays
Alternatively, fluorescence can be measured using fiber optic sensors with nucleic acid probes in solution or attached to the fiber optic Fluorescence is monitored using a photomultiplier tube or other light detection instrument attached to the fiber optic The advantage of this system is the extremely small volumes of sample that can be assayed
In addition, scanning fluorescence detectors such as the Fluorlmager sold by Molecular Dynamics are ideally suited to monitoring the fluorescence of modified nucleic acid molecules arrayed on solid surfaces The advantage of this system is the large number of electron transfer probes that can be scanned at once using chips covered with thousands of distinct nucleic acid probes
Many transition metal complexes display fluorescence with large Stokes shifts Suitable examples include bis- and tnsphenanthrolme complexes and bis- and tosbipyodyl complexes of transition metals such as ruthenium (see Juris, A , Balzani, V , et al Coord Chem Rev , V 84, p 85-277, 1988) Preferred examples display efficient fluorescence (reasonably high quantum yields) as well as low reorganization energies These include Ru(4,7-bιphenyl2-phenanthrohne)3 2+, Ru(4,4'-dιphenyl-2,2'- bιpyodιne)3 2+ and platinum complexes (see Cummmgs et al , J Am Chem Soc 118 1949-1960 (1996), incorporated by reference) Alternatively, a reduction in fluorescence associated with hybridization can be measured using these systems
In a further embodiment, electrochemiluminescence is used as the basis of the electron transfer detection With some ETMs such as Ru2+(bpy)3, direct luminescence accompanies excited state decay Changes in this property are associated with nucleic acid hybodizatioo and can be monitored with a simple photomultiplier tube arrangement (see Blackburn, G F Clin Chem 37 1534-1539 (1991), and Juris et al , supra
In a preferred embodiment, electronic detection is used, including amperommetry, voltammetry, capacitance, and impedence Suitable techniques include, but are not limited to, electrogravimetry, coulometry (including controlled potential coulometry and constant current coulometry), voltametry (cyclic voltametry, pulse voltametry (normal pulse voltametry, square wave voltametry, differential pulse voltametry, Osteryoung square wave voltametry, and coulostatic pulse techniques), stopping analysis (aniodic stripping analysis, cathiodic stripping analysis, square wave stopping voltammetry), conductance measurements (electrolytic conductance, direct analysis), time-dependent electrochemical analyses (chronoamperometry, chronopotentiometry, cyclic chronopotentiometry and amperometry, AC polography, chronogalvametry, and chronocoulometry), AC impedance measurement, capacitance measurement, AC voltametry, and photoelectrochemistry
In a preferred embodiment, monitoring electron transfer is via amperometoc detection This method of detection involves applying a potential (as compared to a separate reference electrode) between the nucleic acid-conjugated electrode and a reference (counter) electrode in the sample containing target genes of interest Electron transfer of differing efficiencies is induced in samples in the presence or absence of target nucleic acid, that is, the presence or absence of the target nucleic acid, and thus the label probe, can result in different currents The device for measuring electron transfer amperometπcally involves sensitive current detection and includes a means of controlling the voltage potential, usually a potentiostat This voltage is optimized with reference to the potential of the electron donating complex on the label probe Possible electron donating complexes include those previously mentioned with complexes of iron, osmium, platinum, cobalt, rhenium and ruthenium being preferred and complexes of iron being most preferred
In a preferred embodiment, alternative electron detection modes are utilized For example, potentiometπc (or voltammetπc) measurements involve non-faradaic (no net current flow) processes and are utilized traditionally in pH and other ion detectors Similar sensors are used to monitor electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode In addition, other properties of insulators (such as resistance) and of conductors (such as conductivity, impedance and capicitance) could be used to monitor electron transfer between ETM and the electrode Finally, any system that generates a current (such as electron transfer) also generates a small magnetic field, which may be monitored in some embodiments
It should be understood that one benefit of the fast rates of electron transfer observed in the compositions of the invention is that time resolution can greatly enhance the signal-to-noise results of monitors based on absorbance, fluorescence and electronic current The fast rates of electron transfer of the present invention result both in high signals and stereotyped delays between electron transfer initiation and completion By amplifying signals of particular delays, such as through the use of pulsed initiation of electron transfer and "lock-in" amplifiers of detection, and Fourier transforms
In a preferred embodiment, electron transfer is initiated using alternating current (AC) methods Without being bound by theory, it appears that ETMs, bound to an electrode, generally respond similarly to an AC voltage across a circuit containing resistors and capacitors Basically, any methods which enable the determination of the nature of these complexes, which act as a resistor and capacitor, can be used as the basis of detection Surprisingly, traditional electrochemical theory, such as exemplified in Laviron et al , J Electroanal Chem 97 135 (1979) and Laviron et al , J Electroanal Chem 105 35 (1979), both of which are incorporated by reference, do not accurately model the systems described herein, except for very small EAC (less than 10 mV) and relatively large numbers of molecules That is, the AC current (I) is not accurately described by Laviron's equation This may be due in part to the fact that this theory assumes an unlimited source and sink of electrons, which is not true in the present systems
The AC voltametry theory that models these systems well is outlined in O'Connor et al , J Electroanal
Chem 466(2) 197-202 (1999), hereby expressly incorporated by reference The equation that predicts these systems is shown below as Equation 1 Equation 1
Figure imgf000104_0001
In Equation 1 , n is the number of electrons oxidized or reduced per redox molecule, f is the applied frequency, F is Faraday's constant, Ntota, is the total number of redox molecules, E0 is the formal potential of the redox molecule, R is the gas constant, T is the temperature in degrees Kelvin, and EDC is the electrode potential The model fits the experimental data very well In some cases the current is smaller than predicted, however this has been shown to be caused by ferrocene degradation which may be remedied in a number of ways
In addition, the faradaic current can also be expressed as a function of time, as shown in Equation 2 Equation 2
ι,( t) = g °-πF - dV( t)
2RT ( cosh [ — ( V( t) -E. ) ] +l ) dt
RT °
lF is the Faradaic current and qe is the elementary charge
However, Equation 1 does not incorporate the effect of electron transfer rate nor of instrument factors Electron transfer rate is important when the rate is close to or lower than the applied frequency Thus, the true ιAC should be a function of all three, as depicted in Equation 3
Equation 3 ιAC = f(Nernst factors)f(kET)f(ιnstrument factors)
These equations can be used to model and predict the expected AC currents in systems which use input signals composing both AC and DC components As outlined above, traditional theory surprisingly does not model these systems at all, except for very low voltages
In general, non-specifically bound label probes/ETMs show differences in impedance (i e higher impedances) than when the label probes containing the ETMs are specifically bound in the correct orientation In a preferred embodiment, the non-specifically bound material is washed away, resulting in an effective impedance of infinity Thus, AC detection gives several advantages as is generally discussed below, including an increase in sensitivity, and the ability to "filter out" background noise In particular, changes in impedance (including, for example, bulk impedance) as between non-specific binding of ETM-containmg probes and target-specific assay complex formation may be monitored
Accordingly, when using AC initiation and detection methods, the frequency response of the system changes as a result of the presence of the ETM By "frequency response" herein is meant a modification of signals as a result of electron transfer between the electrode and the ETM This modification is different depending on signal frequency A frequency response includes AC currents at one or more frequencies, phase shifts, DC offset voltages, faradaic impedance, etc
Once the assay complex including the target sequence and label probe is made, a first input electrical signal is then applied to the system, preferably via at least the sample electrode (containing the complexes of the invention) and the counter electrode, to initiate electron transfer between the electrode and the ETM Three electrode systems may also be used, with the voltage applied to the reference and working electrodes The first input signal comprises at least an AC component The AC component may be of variable amplitude and frequency Generally, for use in the present methods, the AC amplitude ranges from about 1 mV to about 1 1 V, with from about 10 mV to about 800 mV being preferred, and from about 10 mV to about 500 mV being especially preferred The AC frequency ranges from about 0 01 Hz to about 100 MHz, with from about 10 Hz to about 10 MHz being preferred, and from about 100 Hz to about 20 MHz being especially preferred
The use of combinations of AC and DC signals gives a variety of advantages, including surprising sensitivity and signal maximization
In a preferred embodiment, the first input signal comprises a DC compooeot aod ao AC component That is, a DC offset voltage between the sample and counter electrodes is swept through the electrochemical potential of the ETM (for example, when ferrocene is used, the sweep is generally from 0 to 500 mV) (or alternatively, the working electrode is grounded and the reference electrode is swept from 0 to -500 mV) The sweep is used to identify the DC voltage at which the maximum response of the system is seen This is generally at or about the electrochemical potential of the ETM Once this voltage is determined, either a sweep or one or more uniform DC offset voltages may be used DC offset voltages of from about -1 V to about +1 1 V are preferred, with from about -500 mV to about +800 mV being especially preferred, and from about -300 mV to about 500 mV being particularly preferred In a preferred embodiment, the DC offset voltage is not zero On top of the DC offset voltage, an AC signal component of variable amplitude and frequency is applied If the ETM is present, and can respond to the AC perturbation, an AC current will be produced due to electron transfer between the electrode and the ETM For defined systems, it may be sufficient to apply a single input signal to differentiate between the presence and absence of the ETM (i e the presence of the target sequence) nucleic acid Alternatively, a plurality of input signals are applied As outlined herein, this may take a variety of forms, including using multiple frequencies, multiple DC offset voltages, or multiple AC amplitudes, or combinations of any or all of these
Thus, in a preferred embodiment, multiple DC offset voltages are used, although as outlined above, DC voltage sweeps are preferred This may be done at a single frequency, or at two or more frequencies
In a preferred embodiment, the AC amplitude is varied Without being bound by theory, it appears that increasing the amplitude increases the driving force Thus, higher amplitudes, which result in higher overpotentials give faster rates of electron transfer Thus, generally, the same system gives an improved response (i e higher output signals) at any single frequency through the use of higher overpotentials at that frequency Thus, the amplitude may be increased at high frequencies to increase the rate of electron transfer through the system, resulting in greater sensitivity In addition, this may be used, for example, to induce responses in slower systems such as those that do not possess optimal spacing configurations
In a preferred embodiment, measurements of the system are taken at at least two separate amplitudes or overpotentials, with measurements at a plurality of amplitudes being preferred As noted above, changes in response as a result of changes in amplitude may form the basis of identification, calibration and quantification of the system In addition, one or more AC frequencies can be used as well
In a preferred embodiment, the AC frequency is varied At different frequencies, different molecules respond in different ways As will be appreciated by those in the art, increasing the frequency generally increases the output current However, when the frequency is greater than the rate at which electrons may travel between the electrode and the ETM, higher frequencies result in a loss or decrease of output signal At some point, the frequency will be greater than the rate of electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode, and then the output signal will also drop
In one embodiment, detection utilizes a single measurement of output signal at a single frequency That is, the frequency response of the system in the absence of target sequence, and thus the absence of label probe containing ETMs, can be previously determined to be very low at a particular high frequency Using this information, any response at a particular frequency, will show the presence of the assay complex That is, any response at a particular frequency is characteristic of the assay complex Thus, it may only be necessary to use a single input high frequency, and any changes in frequency response is an indication that the ETM is present, and thus that the target sequence is present
In addition, the use of AC techniques allows the significant reduction of background signals at any single frequency due to entities other than the ETMs, i e "locking out" or "filtering" unwanted signals That is, the frequency response of a charge carrier or redox active molecule in solution will be limited by its diffusion coefficient and charge transfer coefficient Accordingly, at high frequencies, a charge carrier may not diffuse rapidly enough to transfer its charge to the electrode, and/or the charge transfer kinetics may not be fast enough This is particularly significant in embodiments that do not have good monolayers, i e have partial or insufficient monolayers, i e where the solvent is accessible to the electrode As outlined above, in DC techniques, the presence of "holes" where the electrode is accessible to the solvent can result in solvent charge carriers "short circuiting" the system, i e the reach the electrode and generate background signal However, using the present AC techniques, one or more frequencies can be chosen that prevent a frequency response of one or more charge carriers in solution, whether or not a monolayer is present This is particularly significant since many biological fluids such as blood contain significant amounts of redox active molecules which can interfere with amperometoc detection methods
In a preferred embodiment, measurements of the system are taken at at least two separate frequencies, with measurements at a plurality of frequencies being preferred A plurality of frequencies includes a scan For example, measuring the output signal, e g , the AC current, at a low input frequency such as 1 - 20 Hz, and comparing the response to the output signal at high frequency such as 10 - 100 kHz will show a frequency response difference between the presence and absence of the ETM In a preferred embodiment, the frequency response is determined at at least two, preferably at least about five, and more preferably at least about ten frequencies
After transmitting the input signal to initiate electron transfer, an output signal is received or detected The presence and magnitude of the output signal will depend on a number of factors, including the overpotential/amphtude of the input signal, the frequency of the input AC signal, the composition of the intervening medium, the DC offset, the environment of the system, the nature of the ETM, the solvent, and the type and concentration of salt At a given input signal, the presence and magnitude of the output signal will depend in general on the presence or absence of the ETM, the placement and distance of the ETM from the surface of the monolayer and the character of the input signal In some embodiments, it may be possible to distinguish between non-specific binding of label probes and the formation of target specific assay complexes containing label probes, on the basis of impedance In a preferred embodiment, the output signal comprises an AC current As outlined above, the magnitude of the output current will depend on a number of parameters By varying these parameters, the system may be optimized in a number of ways
In general, AC currents generated in the present invention range from about 1 femptoamp to about 1 milhamp, with currents from about 50 femptoamps to about 100 microamps being preferred, and from about 1 picoamp to about 1 microamp being especially preferred
In a preferred embodiment, the output signal is phase shifted in the AC component relative to the input signal Without being bound by theory, it appears that the systems of the present invention may be sufficiently uniform to allow phase-shifting based detection That is, the complex biomolecules of the invention through which electron transfer occurs react to the AC input in a homogeneous manner, similar to standard electronic components, such that a phase shift can be determined This may serve as the basis of detection between the presence and absence of the ETM, and/or differences between the presence of target-specific assay complexes comprising label probes and non-specific binding of the label probes to the system components
The output signal is characteristic of the presence of the ETM, that is, the output sigoal is characteristic of the presence of the target-specific assay complex comprising label probes and ETMs In a preferred embodiment, the basis of the detection is a difference in the faradaic impedance of the system as a result of the formation of the assay complex Faradaic impedance is the impedance of the system between the electrode and the ETM Faradaic impedance is quite different from the bulk or dielectric impedance, which is the impedance of the bulk solution between the electrodes Many factors may change the faradaic impedance which may not effect the bulk impedance, and vice versa Thus, the assay complexes composiog the nucleic acids in this system have a certain faradaic impedance, that will depend on the distance between the ETM and the electrode, their electronic properties, and the composition of the intervening medium, among other things Of importance in the methods of the invention is that the faradaic impedance between the ETM and the electrode is signficantly different depending on whether the label probes containing the ETMs are specifically or non-specifically bound to the electrode
Accordingly, the present invention further provides electronic devices or apparatus for the detection of analytes using the compositions of the invention The apparatus includes a test chamber for receiving a sample solution which has at least a first measuring or sample electrode, and a second measuring or counter electrode Three electrode systems are also useful The first and second measuring electrodes are in contact with a test sample receiving region, such that in the presence of a liquid test sample, the two electrophoresis electrodes may be in electrical contact In a preferred embodiment, the apparatus also includes detection electrodes composing a single stranded nucleic acid capture probe covalently attached via an attachment linker, and a monolayer comprising conductive ohgomers, such as are described herein
The apparatus further comprises an AC voltage source electrically connected to the test chamber, that is, to the measuring electrodes Preferably, the AC voltage source is capable of delivering DC offset voltage as well
In a preferred embodiment, the apparatus further comprises a processor capable of comparing the input signal and the output signal The processor is coupled to the electrodes and configured to receive an output signal, and thus detect the presence of the target nucleic acid
Thus, the compositions of the present invention may be used in a variety of research, clinical, quality control, or field testing settings
In a preferred embodiment, the probes are used in genetic diagnosis For example, probes can be made using the techniques disclosed herein to detect target sequences such as the gene for nonpolyposis colon cancer, the BRCA1 breast cancer gene, P53, which is a gene associated with a variety of cancers, the Apo E4 gene that indicates a greater risk of Alzheimer's disease, allowing for easy presymptomafic screening of patients, mutations in the cystic fibrosis gene, or any of the others well known in the art
In an additional embodiment, viral and bacterial detection is done using the complexes of the invention In this embodiment, probes are designed to detect target sequences from a variety of bacteria and viruses For example, current blood-screening techniques rely on the detection of anti-
HIV antibodies The methods disclosed herein allow for direct screening of clinical samples to detect HIV nucleic acid sequences, particularly highly conserved HIV sequences In addition, this allows direct monitoring of circulating virus within a patient as an improved method of assessing the efficacy of anti-viral therapies Similarly, viruses associated with leukemia, HTLV-I and HTLV-II, may be detected in this way Bacterial infections such as tuberculosis, clymidia and other sexually transmitted diseases, may also be detected
In a preferred embodiment, the nucleic acids of the invention find use as probes for toxic bacteria in the screening of water and food samples For example, samples may be treated to lyse the bacteria to release its nucleic acid, and then probes designed to recognize bacterial strains, including, but not limited to, such pathogenic strains as, Salmonella, Campylobacter, Vibrio cholerae, Leishmama, enterotoxic strains of £ coli, and Legionnaire's disease bacteria Similarly, bioremediation strategies may be evaluated using the compositions of the invention
In a further embodiment, the probes are used for forensic "DNA fingerprinting" to match crime-scene DNA against samples taken from victims and suspects
In an additional embodiment, the probes in an array are used for sequencing by hybridization
Thus, the present invention provides for extremely specific and sensitive probes, which may, in some embodiments, detect target sequences without removal of unhybπdized probe This will be useful in the generation of automated gene probe assays
Alternatively, the compositions of the invention are useful to detect successful gene amplification in PCR, thus allowing successful PCR reactions to be an indication of the presence or absence of a target sequence PCR may be used in this manner in several ways For example, in one embodiment, the PCR reaction is done as is known in the art, and then added to a composition of the invention comprising the target nucleic acid with a ETM, covalently attached to an electrode via a conductive ohgomer with subsequent detection of the target sequence Alternatively, PCR is done using nucleotides labelled with a ETM, either the preseoce of, or with subsequeot addition to, an electrode with a conductive ohgomer and a target nucleic acid Binding of the PCR product containing
ETMs to the electrode composition will allow detection via electron transfer Finally, the nucleic acid attached to the electrode via a conductive polymer may be one PCR primer, with addition of a second primer labelled with an ETM Elongation results in double stranded nucleic acid with a ETM and electrode covalently attached In this way, the present invention is used for PCR detection of target sequences
In a preferred embodiment, the arrays are used for mRNA detection A preferred embodiment utilizes either capture probes or capture extender probes that hybridize close to the 3' polyadenylation tail of the mRNAs This allows the use of one species of target binding probe for detection, i e the probe contains a poly-T portion that will bind to the poly-A tail of the mRNA target Generally, the probe will contain a second portion, preferably non-poly-T, that will bind to the detection probe (or other probe) This allows one target-binding probe to be made, and thus decreases the amount of different probe synthesis that is done
In a preferred embodiment, the use of restriction enzymes and ligation methods allows the creation of
"universal" arrays In this embodiment, monolayers composing capture probes that comprise restriction endonuclease ends, as is generally depicted in Figure 6 By utilizing complementary portions of nucleic acid, while leaving "sticky ends", an array composing any number of restriction endonuclease sites is made Treating a target sample with one or more of these restriction endonucleases allows the targets to bind to the array This can be done without knowing the sequence of the target The target sequences can be ligated, as desired, using standard methods such as gases, and the target sequence detected, using either standard labels or the methods of the invention
The present invention provides methods which can result in sensitive detection of nucleic acids in a preferred embodiment, less than about 10 X 106 molecules are detected, with less than about 10 X 105 being preferred, less than 10 X 10" being particularly preferred, less than about 10 X 103 being especially preferred, and less than about 10 X 102 being most preferred As will be appreciated by those in the art, this assumes a 1 1 correlation between target sequences and reporter molecules, if more than one reporter molecule (i e electron transfer moeity) is used for each target sequence, the sensitivity will go up
While the limits of detection are currently being evaluated, based on the published electron transfer rate through DNA, which is roughly 1 X 106 electrons/sec/duplex for an 8 base pair separation (see Meade et al , Angw Chem Eng Ed , 34 352 (1995)) and high driving forces, AC frequencies of about 100 kHz should be possible As the preliminary results show, electron transfer through these systems is quite efficient, resulting in nearly 100 X 103 electrons/sec, resulting in potential femptoamp sensitivity for very few molecules
All references cited herein are incorporated by reference in their entireity
EXAMPLES
Example 1 General Methods of Making Substrates and Monolayers
SAM formation on Substrates-General Procedure The self-assembled monolayers were formed on a clean gold surface The gold surface can be prepared by a variety of differeot methods melted or polished gold wire, sputtered or evaporated gold on glass or mica or silicon wafers or some other substrate, electroplated or electroless gold on circuit board material or glass or silicon or some other substrate Both the vacuum deposited gold samples (evaporated and sputtered) and the solution deposited gold samples (electroless and electroplated) often require the use of an adhesion layer between the substrate and the gold in order to insure good mechanical stability Chromium, Titanium, TitaniumTungsten or Tantalum is frequently employed with sputtered and evaporated gold Electroplated nickel is usually employed with electroplated and electroless gold, however other adhesion materials can be used
The gold substrate is cleaned prior to monolayer formation A variety of different procedures have been employed Cleaning with a chemical solution is the most prevalent Piranha solution (hydrogen peroxide/sulfuric acid) or aqua regia cleaning (Hydrochloric acid/ Nitric acid) is most prevaleot, however electrochemical methods, flame treatment and plasma methods have also been employed
Following cleaning, the gold substrate is incubated in a deposition solution The deposition solution consists of a mixture of various thiols in a solvent A mixture of alkane thiols in an organic solvent like ethanol is the most prevalent procedure, however numerous variations have been developed Alternative procedures involve gas phase deposition of the alkane thiol, microcontact printing, deposition using neat thiol, deposition from aqueous solvent and two step procedures have been developed The concentration of the alkane thiol in the deposition solution ranges from molar to submicromolar range with 0 5-2 0 milhmolar being the most prevalent The gold substrate is incubated/placed in contact with the deposition solution for less than a second to days depending on the procedure The most common time is 1 hr to overnight incubation The incubation is usually performed at room temperature, however temperatures up to 50°C are common
Mixed monolayers that contain DNA are usually prepared using a two step procedure The thiolated
DNA is deposited during the first deposition step and the mixed monolayer formation is completed during the second step in which a second thiol solution minus DNA is added The second step frequently involves mild heating to promote monolayer reorganization
General Procedure for SAM formation-Deposited from Organic Solution
A clean gold surface was placed into a clean vial A DNA deposition solution in organic solvent was prepared in which the total thiol concentration was between 400 uM and 1 0 mM The deposition solution contained thiol modified DNA and thiol diluent molecules The ratio of DNA to diluent was usually between 10 1 and 1 10 with 1 1 being preferred The preferred solvents are tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitole, dimethylforamide (DMF) or mixtures thereof Sufficient DNA deposition solution is added to the vial so as to completely cover the electrode surface The gold substrate is allowed to incubate at ambient temperature or slightly above ambient temperature for 5-30 minutes After the initial incubation, the deposition solution is removed and a solution of diluent molecule only (100 uM -1 0 mM) in organic solvent is added The gold substrate is allowed to incubate at room temperature or above room temperature until a complete monolayer is formed (10 mιnutes-24 hours) The gold sample is removed from the solution, rinsed in clean solvent and used General Procedure for SAM formation-deposited from Aqueous Solution
A clean gold surface is placed into a clean vial A DNA deposition solution in water is prepared in which the total thiol concentration is between 1 uM and 200 uM The aqueous solution frequently has salt present (approximately 1M), however pure water can be used The deposition solution contains thiol modified DNA and often a thiol diluent molecule The ratio of DNA to diluent is usually between
10 1 and 1 10 with 1 1 being preferred The DNA deposition solution is added to the vial in such a volume so as to completely cover the electrode surface The gold substrate is allowed to incubate at ambient temperature or slightly above ambient temperature for 1-30 minutes with 5 minutes usually being sufficient After the initial incubation, the deposition solution is removed and a solution of diluent molecule only (10 uM -1 0 mM) in either water or organic solvent is added The gold substrate is allowed to incubate at room temperature or above room temperature until a complete monolayer is formed (10 mιnutes-24 hours) The gold sample is removed from the solution, rinsed in clean solvent and used
Monolayers on Au Ball Electrodes
Creating Au Ball Electrodes Use a razor blade to cut 10 cm lengths of gold wire (127 μm diameter, 99 99% pure, e g from Aldoch) Use a 16 gauge needle to pass the wire through a #4 natural rubber septum (of the size to fit over a 14 mL PCR eppendorf tube) (This serves to support the wire and seal the tubes during deposition See below ) Use a clean-burning flame (methane or propane) to melt one centimeter of the wire and form a sphere attached to the wire terminus Adjust the wire length such that when sealed in a PCR tube the gold ball would be positioned near the bottom, able to be submerged in 20 μL of liquid On the day of use, dip the electrodes in aqua regia (4 3 1 H20 HCI HN03) for 20 seconds and then rinse thoroughly with water
Deovatization For 5 minutes, heat 20 μL ahquots of deposition solutions (2 2 1 DNA/H6/M44 at 833 μM total in DMF) in PCR tubes on a PCR block at 50°C Then put each electrode into a tube of deposition solution (submerging just the gold ball — as little of the wire "stem" as possible) and remove to room temperature Incubate for fifteen minutes before transferring the electrodes into PCR tubes with 200 μL of 400 μM M44 in DMF (submerging much of the wire stem as well) Let sit in M44 at room temperature for 5 minutes, then put on the PCR block and run HCLONG Take electrodes out of the M44 solution, dip in 6x SSC, and place in PCR tubes with 20 μL of hybridization solution Dip electrodes in 6x SSC poor to ACV measurement
HCLONG 65°C 2', -0 3°C/s to 40°C, 40°C 2', +0 3°C/s to 55°C, 55°C 2', -0 3°C/s to 30°C, 30°C 2', +0 3°C/s to 35°C, 35°C 2', -0 3°C/s to 22°C
Manufacture of Circuit Boards An 18" x 24" x 0 047" panel of FR-4 (General Electric) with a half-ounce copper foil on both sides was drilled according to specifications (Gerber files) The FR-4 panel is plated with electroless copper (500 microinches) to make the specified drill-holes conductive and then panel is plated with an additional 500 microinches of electroplated copper Following copper plating, the panel is etched according to specifications via cupoc chloride etching (acid etching) The etched panel is then plated with 400 microinches of electroplated nickel with boghtner followed by 50 microinches of soft gold (99 99% purity) The gold panel is coated with liquid photoimagable solder mask (Probimer 52, Ciba-Geigy Co ) on both sides of the panel The imaging is done according to specifications 14 sensor electrodes that are 250 micron in diameter and 2 larger electrodes (500 microns in diameter) are created with insulated leads leading to gold plated contacts at the edge of the board The solder masked panel is then scored according to specifications to create individual wafers that are 1" x 1" A silver/silver chloride paste is applied to one of the two larger electrodes (ERCON R-414) The panel is then plasma cleaned with an Argon/Oxygen Plasma mixture Following cleaning, the panel is stored in a foil-lined bag until use
Monolayer Deposition on Circuit Boards
The circuit boards are removed from the foil-lined bags and immersed in a 10% sulfunc acid solution for 30 seconds Following the sulfuoc acid treatmeot, the boards are immersed in two Milh-Q water baths for 1 minute each The boards are then dried under a stream of nitrogen The boards are placed on a X-Y table in a humidity chamber and a 30 nanohter drop of DNA deposition solution is placed on each of the 14 electrodes The DNA deposition solution consists of 33 uM thiolated DNA, 33 uM 2-unιt phenylacetylene wire (H6), and 16 uM M44 in 6x SSC (900 mM sodium chloride, 90 mM sodium Citrate, pH 7) w/ 1% Tnethylamine The drop is incubated at room temperature for 5 minutes and then the drop is removed by rinsing in a Milh-Q water bath The boards are immersed in a 45° C bath of M44 in acetontole After 30 mmutes, the boards are removed aod immersed in an acetonitole bath for
30 seconds followed by a milh-Q water bath for 30 seconds The boards are dried under a stream of nitrogen
Example 2 Detection of Target Sequences
Monolayer Deposition on Circuit Boards
As above, the circuit boards were removed from the foil-lined bags and immersed in a 10% sulfuoc acid solution for 30 seconds Following the sulfuoc acid treatment, the boards were immersed in two Milh-Q water baths for 1 minute each The boards were then dried under a stream of nitrogen The boards were placed on a X-Y table in a humidity chamber and a 30 nanohter drop of DNA deposition solution was placed on each of the 14 electrodes The DNA deposition solution consisted of 33 uM thiolated DNA, 33 uM 2-unιt phenylacetylene wire (H6), and 16 uM undec-1-en-11ylto(ethylene glycol)(HS-CH2)ι r(OCH2CH2)3-OH) in 6x SSC (900 mM sodium chloride, 90 mM sodium Citrate, pH 7) w/1 % Tnethylamine 3 electrodes were spotted with a solution containing DNA 1 (5'- ACCATGGACACAGAT(CH2)16SH-3') 4 electrodes were spotted with a solution containing DNA 2 (5TCATTGATGGTCTCTTTTAACA((CH2)16SH-3') 4 electrodes were spotted with DNA 3 (5'CACAGTGGGGGGACATCAAGCAGCCATGCAAA(CH2)16SH-3') 3 electrodes were spotted with
DNA 4 (5'-TGTGCAGTTGACGTGGAT(CH2)16SH-3') The deposition solution was allowed to incubate at room temperature for 5 minutes and then the drop was removed by rinsing in a Milli-Q water bath The boards were immersed in a 45°C bath of M44 in acetonitole After 30 minutes, the boards were removed and immersed in an acetonitnle bath for 30 seconds followed by a milh-Q water bath for 30 seconds The boards were dried under a stream of nitrogen and stored in foiled-hned bags flushed with nitrogen until use
Hybridization and Measurement
The modified boards were removed from the foil-lined bags and fitted with an injection molded sample chamber (cartridge) The chamber was adhered to the board using double-sided sticky tape and had a total volume of 250 microhters A hybridization solution was prepared The solution contains 10 nM DNA target (δ'-TGTGCAGTTGACGTGGATTGTTAAAAGAGACCATCAATGAGGAAGCTGCA GAATGGGATAGAGTCATCCAGT-3' (D-998), 30 nM signaling probe (D-1055) and 10 nm 5'- TCTACAG(N6)C(N6)ATCTGTGTCCATGGT-3' (N6 is shown in Figure 1 D of PCTUS99/01705, it comprises a ferrocene connected by a 4 carbon chain to the 2' oxygen of the ribose of a oucleoside)
The signalling probe is as follows 5'-(C23)4-N87-N87-N87-N87-ATC CAC GTC AAC TGC ACA-3' (D- 1055)
I I I I
C23 C23 C23 C23 C23 C23 C23 C23
C23 C23 C23 C23
C23 C23 C23 C23
N87 is a branch point composing a ring structure C23 is shown in Figure 1 F of PCTUS99/01705 In a solution containing 25% Qiagen lysis buffer AL, 455 mM NaCI04, 195 mM NaCI, 1 0 mM mercaptohexanol and 10% fetal calf serum 250 microhters of hybrid solutioo was injected into the cartridge and allowed to hybridize for 12 hours After 12 hours, the hybridized chip was plugged into a homemade transconductance amplifier with switching circuitry The transconductance amplifier was equipped with summing circuitry that combines a DC ramp from the computer DAQ card and an AC sine wave from the lock-in amplifier (SR830 Stanford Instruments) Each electrode was scanned sequentially and the data was saved and manipulated using a homemade program designed using Labview (National Instruments) The chip was scanned at between -100 mV and 500 mV (pseudo Ag/Ag/CI reference electrode) DC with a 25 mV (50 mV peak to peak), 1000 Hz superimposed sine wave. The output current was fed into the lock-in amplifier and the 1000 Hz signal was recorded (ACV technique). The data for each set of pads was compiled and averaged.
Figure imgf000116_0001
The results are shown in Figure 14.

Claims

We claim
1 A method of detecting a target analyte in a sample comprising a) concentrating said target analyte in a detection chamber comprising a detection electrode comprising a covalently attached capture ligand, b) binding said target analyte to said capture hgand to form an assay complex, wherein said assay complex further comprises at least one electron transfer moiety (ETM), and c) detecting the presence of said ETM using said detection electrode
2 A method according to claim 1 wherein said concentrating is done by placing said sample in an electric field between at least a first electrode and at least a second electrode sufficient to cause electrophoretic transport of said sample to said detection electrode
3 A method according to claim 2 wherein said detection electrode is a porous electrode positioned between said first and said second electrodes
4 A method according to claim 2 wherein said detection electrode is the same as said first electrode
5 A method according to claim 2 wherein said detection electrode is separate from said first or second electrodes
6 A method according to claim 4 wherein at least said first electrode comprises a permeation layer
7 A method according to claim 4 wherein an electroactive charge carrier is used for said electrophoretic transport
8 A method according to claim 1 wherein said assay complex comprises a label probe comprising said ETM, and said label probe is positively charged
9 A method according to claim 1 wherein said concentrating comprises including at least one volume exclusion agent in said detection chamber
10 A method according to claim 1 wherein said concentrating comprises precipitating said target analyte 11 A method according to claim 1 wherein said concentrating comprises including at least two reagents that form two separable solution phases, such that said target analyte concentrates in one of said phases
12 A method according to claim 1 wherein said concentrating comprises binding said target analyte to a shuttle particle
13 A method of detecting a target analyte in a sample comprising a) flowing said sample past a detection electrode composing a covalently attached capture gand under conditions that result in the formation of an assay complex composing said target analyte and said capture ligand, wherein said assay complex further comprises at least one electron transfer moiety (ETM), and c) detecting the presence of said ETM using said detection electrode
14 A method according to claim 13 wherein the configuration of said detection electrode results in mixing of said sample
15 A method according to claim 14 wherein said detection electrode comprises weirs
16 A method according to claim 13 wherein said detection electrode is porous and is positioned such that said sample flows through said electrode
17 A method of detecting a target nucleic acid sequence in a sample comprising a) indirectly or directly hybridizing said target sequence to a capture probe covalently attached to a detection electrode to form an assay complex, wherein said assay complex is formed in the presence of a hybridization accelerator, wherein said assay complex further comprises at least one electron transfer moiety (ETM), and c) detecting the presence of said ETM using said detection electrode
18 A method according to claim 7 wherein said hybridization accelerator is a nucleic acid binding protein
19 A method according to claim 7 wherein said hybodizatioo accelerator is a polyvalent ion
20 A method of detecting a target analyte in a sample composing a) adding said sample to a detection electrode composing a covalently attached capture ligand under conditions that result in the formation of an assay complex comprising said target analyte and said capture hgand, wherein said conditions include the presence of mixing particles, wherein said assay complex further comprises at least one electron transfer moiety
(ETM), b) detecting the presence of said ETM using said detection electrode
21 A substrate composing a plurality of gold electrodes each composing a) a self-assembled monolayer, b) a capture ligand, and c) an interconnect such that each electrode is independently addressable
22 A substrate according to claim 21 wherein said substrate is a pooted circuit board material
23 A substrate according to claim 22 wherein said printed circuit board material is fiberglass
24 A substrate according to claim 21 wherein said substrate is plastic
25 A method of making a substrate composing a plurality of gold electrodes comprising a) coating an adhesion metal onto a fiberglass substrate, b) coating gold onto said adhesion metal, and c) forming a pattern composing said plurality of electrodes aod associated interconnects using lithography
26 A method according to claim 25 further composing adding a self-assembled monolayer (SAM) to each electrode
27 A method according to claim 26 wherein said SAM comprises a species composing a capture hgand
28 A method according to claim 26 wherein said SAM is added using an aqueous deposition step
29 A method of making a substrate composing a plurality of gold electrodes composiog a) coating an adhesion metal onto said substrate, b) coating gold onto said adhesion metal, c) forming a pattern comprising said plurality of electrodes and associated interconnects using photolithography, d) adding a self-assembled monolayer (SAM) comprising a capture hgand to each electrode A method according to claim 29 wherein said SAM is added using an aqueous deposition step
PCT/US1999/014191 1998-06-23 1999-06-23 Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes WO1999067425A2 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU47099/99A AU772382B2 (en) 1998-06-23 1999-06-23 Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes
CA002330182A CA2330182A1 (en) 1998-06-23 1999-06-23 Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes
EP99930592A EP1090145A2 (en) 1998-06-23 1999-06-23 Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes
JP2000556065A JP2002518690A (en) 1998-06-23 1999-06-23 Binding promotion method for analyte detection
AU2004201066A AU2004201066A1 (en) 1998-06-23 2004-03-12 Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US9038998P 1998-06-23 1998-06-23
US90/134,058 1998-08-14
US60/090,389 1998-08-14
US09/134,058 US6290839B1 (en) 1998-06-23 1998-08-14 Systems for electrophoretic transport and detection of analytes

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1999067425A2 WO1999067425A2 (en) 1999-12-29
WO1999067425A3 WO1999067425A3 (en) 2000-02-03
WO1999067425A9 true WO1999067425A9 (en) 2000-06-29

Family

ID=26782220

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1999/014191 WO1999067425A2 (en) 1998-06-23 1999-06-23 Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (2) US6290839B1 (en)
EP (1) EP1090145A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2002518690A (en)
AU (1) AU772382B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2330182A1 (en)
WO (1) WO1999067425A2 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9151746B2 (en) 1999-04-21 2015-10-06 Osmetech Technology, Inc. Use of microfluidic systems in the electrochemical detection of target analytes

Families Citing this family (312)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6306348B1 (en) * 1993-11-01 2001-10-23 Nanogen, Inc. Inorganic permeation layer for micro-electric device
US5824473A (en) 1993-12-10 1998-10-20 California Institute Of Technology Nucleic acid mediated electron transfer
US6071699A (en) 1996-06-07 2000-06-06 California Institute Of Technology Nucleic acid mediated electron transfer
US6251691B1 (en) 1996-04-25 2001-06-26 Bioarray Solutions, Llc Light-controlled electrokinetic assembly of particles near surfaces
US7169556B2 (en) 1996-07-29 2007-01-30 Nanosphere, Inc. Nanoparticles having oligonucleotides attached thereto and uses therefor
US6984491B2 (en) * 1996-07-29 2006-01-10 Nanosphere, Inc. Nanoparticles having oligonucleotides attached thereto and uses therefor
US20020172953A1 (en) * 1996-07-29 2002-11-21 Mirkin Chad A. Movement of biomolecule-coated nanoparticles in an electric field
US6750016B2 (en) 1996-07-29 2004-06-15 Nanosphere, Inc. Nanoparticles having oligonucleotides attached thereto and uses therefor
EP1818417B1 (en) 1996-07-29 2014-02-12 Nanosphere, Inc. Nanoparticles having oligonucleotides attached thereto and uses therefor
US6582921B2 (en) * 1996-07-29 2003-06-24 Nanosphere, Inc. Nanoparticles having oligonucleotides attached thereto and uses thereof
US6506564B1 (en) * 1996-07-29 2003-01-14 Nanosphere, Inc. Nanoparticles having oligonucleotides attached thereto and uses therefor
US7098320B1 (en) 1996-07-29 2006-08-29 Nanosphere, Inc. Nanoparticles having oligonucleotides attached thereto and uses therefor
US7045285B1 (en) * 1996-11-05 2006-05-16 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. Electronic transfer moieties attached to peptide nucleic acids
US7014992B1 (en) * 1996-11-05 2006-03-21 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. Conductive oligomers attached to electrodes and nucleoside analogs
US6096273A (en) 1996-11-05 2000-08-01 Clinical Micro Sensors Electrodes linked via conductive oligomers to nucleic acids
US7381525B1 (en) * 1997-03-07 2008-06-03 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. AC/DC voltage apparatus for detection of nucleic acids
SE9700384D0 (en) * 1997-02-04 1997-02-04 Biacore Ab Analytical method and apparatus
US8527026B2 (en) 1997-03-04 2013-09-03 Dexcom, Inc. Device and method for determining analyte levels
US7899511B2 (en) 2004-07-13 2011-03-01 Dexcom, Inc. Low oxygen in vivo analyte sensor
US7657297B2 (en) 2004-05-03 2010-02-02 Dexcom, Inc. Implantable analyte sensor
US6001067A (en) 1997-03-04 1999-12-14 Shults; Mark C. Device and method for determining analyte levels
US6862465B2 (en) 1997-03-04 2005-03-01 Dexcom, Inc. Device and method for determining analyte levels
US6013459A (en) * 1997-06-12 2000-01-11 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. Detection of analytes using reorganization energy
JP4124830B2 (en) 1997-06-12 2008-07-23 クリニカル・マイクロ・センサーズ・インコーポレイテッド Electrical method for analyte detection
US20050037397A1 (en) * 2001-03-28 2005-02-17 Nanosphere, Inc. Bio-barcode based detection of target analytes
US6974669B2 (en) * 2000-03-28 2005-12-13 Nanosphere, Inc. Bio-barcodes based on oligonucleotide-modified nanoparticles
US6686150B1 (en) 1998-01-27 2004-02-03 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. Amplification of nucleic acids with electronic detection
US8688188B2 (en) 1998-04-30 2014-04-01 Abbott Diabetes Care Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US8974386B2 (en) 1998-04-30 2015-03-10 Abbott Diabetes Care Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US8480580B2 (en) 1998-04-30 2013-07-09 Abbott Diabetes Care Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US6175752B1 (en) 1998-04-30 2001-01-16 Therasense, Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US9066695B2 (en) 1998-04-30 2015-06-30 Abbott Diabetes Care Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US8346337B2 (en) 1998-04-30 2013-01-01 Abbott Diabetes Care Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US8465425B2 (en) 1998-04-30 2013-06-18 Abbott Diabetes Care Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US6949816B2 (en) 2003-04-21 2005-09-27 Motorola, Inc. Semiconductor component having first surface area for electrically coupling to a semiconductor chip and second surface area for electrically coupling to a substrate, and method of manufacturing same
US20030153023A1 (en) * 1999-05-13 2003-08-14 Starzl Timothy W. Enumeration method of analyte detection
US6761816B1 (en) 1998-06-23 2004-07-13 Clinical Micro Systems, Inc. Printed circuit boards with monolayers and capture ligands
US6740518B1 (en) 1998-09-17 2004-05-25 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. Signal detection techniques for the detection of analytes
WO2000024941A1 (en) * 1998-10-27 2000-05-04 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. Detection of target analytes using particles and electrodes
AU768535B2 (en) 1998-11-30 2003-12-18 Nanosphere, Inc. Nanoparticles with polymer shells
US20030032029A1 (en) * 1998-12-21 2003-02-13 Nanogen, Inc. Three dimensional apparatus and method for integrating sample preparation and multiplex assays
US6833267B1 (en) * 1998-12-30 2004-12-21 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. Tissue collection devices containing biosensors
US7207251B2 (en) * 1999-02-05 2007-04-24 Hitachi Koki Co., Ltd. Cutter with laser generator that irradiates cutting position on workpiece to facilitate alignment of blade with cutting position
US20040053290A1 (en) * 2000-01-11 2004-03-18 Terbrueggen Robert Henry Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing
US7312087B2 (en) * 2000-01-11 2007-12-25 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing
US6852493B2 (en) * 1999-05-14 2005-02-08 Iris Biotechnologies, Inc. Magnetic field enhanced hybridization of target molecules to immobilized probes
AU5879400A (en) * 1999-06-29 2001-01-31 Chiron Corporation Arrays of biopolymeric agents and method for their production and use
ES2319380T3 (en) * 1999-07-26 2009-05-07 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. DETERMINATION OF NUCLEIC ACID SEQUENCES USING ELECTRONIC DETECTION.
KR20020048425A (en) * 1999-09-30 2002-06-22 해리 제이. 레온 하르트 Biomolecular attachment sites on microelectronic arrays
DE60011821T2 (en) * 1999-11-12 2005-07-07 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc., Pasadena BINDING ACCELERATION PROCEDURE FOR THE DETECTION OF ANALYTES
US6361958B1 (en) * 1999-11-12 2002-03-26 Motorola, Inc. Biochannel assay for hybridization with biomaterial
US6303082B1 (en) * 1999-12-15 2001-10-16 Nanogen, Inc. Permeation layer attachment chemistry and method
DE10000629C5 (en) * 2000-01-10 2010-06-02 november Aktiengesellschaft, Gesellschaft für Molekulare Medizin Method of identifying a label applied to a solid
DE60125713T2 (en) * 2000-01-11 2007-11-08 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc., Pasadena Cartridge containing a biochip
CA2396113C (en) 2000-01-13 2009-04-07 Nanosphere, Inc. Nanoparticles having oligonucleotides attached thereto and uses therefor
US6824669B1 (en) * 2000-02-17 2004-11-30 Motorola, Inc. Protein and peptide sensors using electrical detection methods
JP2001235493A (en) * 2000-02-22 2001-08-31 Japan Organo Co Ltd Electric-conductivity measuring apparatus
AU3230201A (en) * 2000-02-23 2001-09-03 Organo Corporation Multiple electric conductivity measuring apparatus
US20020034744A1 (en) * 2000-03-27 2002-03-21 Creager Stephen E. Compositions and methods for detecting redox-active molecules in solution
CN1193224C (en) * 2000-03-30 2005-03-16 奥甘诺株式会社 Ion concentration meter
US6753143B2 (en) * 2000-05-01 2004-06-22 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. Target analyte detection using asymmetrical self-assembled monolayers
AU6114501A (en) 2000-05-03 2001-11-12 Jen Gau Jr Biological identification system with integrated sensor chip
US6602400B1 (en) 2000-06-15 2003-08-05 Motorola, Inc. Method for enhanced bio-conjugation events
ATE319087T1 (en) 2000-06-21 2006-03-15 Bioarray Solutions Ltd MULTI-ANALYTICAL MOLECULAR ANALYSIS BY USING APPLICATION-SPECIFIC RANDOM PARTICLE ARRAYS
US9709559B2 (en) 2000-06-21 2017-07-18 Bioarray Solutions, Ltd. Multianalyte molecular analysis using application-specific random particle arrays
KR100357981B1 (en) * 2000-06-29 2002-10-25 삼성전자 주식회사 Apparatus for manufacturing grating device and method of manufacturing the same
GB0016813D0 (en) * 2000-07-07 2000-08-30 Lee Helen Improved dipstick assays (4)
EP1360318B1 (en) * 2000-07-11 2006-04-26 Northwestern University Method of detection by enhancement of silver staining
AU2001288249A1 (en) * 2000-08-14 2002-02-25 The Regents Of The University Of California Biosensors and methods for their use
US7129044B2 (en) 2000-10-04 2006-10-31 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Renaturation, reassociation, association and hybridization of nucleic acid molecules
US20020155476A1 (en) * 2000-10-20 2002-10-24 Nader Pourmand Transient electrical signal based methods and devices for characterizing molecular interaction and/or motion in a sample
WO2002046483A2 (en) 2000-12-06 2002-06-13 Northwestern University Silver stain removal from dna detection chips by cyanide etching or sonication
WO2002045835A2 (en) * 2000-12-08 2002-06-13 The Regents Of The University Of California Microelectronic arrays for cell-based functional genomics / high throughput phenotyping by electrokinetic assembly
US6560471B1 (en) 2001-01-02 2003-05-06 Therasense, Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
CA2450632A1 (en) * 2001-01-12 2002-07-18 Toray Industries, Inc. Selectively hybridizable substance immobilization fiber, fiber array compsiring bundle of such fibers, selective hybridizing method, device therefor, and base
JP3670972B2 (en) * 2001-02-01 2005-07-13 日立ソフトウエアエンジニアリング株式会社 Biopolymer detector
DE10106654A1 (en) * 2001-02-12 2002-09-05 November Ag Molekulare Medizin Method for the detection and / or quantification of an analyte
WO2002079490A2 (en) * 2001-03-28 2002-10-10 Nanosphere, Inc. Bio-barcodes based on oligonucleotide-modified particles
US20060040286A1 (en) * 2001-03-28 2006-02-23 Nanosphere, Inc. Bio-barcode based detection of target analytes
US7041468B2 (en) 2001-04-02 2006-05-09 Therasense, Inc. Blood glucose tracking apparatus and methods
US7314718B1 (en) * 2001-04-03 2008-01-01 Bioarray Solutions Ltd. Method and apparatus for maintaining multiple planar fluid flows
US20030113740A1 (en) * 2001-04-26 2003-06-19 Mirkin Chad A. Oligonucleotide-modified ROMP polymers and co-polymers
US7029919B2 (en) * 2001-05-04 2006-04-18 Agilent Technologies, Inc. Electro-optical device and methods for hybridization and detection
US20050009101A1 (en) * 2001-05-17 2005-01-13 Motorola, Inc. Microfluidic devices comprising biochannels
US7238472B2 (en) * 2001-05-25 2007-07-03 Nanosphere, Inc. Non-alloying core shell nanoparticles
US7147687B2 (en) * 2001-05-25 2006-12-12 Nanosphere, Inc. Non-alloying core shell nanoparticles
US7300922B2 (en) 2001-05-25 2007-11-27 Duke University Modulators of pharmacological agents
US20040048241A1 (en) * 2001-06-11 2004-03-11 Freeman Beverly Annette Methods for attaching molecules
US6824974B2 (en) * 2001-06-11 2004-11-30 Genorx, Inc. Electronic detection of biological molecules using thin layers
ATE521887T1 (en) * 2001-06-20 2011-09-15 M S Tech Ltd ARRANGEMENT OF PIEZOELECTRIC RESONATORS FOR DETECTING TRACES OF A SUBSTANCE
US6526828B1 (en) * 2001-06-20 2003-03-04 M.S. Tech Ltd. Sensitive and selective method and device for the detection of trace amounts of a substance
US7262063B2 (en) 2001-06-21 2007-08-28 Bio Array Solutions, Ltd. Directed assembly of functional heterostructures
AU2002365115A1 (en) * 2001-07-20 2003-09-02 North Carolina State University Light addressable electrochemical detection of duplex structures
US20050266404A1 (en) * 2001-07-25 2005-12-01 Jong-Hoon Hahn Detection method of nucleic acid hybridization
US20030032874A1 (en) 2001-07-27 2003-02-13 Dexcom, Inc. Sensor head for use with implantable devices
WO2003011768A2 (en) * 2001-08-01 2003-02-13 Datascope Investment Corp. Microfluidic device for molecular analysis
WO2003031591A2 (en) * 2001-10-10 2003-04-17 Superarray Bioscience Corporation Detecting targets by unique identifier nucleotide tags
WO2003034029A2 (en) 2001-10-15 2003-04-24 Bioarray Solutions, Ltd. Multiplexed analysis of polymorphic loci by concurrent interrogation and enzyme-mediated detection
US20040028559A1 (en) * 2001-11-06 2004-02-12 Peter Schuck Sample delivery system with laminar mixing for microvolume biosensing
DE60228128D1 (en) * 2001-11-09 2008-09-18 Nanosphere Inc Bioconjugate NANOPARTICLE PROBES
US6960298B2 (en) 2001-12-10 2005-11-01 Nanogen, Inc. Mesoporous permeation layers for use on active electronic matrix devices
SG118103A1 (en) * 2001-12-12 2006-01-27 Micron Technology Inc BOC BGA package for die with I-shaped bond pad layout
US6756223B2 (en) * 2001-12-18 2004-06-29 Motorola, Inc. Electro-chemical analysis device with integrated thermal sensor and method for monitoring a sample using the device
US7691244B2 (en) * 2001-12-18 2010-04-06 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Microfluidic pumps and mixers driven by induced-charge electro-osmosis
US7081189B2 (en) * 2001-12-18 2006-07-25 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Microfluidic pumps and mixers driven by induced-charge electro-osmosis
US7613491B2 (en) 2002-05-22 2009-11-03 Dexcom, Inc. Silicone based membranes for use in implantable glucose sensors
US8010174B2 (en) 2003-08-22 2011-08-30 Dexcom, Inc. Systems and methods for replacing signal artifacts in a glucose sensor data stream
US8260393B2 (en) 2003-07-25 2012-09-04 Dexcom, Inc. Systems and methods for replacing signal data artifacts in a glucose sensor data stream
US8364229B2 (en) 2003-07-25 2013-01-29 Dexcom, Inc. Analyte sensors having a signal-to-noise ratio substantially unaffected by non-constant noise
AU2003219908A1 (en) * 2002-02-25 2003-09-09 Cabot Corporation Porous compositions comprising surface modified monoliths
AU2003219910A1 (en) * 2002-02-25 2003-09-09 Cabot Coproration Compositions comprising continuous networks and monoliths
GB0205455D0 (en) 2002-03-07 2002-04-24 Molecular Sensing Plc Nucleic acid probes, their synthesis and use
DE10210051B4 (en) * 2002-03-07 2005-10-13 Siemens Ag Device for the electrochemical detection of a nucleotide sequence, analysis cassette for such a device and method for producing such an analysis cassette
US7005268B2 (en) * 2002-03-13 2006-02-28 Agilent Technologies, Inc. Detection of biopolymers utilizing photo-initiated charge separation
US20050100938A1 (en) * 2002-03-14 2005-05-12 Infineon Technologies Ag Vertical impedance sensor arrangement and method for producing a vertical impedance sensor arrangement
US6919180B2 (en) * 2002-03-22 2005-07-19 Sigma Genosys, L.P. Hybridization rate enhancement for substrate-bound specific nucleic acid-binding agents
US20030198960A1 (en) * 2002-04-01 2003-10-23 Wenhong Fan Signal amplifying targeted reporters for biological and chemical sensor applications
US7419784B2 (en) * 2002-04-02 2008-09-02 Dubrow Robert S Methods, systems and apparatus for separation and isolation of one or more sample components of a sample biological material
DE10214719A1 (en) * 2002-04-03 2003-11-20 Infineon Technologies Ag Sensor for the qualitative and quantitative determination of (bio) organic oligomers and polymers, analysis methods for this as well as methods for producing the sensor
US20030211488A1 (en) * 2002-05-07 2003-11-13 Northwestern University Nanoparticle probs with Raman spectrocopic fingerprints for analyte detection
US7687258B1 (en) * 2002-05-20 2010-03-30 Maki Wusi C Direct electric biological agent detector
TWI221523B (en) * 2002-05-21 2004-10-01 Sony Corp Bioassay method, bioassay device, and bioassay substrate
JP4233807B2 (en) * 2002-05-31 2009-03-04 住友精密工業株式会社 Biochemical reactant detection method and biochip
EP1543153A2 (en) * 2002-06-07 2005-06-22 The Regents Of The University Of California Electrochemical detection of single nucleotide polymorphisms (snps)
WO2003104774A1 (en) * 2002-06-11 2003-12-18 University Of Virginia Patent Foundation Apparatus and method for the purification of nucleic acids
WO2004004647A2 (en) * 2002-07-02 2004-01-15 Nanosphere Inc. Nanoparticle polyanion conjugates and methods of use thereof in detecting analytes
AU2003247950A1 (en) * 2002-07-08 2004-01-23 The Regents Of The University Of California Surface nanopatterning
WO2004011643A1 (en) * 2002-07-26 2004-02-05 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Nucleic acid probe immobilization support and method of detecting target nucleic acid using the same
JP4057967B2 (en) * 2002-07-31 2008-03-05 株式会社東芝 Automatic nucleotide sequence analyzer
US7745203B2 (en) 2002-07-31 2010-06-29 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Base sequence detection apparatus and base sequence automatic analyzing apparatus
US7097751B2 (en) 2002-08-23 2006-08-29 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Base sequence detecting electrode, base sequence detecting device and base sequence detecting method
US7176036B2 (en) 2002-09-20 2007-02-13 Arrowhead Center, Inc. Electroactive microspheres and methods
KR20040044336A (en) * 2002-11-12 2004-05-28 마쯔시다덴기산교 가부시키가이샤 Specific coupling reaction measuring method and reagent kit and specific coupling reaction measuring apparatus for use in the same
KR100858080B1 (en) * 2002-11-12 2008-09-10 삼성전자주식회사 A method for detecting a PCR product by measuring a electrical signal
WO2004046369A2 (en) * 2002-11-15 2004-06-03 Applera Corporation Nucleic acid sequence detection
US7526114B2 (en) 2002-11-15 2009-04-28 Bioarray Solutions Ltd. Analysis, secure access to, and transmission of array images
DE60238147D1 (en) * 2002-12-18 2010-12-09 Ibm METHOD FOR SELF-ARRANGING ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS AND CIRCUITS MADE THEREFOR
CA2772050C (en) * 2002-12-26 2016-09-06 Meso Scale Technologies, Llc. Assay cartridges and methods of using the same
US7214528B1 (en) * 2002-12-31 2007-05-08 Oregon Health & Sciences University Device for direct electrical detection of molecules and molecule-molecule interactions
US20040180369A1 (en) * 2003-01-16 2004-09-16 North Carolina State University Photothermal detection of nucleic acid hybridization
GB0303305D0 (en) * 2003-02-12 2003-03-19 Secr Defence Apparatus for collecting particles
US20050130174A1 (en) * 2003-02-27 2005-06-16 Nanosphere, Inc. Label-free gene expression profiling with universal nanoparticle probes in microarray assay format
US20040191801A1 (en) * 2003-03-25 2004-09-30 Heeger Alan J. Reagentless, reusable bioelectronic detectors and their use as authentication devices
US8003374B2 (en) 2003-03-25 2011-08-23 The Regents Of The University Of California Reagentless, reusable, bioelectronic detectors
US7134999B2 (en) 2003-04-04 2006-11-14 Dexcom, Inc. Optimized sensor geometry for an implantable glucose sensor
CA2521711C (en) * 2003-04-30 2011-09-20 William R. Moyle Sensors for biomolecular detection and cell classification
WO2005019793A2 (en) 2003-05-14 2005-03-03 Nantero, Inc. Sensor platform using a horizontally oriented nanotube element
CA2532414C (en) * 2003-07-12 2017-03-14 Accelr8 Technology Corporation Sensitive and rapid biodetection
US7341841B2 (en) 2003-07-12 2008-03-11 Accelr8 Technology Corporation Rapid microbial detection and antimicrobial susceptibility testing
US20120077206A1 (en) 2003-07-12 2012-03-29 Accelr8 Technology Corporation Rapid Microbial Detection and Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing
US7460898B2 (en) * 2003-12-05 2008-12-02 Dexcom, Inc. Dual electrode system for a continuous analyte sensor
US8423113B2 (en) 2003-07-25 2013-04-16 Dexcom, Inc. Systems and methods for processing sensor data
WO2005012873A2 (en) * 2003-07-25 2005-02-10 Dexcom, Inc. Electrode systems for electrochemical sensors
EP1648298A4 (en) * 2003-07-25 2010-01-13 Dexcom Inc Oxygen enhancing membrane systems for implantable devices
US7467003B2 (en) * 2003-12-05 2008-12-16 Dexcom, Inc. Dual electrode system for a continuous analyte sensor
US9763609B2 (en) 2003-07-25 2017-09-19 Dexcom, Inc. Analyte sensors having a signal-to-noise ratio substantially unaffected by non-constant noise
US7424318B2 (en) 2003-12-05 2008-09-09 Dexcom, Inc. Dual electrode system for a continuous analyte sensor
US7761130B2 (en) * 2003-07-25 2010-07-20 Dexcom, Inc. Dual electrode system for a continuous analyte sensor
US7366556B2 (en) 2003-12-05 2008-04-29 Dexcom, Inc. Dual electrode system for a continuous analyte sensor
US20100168543A1 (en) 2003-08-01 2010-07-01 Dexcom, Inc. System and methods for processing analyte sensor data
US7774145B2 (en) 2003-08-01 2010-08-10 Dexcom, Inc. Transcutaneous analyte sensor
US7494465B2 (en) 2004-07-13 2009-02-24 Dexcom, Inc. Transcutaneous analyte sensor
US8275437B2 (en) 2003-08-01 2012-09-25 Dexcom, Inc. Transcutaneous analyte sensor
US9135402B2 (en) 2007-12-17 2015-09-15 Dexcom, Inc. Systems and methods for processing sensor data
US8160669B2 (en) 2003-08-01 2012-04-17 Dexcom, Inc. Transcutaneous analyte sensor
US7591801B2 (en) 2004-02-26 2009-09-22 Dexcom, Inc. Integrated delivery device for continuous glucose sensor
US20190357827A1 (en) 2003-08-01 2019-11-28 Dexcom, Inc. Analyte sensor
US8060173B2 (en) 2003-08-01 2011-11-15 Dexcom, Inc. System and methods for processing analyte sensor data
US7920906B2 (en) 2005-03-10 2011-04-05 Dexcom, Inc. System and methods for processing analyte sensor data for sensor calibration
US20140121989A1 (en) 2003-08-22 2014-05-01 Dexcom, Inc. Systems and methods for processing analyte sensor data
US7927796B2 (en) 2003-09-18 2011-04-19 Bioarray Solutions, Ltd. Number coding for identification of subtypes of coded types of solid phase carriers
TW200521436A (en) 2003-09-22 2005-07-01 Bioarray Solutions Ltd Surface immobilized polyelectrolyte with multiple functional groups capable of covalently bonding to biomolecules
WO2005042763A2 (en) 2003-10-28 2005-05-12 Bioarray Solutions Ltd. Optimization of gene expression analysis using immobilized capture probes
JP2007509629A (en) 2003-10-29 2007-04-19 バイオアレイ ソリューションズ リミテッド Complex nucleic acid analysis by cleavage of double-stranded DNA
EP1685257A4 (en) * 2003-10-29 2008-07-23 Agency Science Tech & Res Method for detecting analytes by means of an analyte/polymeric activator bilayer arrangement
WO2005042785A1 (en) * 2003-10-30 2005-05-12 North Carolina State University Electrochemical detection of nucleic acid hybridization
EP1687406B1 (en) * 2003-11-10 2010-01-27 Geneohm Sciences, Inc. Nucleic acid detection method having increased sensitivity
US9247900B2 (en) 2004-07-13 2016-02-02 Dexcom, Inc. Analyte sensor
US8423114B2 (en) 2006-10-04 2013-04-16 Dexcom, Inc. Dual electrode system for a continuous analyte sensor
US8774886B2 (en) 2006-10-04 2014-07-08 Dexcom, Inc. Analyte sensor
US8364231B2 (en) 2006-10-04 2013-01-29 Dexcom, Inc. Analyte sensor
EP2239567B1 (en) 2003-12-05 2015-09-02 DexCom, Inc. Calibration techniques for a continuous analyte sensor
US11633133B2 (en) 2003-12-05 2023-04-25 Dexcom, Inc. Dual electrode system for a continuous analyte sensor
US8287453B2 (en) 2003-12-05 2012-10-16 Dexcom, Inc. Analyte sensor
US7767439B2 (en) * 2003-12-10 2010-08-03 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Real-time PCR monitoring apparatus and method
US7637868B2 (en) * 2004-01-12 2009-12-29 Dexcom, Inc. Composite material for implantable device
US7695756B2 (en) * 2004-04-29 2010-04-13 Zettacore, Inc. Systems, tools and methods for production of molecular memory
US7307870B2 (en) * 2004-01-28 2007-12-11 Zettacore, Inc. Molecular memory devices and methods
US7358113B2 (en) * 2004-01-28 2008-04-15 Zettacore, Inc. Processing systems and methods for molecular memory
US7324385B2 (en) * 2004-01-28 2008-01-29 Zettacore, Inc. Molecular memory
US8808228B2 (en) 2004-02-26 2014-08-19 Dexcom, Inc. Integrated medicament delivery device for use with continuous analyte sensor
US7566418B2 (en) * 2004-03-18 2009-07-28 University Of Hawaii Biochemical concentrator and drug discovery
US8277713B2 (en) 2004-05-03 2012-10-02 Dexcom, Inc. Implantable analyte sensor
US8792955B2 (en) 2004-05-03 2014-07-29 Dexcom, Inc. Transcutaneous analyte sensor
US20050245799A1 (en) * 2004-05-03 2005-11-03 Dexcom, Inc. Implantable analyte sensor
US20060015020A1 (en) * 2004-07-06 2006-01-19 Dexcom, Inc. Systems and methods for manufacture of an analyte-measuring device including a membrane system
US7310544B2 (en) 2004-07-13 2007-12-18 Dexcom, Inc. Methods and systems for inserting a transcutaneous analyte sensor
US20060270922A1 (en) 2004-07-13 2006-11-30 Brauker James H Analyte sensor
US7857760B2 (en) 2004-07-13 2010-12-28 Dexcom, Inc. Analyte sensor
US7783333B2 (en) 2004-07-13 2010-08-24 Dexcom, Inc. Transcutaneous medical device with variable stiffness
US8565848B2 (en) 2004-07-13 2013-10-22 Dexcom, Inc. Transcutaneous analyte sensor
US20060014155A1 (en) * 2004-07-16 2006-01-19 Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation Methods for the production of sensor arrays using electrically addressable electrodes
CA2572178A1 (en) * 2004-07-26 2006-03-16 Nanosphere, Inc. Method for distinguishing methicillin resistant s. aureus from methicillin sensitive s. aureus in a mixed culture
JP4311448B2 (en) * 2004-08-02 2009-08-12 ダイキン工業株式会社 Oxygen electrode
US7848889B2 (en) 2004-08-02 2010-12-07 Bioarray Solutions, Ltd. Automated analysis of multiplexed probe-target interaction patterns: pattern matching and allele identification
JP4645110B2 (en) * 2004-09-15 2011-03-09 ソニー株式会社 Hybridization detection unit using dielectrophoresis, sensor chip including the detection unit, and hybridization detection method
TWI399864B (en) 2004-09-16 2013-06-21 Nantero Inc Light emitters using nanotubes and methods of making same
WO2006110177A2 (en) * 2004-10-19 2006-10-19 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Microfluidic pumps and mixers driven by induced-charge electro-osmosis
GB0423686D0 (en) * 2004-10-25 2004-11-24 Attana Ab Surface preparation method
US20090042280A1 (en) * 2004-12-13 2009-02-12 Geneohm Sciences, Inc., Fluidic cartridges for electrochemical detection of dna
KR101159072B1 (en) * 2005-01-20 2012-06-25 삼성전자주식회사 Method for separating biomolecules using nanopore
BRPI0607205A2 (en) * 2005-01-31 2011-07-19 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv sensor device for detecting magnetic particles, and method for a biosensor process
US7957507B2 (en) 2005-02-28 2011-06-07 Cadman Patrick F Method and apparatus for modulating a radiation beam
US8133178B2 (en) 2006-02-22 2012-03-13 Dexcom, Inc. Analyte sensor
WO2006110193A2 (en) 2005-04-08 2006-10-19 Dexcom, Inc. Cellulosic-based interference domain for an analyte sensor
US20060252027A1 (en) * 2005-05-05 2006-11-09 Petisce James R Cellulosic-based resistance domain for an analyte sensor
US8744546B2 (en) 2005-05-05 2014-06-03 Dexcom, Inc. Cellulosic-based resistance domain for an analyte sensor
US8232535B2 (en) 2005-05-10 2012-07-31 Tomotherapy Incorporated System and method of treating a patient with radiation therapy
US20070036026A1 (en) * 2005-05-16 2007-02-15 Laibinis Paul E Magnetic Particle Systems and Methods
US8486629B2 (en) 2005-06-01 2013-07-16 Bioarray Solutions, Ltd. Creation of functionalized microparticle libraries by oligonucleotide ligation or elongation
DE102005028930A1 (en) * 2005-06-22 2007-01-04 Technische Universität München Spectroscopic analyser with charged particles uses a separating membrane system to prevent drift
WO2007002567A2 (en) * 2005-06-23 2007-01-04 Nanosphere, Inc. Selective isolation and concentration of nucleic acids from complex samples
US20070099211A1 (en) * 2005-07-15 2007-05-03 Vissarion Aivazachvili Detection of nucleic acid amplification
CA2616304A1 (en) 2005-07-22 2007-02-01 Tomotherapy Incorporated System and method of delivering radiation therapy to a moving region of interest
WO2007014108A2 (en) 2005-07-22 2007-02-01 Tomotherapy Incorporated Method and system for evaluating quality assurance criteria in delivery of a treament plan
WO2007014104A2 (en) 2005-07-22 2007-02-01 Tomotherapy Incorporated System and method of evaluating dose delivered by a radiation therapy system
US8442287B2 (en) 2005-07-22 2013-05-14 Tomotherapy Incorporated Method and system for evaluating quality assurance criteria in delivery of a treatment plan
KR20080039916A (en) 2005-07-22 2008-05-07 토모테라피 인코포레이티드 System and method of delivering radiation therapy to a moving region of interest
JP5390855B2 (en) 2005-07-23 2014-01-15 トモセラピー・インコーポレーテッド Imaging and delivery of radiation therapy using coordinated movement of gantry and treatment table
JP2009505106A (en) * 2005-08-19 2009-02-05 ナノスフェアー インコーポレイテッド Method for preparing a hybrid substrate comprising DNA and antibodies and use thereof
EP1931806B1 (en) 2005-10-07 2011-10-05 California Institute Of Technology Pkr activation via hybridization chain reaction
US7803542B2 (en) * 2005-11-29 2010-09-28 The Regents Of The University Of California Signal-on architecture for electronic, oligonucleotide-based detectors
US7642546B2 (en) 2005-12-01 2010-01-05 Zettacore, Inc. Molecular memory devices including solid-state dielectric layers and related methods
US7470466B2 (en) 2005-12-23 2008-12-30 Boston Scientific Scimed, Inc. Nanoparticle structures and composite materials comprising a silicon-containing compound having a chemical linker that forms a non-covalent bond with a polymer
US9757061B2 (en) 2006-01-17 2017-09-12 Dexcom, Inc. Low oxygen in vivo analyte sensor
EP2004796B1 (en) * 2006-01-18 2015-04-08 DexCom, Inc. Membranes for an analyte sensor
US20090036315A1 (en) * 2006-02-07 2009-02-05 Antara Biosciences Inc. Device and methods for detecting and quantifying one or more target agents
WO2007093050A1 (en) * 2006-02-13 2007-08-23 Olga Ornatsky Gene expression assays conducted by elemental analysis
US20080071158A1 (en) 2006-06-07 2008-03-20 Abbott Diabetes Care, Inc. Analyte monitoring system and method
US20090286694A1 (en) * 2006-08-21 2009-11-19 Gafur Zainiev Nucleic acid array with releaseable nucleic acid probes
US20080044821A1 (en) * 2006-08-21 2008-02-21 Gafur Zainiev Nucleic acid array having fixed nucleic acid anti-probes and complementary free nucleic acid probes
US20080044822A1 (en) * 2006-08-21 2008-02-21 Gafur Zainiev Nucleic acid array with releaseable nucleic acid probes
US20100056388A1 (en) * 2006-08-21 2010-03-04 Cnvgenes, Inc. Nucleic acid array having fixed nucleic acid anti-probes and complementary free nucleic acid probes
US7687103B2 (en) * 2006-08-31 2010-03-30 Gamida For Life B.V. Compositions and methods for preserving permeation layers for use on active electronic matrix devices
US7831287B2 (en) 2006-10-04 2010-11-09 Dexcom, Inc. Dual electrode system for a continuous analyte sensor
AU2007339793A1 (en) * 2006-12-29 2008-07-10 Applied Biosystems, Llc Systems and methods for detecting nucleic acids
EP2118310B1 (en) * 2006-12-29 2013-03-06 Applied Biosystems, LLC Systems and methods for detecting nucleic acids
WO2008110392A2 (en) * 2007-03-14 2008-09-18 Ogeno Gmbh Biopsy device for the in vivo enrichment of tissue, cells, or analytes
EP2155770B1 (en) 2007-05-16 2013-10-16 California Institute of Technology A versatile nucleic acid hairpin motif for programming biomolecular self-assembly pathways
US20200037875A1 (en) 2007-05-18 2020-02-06 Dexcom, Inc. Analyte sensors having a signal-to-noise ratio substantially unaffected by non-constant noise
EP2152350A4 (en) 2007-06-08 2013-03-27 Dexcom Inc Integrated medicament delivery device for use with continuous analyte sensor
JP2010532475A (en) * 2007-07-02 2010-10-07 ジーンフルイディクス・インコーポレーテッド Chip analysis with improved efficiency
WO2009023857A1 (en) * 2007-08-15 2009-02-19 State Of Oregon By & Through The State Board Of Higher Education On Behalf Of Portland State Unv. Impedance spectroscopy of biomolecules using functionalized nanoparticles
EP2227132B1 (en) 2007-10-09 2023-03-08 DexCom, Inc. Integrated insulin delivery system with continuous glucose sensor
US8417312B2 (en) 2007-10-25 2013-04-09 Dexcom, Inc. Systems and methods for processing sensor data
US8290559B2 (en) 2007-12-17 2012-10-16 Dexcom, Inc. Systems and methods for processing sensor data
US20090162845A1 (en) * 2007-12-20 2009-06-25 Elazar Rabbani Affinity tag nucleic acid and protein compositions, and processes for using same
US8229535B2 (en) 2008-02-21 2012-07-24 Dexcom, Inc. Systems and methods for blood glucose monitoring and alert delivery
KR100969667B1 (en) * 2008-03-24 2010-07-14 디지탈 지노믹스(주) Method for detecting biomolecules electrically and biochip provided with therefor
US11730407B2 (en) 2008-03-28 2023-08-22 Dexcom, Inc. Polymer membranes for continuous analyte sensors
US8583204B2 (en) 2008-03-28 2013-11-12 Dexcom, Inc. Polymer membranes for continuous analyte sensors
US8682408B2 (en) 2008-03-28 2014-03-25 Dexcom, Inc. Polymer membranes for continuous analyte sensors
US20100021904A1 (en) * 2008-05-21 2010-01-28 Pierce Niles A Shielded cross-linking probes
US20100021901A1 (en) * 2008-05-22 2010-01-28 Peng Yin Compositions and methods for detecting analytes
ES2636664T3 (en) 2008-09-02 2017-10-06 The Governing Council Of The University Of Toronto Nanostructured microelectrodes and biodetection devices that incorporate them
EP4227675A3 (en) 2008-09-19 2023-09-06 DexCom, Inc. Particle-containing membrane and particulate electrode for analyte sensors
US20100112719A1 (en) * 2008-11-06 2010-05-06 Amihood Doron Electronic signal amplification in field effect device based chemical sensors
GB0903134D0 (en) * 2009-02-24 2009-04-08 Osmotex Ag Charged particle motion inducing apparatus
US20120052498A1 (en) * 2010-07-01 2012-03-01 Affymetrix, Inc. Detection of Nucleic Acids
US9834439B2 (en) 2010-07-20 2017-12-05 California Institute Of Technology Biomolecular self-assembly
US8962241B2 (en) 2010-07-20 2015-02-24 California Institute Of Technology Triggered molecular geometry based bioimaging probes
US8877438B2 (en) 2010-07-20 2014-11-04 California Institute Of Technology Self-assembled polynucleotide structure
WO2012097081A2 (en) 2011-01-11 2012-07-19 The Governing Council Of The University Of Toronto Protein detection method
US10254204B2 (en) 2011-03-07 2019-04-09 Accelerate Diagnostics, Inc. Membrane-assisted purification
US9434937B2 (en) 2011-03-07 2016-09-06 Accelerate Diagnostics, Inc. Rapid cell purification systems
WO2012142502A2 (en) 2011-04-15 2012-10-18 Dexcom Inc. Advanced analyte sensor calibration and error detection
US9335292B2 (en) 2011-10-13 2016-05-10 Auburn University Electrochemical proximity assay
EP3147372A3 (en) * 2011-11-23 2017-04-26 The Governing Council Of The University Of Toronto Versatile and sensitive biosensor
US20150293087A1 (en) * 2012-09-28 2015-10-15 Sekisui Medical Co., Ltd. Additive for measuring diluted sample in non-dilution-type immunochromatographic method reagent
EP2912432B1 (en) 2012-10-24 2018-07-04 Genmark Diagnostics Inc. Integrated multiplex target analysis
US20140322706A1 (en) 2012-10-24 2014-10-30 Jon Faiz Kayyem Integrated multipelx target analysis
JP6412020B2 (en) 2013-02-26 2018-10-24 アキュレイ インコーポレイテッド Electromagnetic multi-leaf collimator
US9677109B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-06-13 Accelerate Diagnostics, Inc. Rapid determination of microbial growth and antimicrobial susceptibility
WO2014150905A2 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-25 Genmark Diagnostics, Inc. Systems, methods, and apparatus for manipulating deformable fluid vessels
US9856472B2 (en) 2013-07-01 2018-01-02 California Institute Of Technology Small conditional RNAs
USD881409S1 (en) 2013-10-24 2020-04-14 Genmark Diagnostics, Inc. Biochip cartridge
US9498778B2 (en) 2014-11-11 2016-11-22 Genmark Diagnostics, Inc. Instrument for processing cartridge for performing assays in a closed sample preparation and reaction system
EP2883961B8 (en) * 2013-12-12 2017-09-27 Altratech Limited A nucleic acid analysis method and apparatus
US9587268B2 (en) * 2014-01-29 2017-03-07 Agilent Technologies Inc. Fast hybridization for next generation sequencing target enrichment
US9598722B2 (en) 2014-11-11 2017-03-21 Genmark Diagnostics, Inc. Cartridge for performing assays in a closed sample preparation and reaction system
US10005080B2 (en) 2014-11-11 2018-06-26 Genmark Diagnostics, Inc. Instrument and cartridge for performing assays in a closed sample preparation and reaction system employing electrowetting fluid manipulation
AU2015346527A1 (en) 2014-11-11 2017-06-29 Genmark Diagnostics, Inc. Instrument and cartridge for performing assays in a closed sample preparation and reaction system
US9739751B2 (en) * 2015-02-05 2017-08-22 International Business Machines Corporation Devices for trapping and controlling microparticles with radiation
WO2016161022A2 (en) 2015-03-30 2016-10-06 Accerlate Diagnostics, Inc. Instrument and system for rapid microorganism identification and antimicrobial agent susceptibility testing
US10253355B2 (en) 2015-03-30 2019-04-09 Accelerate Diagnostics, Inc. Instrument and system for rapid microorganism identification and antimicrobial agent susceptibility testing
EP3481843B1 (en) 2016-07-05 2022-01-26 California Institute of Technology Fractional initiator hybridization chain reaction
AU2017321492A1 (en) 2016-08-30 2019-03-14 California Institute Of Technology Immunohistochemistry via hybridization chain reaction
US11300578B2 (en) 2016-09-19 2022-04-12 Roche Molecular Systems, Inc. Instrument for processing cartridge for performing assays in a closed sample preparation and reaction system
EP3555314B1 (en) * 2016-12-19 2023-08-16 Quantum-Si Incorporated Loading molecules into sample wells for analysis
US10852274B2 (en) 2017-03-09 2020-12-01 Auburn University Differential circuit for background correction in electrochemical measurements
AU2018261007A1 (en) 2017-05-05 2019-11-07 Quantum-Si Incorporated Substrates having modified surface reactivity and antifouling properties in biological reactions
US11505799B2 (en) 2017-07-07 2022-11-22 Innamed, Inc. Aptamers for measuring lipoprotein levels
WO2019017927A1 (en) 2017-07-19 2019-01-24 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microfluidic fluid flow in a target fluid
US20190062809A1 (en) 2017-08-24 2019-02-28 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. (dba GenMark Diagnostics, Inc.) Electrochemical detection of bacterial and/or fungal infections
EP3673086A1 (en) 2017-08-24 2020-07-01 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. (DBA GenMark Diagnostics, Inc.) Electrochemical detection of bacterial and/or fungal infections
WO2019078922A1 (en) * 2017-10-19 2019-04-25 Analog Devices, Inc. Impedance measurement in diagnostic testing
US11331022B2 (en) 2017-10-24 2022-05-17 Dexcom, Inc. Pre-connected analyte sensors
CA3077720A1 (en) 2017-10-24 2019-05-02 Dexcom, Inc. Pre-connected analyte sensors
US11560565B2 (en) 2018-06-13 2023-01-24 Auburn University Electrochemical detection nanostructure, systems, and uses thereof
CN114829669A (en) 2019-10-11 2022-07-29 宽腾矽公司 Gas phase surface modification
EP4121556A1 (en) * 2020-03-19 2023-01-25 The Regents of The University of Michigan Analyte detection
WO2022164796A1 (en) 2021-01-26 2022-08-04 California Institute Of Technology Allosteric conditional guide rnas for cell-selective regulation of crispr/cas

Family Cites Families (64)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB515615A (en) 1938-03-05 1939-12-11 Nicholas Samuel Oerensoefi Improvements in or relating to gas or vapour filled electric discharge tubes
CA1219824A (en) 1981-04-17 1987-03-31 David C. Ward Modified nucleotides and methods of preparing and using same
US4711955A (en) 1981-04-17 1987-12-08 Yale University Modified nucleotides and methods of preparing and using same
US5241060A (en) 1982-06-23 1993-08-31 Enzo Diagnostics, Inc. Base moiety-labeled detectable nucleatide
US4994373A (en) 1983-01-27 1991-02-19 Enzo Biochem, Inc. Method and structures employing chemically-labelled polynucleotide probes
US5509410A (en) * 1983-06-06 1996-04-23 Medisense, Inc. Strip electrode including screen printing of a single layer
WO1985002627A1 (en) 1983-12-16 1985-06-20 Genetics International, Inc. Assay for nucleic acids
US4849513A (en) 1983-12-20 1989-07-18 California Institute Of Technology Deoxyribonucleoside phosphoramidites in which an aliphatic amino group is attached to the sugar ring and their use for the preparation of oligonucleotides containing aliphatic amino groups
US4952685A (en) 1984-01-30 1990-08-28 Enzo Biochem, Inc. Detectable molecules, method of preparation and use
US4707352A (en) 1984-01-30 1987-11-17 Enzo Biochem, Inc. Method of radioactively labeling diagnostic and therapeutic agents containing a chelating group
US5002885A (en) 1984-01-30 1991-03-26 Enzo Biochem, Inc. Detectable molecules, method preparation and use
US4707440A (en) 1984-01-30 1987-11-17 Enzo Biochem, Inc. Nucleic acid hybridization assay and detectable molecules useful in such assay
US5013831A (en) 1984-01-30 1991-05-07 Enzo Biochem, Inc. Detectable molecules, method of preparation and use
US4943523A (en) 1984-01-30 1990-07-24 Enzo Biochem, Inc. Detectable molecules, method of preparation and use
US5175269A (en) 1984-01-30 1992-12-29 Enzo Diagnostics, Inc. Compound and detectable molecules having an oligo- or polynucleotide with modifiable reactive group
CA1260372A (en) 1984-04-27 1989-09-26 Elazar Rabbani Hybridization method for the detection of genetic materials
US4755458A (en) 1984-08-30 1988-07-05 Enzo Biochem, Inc. Composition and method for the detection of the presence of a polynucleotide sequence of interest
US5112974A (en) 1985-01-18 1992-05-12 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Mixed ligand complexes and uses thereof as binding agents to DNA
US5595908A (en) 1985-09-26 1997-01-21 University Of Southern Mississipi Piezoelectric device for detection of polynucleotide hybridization
CA1273552A (en) 1985-12-23 1990-09-04 Michael J. Heller Fluorescent stokes shift probes for polynucleotide hybridization assays
ATE85088T1 (en) 1986-01-07 1993-02-15 Gen Probe Inc PROCESS OF ACCELERATED NUCLEIC ACID REASSOCIATION.
US4868103A (en) 1986-02-19 1989-09-19 Enzo Biochem, Inc. Analyte detection by means of energy transfer
CA1254945A (en) 1986-02-27 1989-05-30 Marco F. Cardosi Application of tetrathiafulvalenes in bioelectrochemical processes
JPS63238166A (en) 1987-03-26 1988-10-04 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Organic electronic element material
US4787963A (en) 1987-05-04 1988-11-29 Syntro Corporation Method and means for annealing complementary nucleic acid molecules at an accelerated rate
US5082830A (en) 1988-02-26 1992-01-21 Enzo Biochem, Inc. End labeled nucleotide probe
US5491097A (en) 1989-06-15 1996-02-13 Biocircuits Corporation Analyte detection with multilayered bioelectronic conductivity sensors
US5156810A (en) 1989-06-15 1992-10-20 Biocircuits Corporation Biosensors employing electrical, optical and mechanical signals
US5015569A (en) 1989-12-01 1991-05-14 Board Of Trustees Of Leland Stanford University Acceleration of nucleic acid hybridization
CA2033692A1 (en) 1990-01-25 1991-07-26 Wilhelm Bannwarth Energy transfer systems
GB2244135B (en) * 1990-05-04 1994-07-13 Gen Electric Co Plc Sensor devices
US5108573A (en) * 1990-06-05 1992-04-28 The United States Of America As Represented By The United States Department Of Energy Morphology in electrochemically grown conducting polymer films
US5776672A (en) 1990-09-28 1998-07-07 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Gene detection method
DE4039677A1 (en) 1990-12-12 1992-06-17 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh UNIVERSAL BINDING FILM
US5632957A (en) * 1993-11-01 1997-05-27 Nanogen Molecular biological diagnostic systems including electrodes
US5605662A (en) 1993-11-01 1997-02-25 Nanogen, Inc. Active programmable electronic devices for molecular biological analysis and diagnostics
EP0567635B1 (en) 1991-11-15 2000-05-31 Igen International, Inc. Rapid assays for amplification products
IL103674A0 (en) * 1991-11-19 1993-04-04 Houston Advanced Res Center Method and apparatus for molecule detection
US5565552A (en) 1992-01-21 1996-10-15 Pharmacyclics, Inc. Method of expanded porphyrin-oligonucleotide conjugate synthesis
EP0566751B1 (en) 1992-03-23 1996-01-10 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag DNA detection method
CA2094785A1 (en) 1992-05-08 1993-11-09 Jean Gariepy Metal chelating peptide
US5312527A (en) 1992-10-06 1994-05-17 Concordia University Voltammetric sequence-selective sensor for target polynucleotide sequences
US5472881A (en) 1992-11-12 1995-12-05 University Of Utah Research Foundation Thiol labeling of DNA for attachment to gold surfaces
EP0599337B1 (en) 1992-11-27 2006-03-08 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Method for detection of nucleic acid and probe therefor
JPH06153997A (en) 1992-11-27 1994-06-03 Canon Inc Method for detecting target nucleic acid by amplification of detected signal
CH685458A5 (en) * 1993-03-01 1995-07-14 Disetronic Ag Sensor array for selective detection or measurement of at least one material component in an aqueous solution.
CA2157503A1 (en) 1993-03-05 1994-09-15 John M. Riviello Pulsed electrochemical detection using polymer electroactive electrodes
FR2703359B1 (en) 1993-03-31 1995-06-23 Cis Bio Int Nucleotide (s) / electronic conductive polymer; its preparation process and its use.
JP3856463B2 (en) 1993-06-30 2006-12-13 アボツト・ラボラトリーズ Intercalator having affinity for DNA and method of using the same
ATE424927T1 (en) 1993-10-28 2009-03-15 Houston Advanced Res Ct MICROFABRICATED POROUS FLOW DEVICE FOR DISCRETE DETERMINATION OF BONDING REACTIONS
US5505321A (en) * 1994-12-05 1996-04-09 Teledyne Industries, Inc. Fabrication multilayer combined rigid/flex printed circuit board
US5591578A (en) 1993-12-10 1997-01-07 California Institute Of Technology Nucleic acid mediated electron transfer
US5824473A (en) 1993-12-10 1998-10-20 California Institute Of Technology Nucleic acid mediated electron transfer
US5620850A (en) 1994-09-26 1997-04-15 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Molecular recognition at surfaces derivatized with self-assembled monolayers
US5601982A (en) 1995-02-07 1997-02-11 Sargent; Jeannine P. Method and apparatus for determining the sequence of polynucleotides
US5968745A (en) * 1995-06-27 1999-10-19 The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill Polymer-electrodes for detecting nucleic acid hybridization and method of use thereof
DE69623494T2 (en) 1995-06-27 2003-04-17 Univ North Carolina ELECTROCHEMICAL DETECTION OF NUCLEIC ACID HYBRIDATION
JP3233851B2 (en) * 1996-04-24 2001-12-04 繁織 竹中 Electrochemical detection method of gene and its device
US5728532A (en) * 1996-05-31 1998-03-17 Ackley; Donald E. Electrode configuration for matrix addressing of a molecular detection device
EP1818417B1 (en) 1996-07-29 2014-02-12 Nanosphere, Inc. Nanoparticles having oligonucleotides attached thereto and uses therefor
JP4072206B2 (en) 1996-11-05 2008-04-09 クリニカル・マイクロ・センサーズ・インコーポレイテッド Electrode linked to nucleic acid via conductive oligomer
KR20000070821A (en) 1997-02-06 2000-11-25 프란시스 제이 메이어 Electrochemical probes for detection of molecular interactions and drug discovery
SE9703314D0 (en) 1997-09-15 1997-09-15 Sangtec Medical Ab Capacity affinity sensor
US5945286A (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-08-31 Motorola, Inc. Electrochemical-based molecular detection apparatus and method

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9151746B2 (en) 1999-04-21 2015-10-06 Osmetech Technology, Inc. Use of microfluidic systems in the electrochemical detection of target analytes
US9557295B2 (en) 1999-04-21 2017-01-31 Osmetech Technology, Inc. Use of microfluidic systems in the electrochemical detection of target analytes

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU772382B2 (en) 2004-04-29
WO1999067425A3 (en) 2000-02-03
CA2330182A1 (en) 1999-12-29
AU4709999A (en) 2000-01-10
US6264825B1 (en) 2001-07-24
EP1090145A2 (en) 2001-04-11
US6290839B1 (en) 2001-09-18
WO1999067425A2 (en) 1999-12-29
JP2002518690A (en) 2002-06-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU772382B2 (en) Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes
US6761816B1 (en) Printed circuit boards with monolayers and capture ligands
US7087148B1 (en) Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes
EP1254372B1 (en) Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes
US6541617B1 (en) Detection of target analytes using particles and electrodes
US20050244954A1 (en) Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes
US6753143B2 (en) Target analyte detection using asymmetrical self-assembled monolayers
EP1218541B1 (en) Sequence determination of nucleic acids using electronic detection
US6833267B1 (en) Tissue collection devices containing biosensors
WO2000016089A2 (en) Signal detection techniques for the detection of analytes
EP1140360A1 (en) Tissue collection devices containing biosensors
AU2004201066A1 (en) Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SL SZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AE AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SL SZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: C2

Designated state(s): AE AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: C2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SL SZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

COP Corrected version of pamphlet

Free format text: PAGES 1/21-21/21, DRAWINGS, REPLACED BY NEW PAGES 1/22-22/22; DUE TO LATE TRANSMITTAL BY THE RECEIVING OFFICE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 47099/99

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1999930592

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2330182

Country of ref document: CA

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

Ref document number: 2000 556065

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1999930592

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 47099/99

Country of ref document: AU